Home

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP User Manual

1. 236 9 ol WH WHAT im 268 10 55 hh hh AAA J eee a e 3 02 12 NOTE Cord grips are supplied separately MOTOR CONNECTION 206 10S 373 14 69 Do OFF ATT o e 195 Ow 17 68 o 0 0 THOMAS AND BETTS 1 4 2922NM CORD GRIP rs 5262 SEALING RING pa 141 LOCKNUT 1 2 KNOCKOUT 22 mm 128 OR EQUIVALENT 4 PLACES supplied separately 34 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 280E 281E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin Figure 16 Dimensions for Bulletin 280E 281E RR Option 3 Hp and less 480V AC KEEP OUT 351 13 82 290 T j 268 287 5 10 55 11 32 10 A Short Circuit Protection M22 Q
2. Warning 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 J3 Reserved Reserved Phase Loss X Reserved X Reserved X Control Power X 1 0 Warning X Reserved X Phase Imbalance A3 Power Loss X Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X Hardware X X Reserved Base Trip Parameter Number 63 The parameter determines the status of Access Rule GET the Base Module Trip Status Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 137 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters or 151 Bit Warning 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 X EEPROM Fault X Internal Comm Hardware Fault X Control Module X X X X PX_X X X _X X X X Reserved Produced Assembly Config Group Int0ODeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 13 This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET SET ee of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT as Group Produced Assembly Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 1 Int01DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 14 This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET SET aa of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT Group Produced Assembly Config
3. Drive Control Parameter Number 48 This parameter provides the status of drive Access Rule GET parameters Data Type WORD Group Drive 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4095 Default Value 0 Bit Function 11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 0 X Accel 1 En Accel 2 En Decel 1 En X Decel 2 En X Freq Sel 0 X Freq Sel 1 Freq Sel 2 X Reserved X Drvin1 X Drvin2 X Drvin3 X Drvin4 Drvin Pr FitState Parameter Number 49 This parameter along with Parameter 50 Access Rule GET SET Drvin Pr FitValue defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 will respond when a Data Type BOOL protection trip occurs When set to 1 Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 continue to Group Drive 1 0 Config operate as command via the network When set to 0 Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 Units will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 50 Minimum Value 0 0 Go to PrFit Value 1 Ignore PrFit Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Drvin Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 49 Drvin Pr FitState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Drvin Net FitState This parameter along with Parameter 52 Drvin Net FitValue defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1
4. Trip Status Parameter Number 4 This parameter provides trip identification Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 X Short Circuit X Overload X Phase Loss X Reserved X Reserved X Control Power X 1 0 Fault X Over Temperature X Phase Imbalance X A3 Power Loss X Reserved xX Reserved X EEprom X HW Fault X X Reserved 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Starter Status Parameter Number 5 This parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET starter Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 6 15 4 3 0 X TripPresent WarningPresent RunningForward X RunningReverse X Ready X Net Ctl Status X Reserved At Reference Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X Keypad Hand Mode X HOA Status DisconnectClosed Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 133 Chapter7 Bulletin 2
5. units Table 53 Bulletin 284E Fault Code Fault Text Help Text 1 Hdw Short Ckt The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped 2 Fault 2 3 Motor Overload The Load has drawn excessive current 4 Drive Overload 150 load for 1 min or 200 load for 3 sec exceeded 5 Phase U to Gnd A Phase U to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor 6 Phase V to Gnd A Phase V to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor 7 Phase W to Gnd A Phase W to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor 8 Phase UV Short Excessive current is detected between phases U and V 9 Phase UW Short Excessive current is detected between phases U and W 10 Phase VW Short Excessive current is detected between phases V and W 11 Ground Fault A current path to earth ground at one or more output terminals 12 Stall The drive is unable to accelerate the motor 13 Control Pwr Loss Indicates the loss of control power This fault can be disabled 14 Control Pwr Fuse The Control Power Fuse has blown Remove power and replace fuse 15 Input Short Flags a shorted sensor input device or input wiring mistake 16 Output Fuse The Output Fuse has blown Remove all power and replace the fuse 17 Over Temp Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 323 AppendixB CIP Information
6. 716 e 8 C B 606 2 68 25 5 fe i 10 Hp 480V AC T 351 113 82 290 11 42 68 2875 1055 144 39 L H m A a I Le 4 203 2 6 8 8 127 T CABLE KEEP OUT 25 A Short Circuit Protection M35 776 e 8 C BI z 60 6 2 25 5 68 1 12 68 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 35 36 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance 284E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin Figure 17 Dimensions for Bulletin 284E RR Option 2 Hp or less at 480V 3 Hp or greater at 480V e ags le 44438 17 50 a2 14 T it r T LA l j 1 4 I F PEN zis i 2268 io EI E Es esa p ck a aaa A gt D bP 2 LYS 3 68 i 27 10 A Short Circuit as 25 A Short Circuit Protection M22 Protection M35 1 2 68 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Mount Orientation Operation Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 The recommended mounting orientation of ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller
7. Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Decel Time 1 Parameter Number 140 138 139 151 154 168 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed Related Parameters rE a Ey decreases 170 177 and 240 247 Maximum Freq _ Decel Rate Access Rule GET SET Decel Time Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 sec Maximum Value 600 0 sec Default Value 10 0 sec Reset To Defaults Parameter Number 141 Access Rule GET SET Stop drive before changing this parameter Data Type BOOL Resets all parameter values to factory Group Drive Setup defaults Unit 0 Ready Idle Default nns 1 Factory Rset Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Motor OL Ret Parameter Number 143 Enables disables the Motor overload Access Rule GET SET Retention function When Enabled the Data T BOOL value that is held in the motor overload Ayp counter is saved at power down and Group Drive Setup restored at power up A change to this parameter setting resets the counter Units 0 Disabled Default a 1 Enabled Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Drive Advanced Setup Group Bulletin 284E only Digital In 1 SEL 151 Parameter Number 151 154 Digital In 2 SEL 152 112 114 138 140 167 168 Digital In 3
8. Parameter Number 45 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 46 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 47 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 101 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Display Units Xx x Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Phase B Current This parameter provides the current of Phase B measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Phase C Current This parameter provides the current of Phase C measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Average Current This parameter provides the average current that is measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Therm Utilized This parameter displays the Thermal Capacity used Parameter Number 102 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Display Units xx x Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 103 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Display Units xx
9. Table 53 Bulletin 284E Fault Code Fault Text Help Text 18 Heatsink Ovrlmp The Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value 19 HW OverCurrent The drive output current has exceeded the hardware limit 20 SW OverCurrent Programmed parameter 198 SW Current Trip has been exceeded 21 A3 Power Loss Unswitched A3 Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold 22 Internal Comm Communication with the internal Power Flex drive has been lost 23 Drive Comm Loss The RS 485 port on the internal Power Flex stopped communicating 24 Power Loss Drive DC Bus Voltage remained below 85 of nominal bus voltage 25 Under Voltage DC Bus Voltage fell below the minimum value 26 Over Voltage DC Bus Voltage exceeded the maximum value 27 MCB EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable 28 Base EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable 29 Drive EEPROM The drive EEPROM checksum checks have failed 30 Wrong Base The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type 31 Fan RMP The internal cooling fan is not running properly 32 Power Unit A major failure has been detected in the drive power section 33 Drive 1 0 Brd A failure has been detected in the drive control and 1 0 section 34 Restart Retries Automatic fault reset and run retries exceeded 35 Drive Aux In Flt The drive auxiliary input interlock is open inside the ArmorStart 36 Analog Input PF Fault Code 29 37 Drv Param Re
10. 05 170 Drive Setup Group Bulletin 284E only 0e eee 175 Drive Advanced Setup Group Bulletin 284E only 179 Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive 2 lt creaxcsdeteedcenss 189 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink Ovr Tmp Fault without Restarting the Drive 0 cece cece e eens 190 Linear List of Parameters for Bulletin 280E 281E and Bulletin 284E unre ia aye Nad odie kth ee ahd 201 Chapter 8 How to Configure an Explicit Message Programming ControlLogix Explicit Message 0 000eee eee 207 Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix 00 eee 207 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Troubleshooting Table of Contents Setting Up the MSG Tnstructions Aias54 dG eae eee WINS Formatting an Explicit Message nace daca dessert anweunwarenanons Performing Explicit Messages 42 5 n 4 cactus Saenoaay caer elites Chapter 9 OVEN VIEW Zetian tats Borchers sa Gud het aedreor dah gone N a aeS Protection Prostamiinine vec ticnsead bland Soa meat Fault Display erroe a e REAT EA bento uke ad aa mantis Cl ir AME Ans as sence Ase By Giad a neem hi Re tale Gta Bio as Rs PAU IE OCS ss aeaa iran N erase E Su bhava de ateeraean eer Fa lt ering 3 ts oak ae colds er A dats ec EA E E Short CCIE ert AG aches trent eld a CAE aie A Ovetload ripen reta noain ore a E T AEREE anne Phase Loss ouaaa eE Wend ES AET a E AR Over Lem
11. The following common services are implemented for the Interface Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 327 AppendixB CIP Information TCP IP Interface Object CLASS CODE 0x00F5 The following class attributes are supported One instance of the TCP IP Interface Object are supported with the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Status DWORD 2 Get Configuration Capability DWORD 0x00000014 0 Configuration from NVS 3 Get Set Configuration Control DWORD 2 Configuration from DHCP Struct of 4 Get Physical Link Object UINT 2 words Padded EPATH NULL Enet Link Object Instance Struct of UDINT IP Address UDINT Network Mask 5 Get Set Interface Configuration UDINT Gateway Address UDINT Primary DNS UDINT Secondary DNS STRING Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names 6 Get Set Host Name STRING 8 Get Set TTL Value USINT Time to Live value for EtherNet IP multicast packets Struct of USINT Allocation Control 9 Get Set Multicast Config USINT Reserved UINT Number of multicast addresses to allocate 1 4 UDINT Multicast starting address 11 Get Set LastConflictedDetected Struct of AcdActivity USINT State of last ACD Activity when last conflicted
12. The following common services are implemented for the QoS Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 320 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B DPI Fault Object CLASS CODE 0x0097 The DPI Fault Object is implemented in the DeviceNet Main Control Board The following class attributes are supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Class Revision UINT 1 2 Get Number of Instances UINT 4 3 Get Fault Cmd Write USINT 0 NOP 1 Clear Fault 2 Clear Fit Queue 4 Get Faut Instance Read UINT information about the alt that tipped the Device 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT The number of Faults recorded in the Fault Queue Four instances of the DPI Fault Object are supported Instance 1 is the most recent fault while 4 is the oldest The have the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 0 Get Full All Info Struct of Fault Code UINT See table below Fault Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT 0 Device Object Instance USINT Ox2c B Fault Text BYTE 16 See table below Fault Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULDINT Timer Description WORD Help Objec
13. ey 7 68 o oan ASi 0 ofp t UU i UHA 7 THOMAS AND BETTS 34 5 2922NM CORD GRIP 1 4 5262 SEALING RING 141 LOCKNUT a or 1 2 KNOCKOUT 22mm uy OR EQUIVALENT 4 PLACES supplied separately 3 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 284E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin Figure 14 Dimensions for Bulletin 284E CR Option 2HP or less 420 38 16 55 3HP or greater 444 38 17 50 236 a 290 11 42 9 287 5 11 32 3 02 12 MOTOR CONNECTION 266 9 10 51 2 373 1469 1 143 Q Q 0S O 195 17 68 o 679 0 0 o o 0 0 1 in CONDUIT OPENING O D 1135 0 75 in CONDUIT OPENING Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 33 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance 284E Daisy Chain DR Conduit Entrance Figure 15 Dimensions for Bulletin 284E DR Option 420 38 16 55 1 Hp or less 230V AC 2 Hp or less 480 575V AC 444 38 17 50 3 Hp or greater 480 575V AC
14. Determinism The ability to predict when information will be delivered Important in time critical applications DHCP The dynamic host configuration protocol is an Internet protocol similar to BootP for automating the configuration of computers that use TCP IP DHCP can be used to automatically assign IP addresses to deliver IP stack configuration parameters such as the subnet mask and default router and to provide other configuration information such as the addresses for printer time and news servers DNS The domain name system is a hierarchical distributed method of organizing the name space of the Internet The DNS administratively groups hosts into a hierarchy of authority that allows addressing and other information to be widely distributed and maintained A significant advantage to the DNS is that using it eliminates dependence on a centrally maintained file that maps host names to addresses Ethernet A physical layer standard using carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CSMA CD methods EtherNet IP Ethernet industrial protocol applies a common industrial protocol CIP over Ethernet by encapsulating messages in TCP UDP IP Ethernet network A local area network that is designed for the high speed exchange of information between computers and related devices Explicit messaging Non time critical messaging that is used for device configuration and data collection such
15. General Connection Module Info Parameters Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Internet Protocol IP Settings IP settings can be manually configured or can be automatically configured if the network supports this capability IP settings set by switches on the module IP Settings Configuration Physical Module IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address EAA AE A Domain Name Primary DNS Server Address es Host Name Secondary DNS EEAS Server Address Refresh communication e Status Running Cancel Help If the IP address was set up using the Rotary Network Address Switches default settings for the IP would already be established and you will not be able to make any changes in this tab In most cases you would not need to make any changes in this tab and it only displays the current IP Settings Configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 107 Chapter5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Port Configuration Tab Click the Port Configuration tab to display the following Module Properties ENBT 284E FVD1P4 1 1 Hok General Connection Module Info Parameters Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Network Auto Speed Duplex Port pon eel Link Status eqotiste Selected Current Selected Current Diagnostics iam Oo x x z al N xl xl ET os Status Running Cancel Help
16. This tab is used to enable or disable a physical port in the module The ports are normally in Auto Negotiate mode which in general is the recommended setting Otherwise you have to physically set the Speed or Duplex selection in this tab It is important to note that although there are two physical ports they act as one Therefore when you press either of the Port Diagnostic buttons information coming from both of the physical ports is displayed 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Network Tab Click this tab to display the following Module Properties ENBT 284E FVD1P4 1 1 Joey General Connection Module Info Parameters Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Network Topology Linear Star Network Status Normal Refresh communication Status Running Cancel Help This tab displays information about the network configuration such as the type of topology linear or device level ring Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 109 Chapter 5 110 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Auto Generated Tags After you install and configure the AOP the controller tags are generated The tags names are descriptive and automatically generated This greatly simplifies programming The figure below shows an example of the auto generated tags
17. Figure 38 1 0 Receptacle Output Pinout M12 Pin 1 NC no connection Pin 2 NC no connection Pin 3 Common Pin 4 Output 24V DC A1 pwr Pin 5 NC no connection 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 Power Connections Figure 39 External Connections for Motor Connector Bulletin 284E 5 Hp and Bulletin 280E 281E 3 Hp or less M22 at 480V AC Pin 1 T1 black Pin 2 T2 white Pin 3 T3 red Pin 4 Ground green yellow Figure 40 External Connections for Motor Connector Bulletin 280E 281E 10 Hp M35 at 480V AC Pin 1 T1 black Pin 2 Ground green yellow a Pin 3 T3 red Pin 4 T2 white Figure 41 External Connections for Brake Contactor Connector M25 Pin 1 L1 black Pin 2 Ground green yellow Pin 3 L2 white Figure 42 External Connections for Dynamic Brake Connection M22 Pin 1 Ground green yellow Pin 2 BR black Pin 3 BR white Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 61 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance 62 Figure 43 Incoming Control Power M22 24V DC Only Pin 1 24V DC unswitched A3 red Pin 2 Common A2 black Pin 3 PE green Pin 4 Not used blank Pin 5 24V DC switched A1 blue Pin 6 Not used white Figure 44 Incoming Three P
18. 3White E 2White E 4 Green E 2Green E 4 Black V ArmorConnect Cable Ratings The ArmorConnect power media cables are rated per UL Type TC 600V 90 C Dry 75 C Wet Exposed Run ER or MTW 600V 90 C or STOOW 105 C 600V Canadian Standards Association CSA STOOW 600V FT2 For additional information regarding ArmorConnect power media see publication 280PWR SGO001 Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media When using ArmorConnect three phase power media fuses or circuit breakers can be used for the motor branch circuit protective device for the group motor installations 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 For 32 A rated ArmorConnect cable for trunk and taps Circuit Breaker Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480V AC maximum when protected by a Bulletin 140U H or Bulletin 140G H circuit breaker not rated more than 480V 100 A and a maximum interrupting of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes Short Circuit Current Rating SCCR Examples include 140G H6F3 D10 or 140U H6C3 D10 Fusing Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes SCCR at 600V AC maximum when protected by CC J and T class fuses For 10 A and 15 A rated ArmorConnect cable taps Circuit Breaker Suitable for use o
19. and overload device is Max Ratings _ listed for group Sym Amps RMS SKA 10KA ri 4 b P Fuse ASA 45A installation with specified maximum branch circuit Type CC J and T fuses only protection YHP 2HP 5HP 5HP 1HP Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294 i a Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 a a Hameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate 7 2 10 4 1 D and their control equipment Two or more motors Each controller is listed for group installation with the same specified maximum protection The example addresses the overcurrent protection of the conductors controllers and motors Protection for three overcurrent conditions is considered motor running overloads short circuit line to line faults and ground faults line to ground The short circuit fault and ground fault protection is governed by 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 and explained in Requirements 1 2 and 3 and Figure 109 The overload protection explained in Requirement 4 is governed by 7 3 1 and 7 3 1 1 Overload coordination depends on each conductor having the minimum ampacity given by 12 5 3 and 12 5 4 The method for determining this minimum ampacity is explained in Requirement 5 and Figure 110 The example branch circuit is sho
20. DB Fault WORD Reversing Starters and Inverter Starters only Inverter Starters only The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor Object Implemented for Service Code Instance Service Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 317 AppendixB CIP Information Overload Object CLASS CODE 0x002C No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object A single instance Instance 1 of the Overload Object is supported for DOL and Reversing Starters Instance 1 contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set FLA Setting BOOL XXX X amps 4 Get Set Trip Class USINT 5 Get Average Current INT XXX X amps 7 Get Thermal Utilized USINT xxx FLA 8 Get Current L1 INT 9 Get Current L2 INT XXX X amps 10 Get Current L3 INT 190 Get Set FLA Setting Times 10 BOOL XXX XX amps 192 Get Average Current Times 10 UINT XXX XX amps 193 Get Current L1 Times 10 UINT 194 Get Current L2 Times 10 UINT XXX XX amps 195 Get Current L3 Times 10 UINT 318 The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object Implemented for Service Code Instance Service Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P
21. Figure 26 Unshielded Multi Conductor Cable Filler PVC Outer o Sheath O O Single Ground Conductor Shielded Cable Shielded cable contains all general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise that is generated by a typical AC Drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given for installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good candidates for shielded cable An acceptable shielded cable has four XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket Figure 27 Shielded Cable with Four Conductors Drain Wire Shield Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 51 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Metal connector body Shield Terminating Connectors The cable connector that is selected must provide good 360 contact and low transfer impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry plate at both the motor and the ArmorStart controller for electrical bonding SKINTOP MS SC MS SCL cable grounding conne
22. Internal Communication Fault Indicates an internal communication fault has been detected This fault cannot be disabled DC Bus Fault Indicates the drive has detected a DC Bus Fault This fault cannot be disabled Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EEPROM Fault This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable This fault cannot be disabled Hardware Fault This indicates an Internal FAN RPM is low Internal temperature monitor failure Internal Brake fuse opened or incorrect base or control module This fault cannot be disabled Restart Retries This fault is generated when the drive detects that the auto retries count has been exceeded This fault cannot be disabled Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Miscellaneous Faults For Bulletin 284E units this fault is actually the logical of several drive faults not specifically enumerated This includes DB1 Brake fault Heatsink Over Temperature fault code F8 Params Defaulted fault fault code F48 and SVC Autotune fault fault code F80 This fault cannot be disabled EtherNet IP LED Status EtherNet IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs Indication e Link Activity Status LEDS Figure 88 EtherNet IP LED Link1 Activity Status Port 1 LED Color Bicolor Green Yellow see Table 31 J Link2 Activity Status Port 2 LED Color Bicolor Green
23. Introduction Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 22 Troubleshooting The purpose of this chapter is to help with troubleshooting the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller by using the LED status display and diagnostic parameters ATTENTION Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous Electrical shock burns or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury For safety of maintenance personnel and others who might be exposed to electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities follow the local safety related work practices for example the NFPA7OE Part Il in the United States Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices procedures and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments gt ATTENTION Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits The cause of the fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation Failure to correct a control system of mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation gt ATTENTION The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to discharge after removal of mains supply Before working on the drive verify the isolation of mains supply from line inputs R S T L1 L2 L3 Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to
24. Rated operating current AC 3 A 260 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Operating cycles 10E 06 O1E 06 10E 04 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP AC 3 amp AC 4 10 AC 4 Mixed operation of squirrel cage motors U 400 460V Rated operating current AC 3 AC 4 A Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Chapter 11 100 261 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Maximum Operating Rates AC 3 Switching of squirrel cage motors while starting U 230 460V Relative operating time 40 Starting time tA 0 25 s O1E 402 AC 4 Inching of squirrel cage motors Ue 230 460V Starting time tA 0 25 s 262 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Chapter 11 Bulletin 284E Electrical Ratings UL NEMA IEC Rated Operation Voltage 380 480V 380 480V Rate Insulation Voltage 600V 600V Rated Impulsed Voltage 6kV 6kV Dielectric Withstand 2200V AC 2500V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Utilization Category N A AC 3 a Protection Against Shock N A IP2X Power Circuit SVC Performance 3 phase Hp Rating Output Current A 284E FVD1
25. 181 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters 170 Preset Freq 0 Parameter Number 170 173 174 177 171 Preset Freq 1 138 140 151 154 167 168 172 Preset Freq 2 Related Parameters 540 247 250 ii 257 d 173 Preset Freq 3 174 Preset Freq 4 Access Rule GET SET 175 Preset Freq 5 Data Type UINT 176 Preset Freq 6 177 Preset Freq 7 Group Drive Advanced Setup Unit 0 1H Provides a fixed frequency command value when Parameters 151 154 Digital In x Minimum Value 0 0 Sel is set to Option 4 Preset Frequencies Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value See Table 26 Table 26 Parameters 170 177 Preset Freq Options 170 Default 0 0 Hz 171 Default 5 0 Hz 172 Default 10 0 Hz 173 Default 20 0 Hz 174 Default 30 0 Hz 175 Default 40 0 Hz 176 Default 50 0 Hz 177 Default 60 0 Hz Min Max 0 0 400 0 Hz Display 0 1 Hz Input State of Digital In 1 I Input State of Digital In 2 I Input State of Digital In 3 1 Accel Decel 0 Terminal 05 when 0 Terminal 06 when 0 Terminal 07 when Frequency Parameter Parameter 151 4 Parameter 152 4 Parameter 153 4 Source Used O 0 0 0 170 Preset Freq 0 Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 1 0 0 171 Preset Freq 1 Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 0 1 0 172 Preset Freq 2 Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 1 1 0 173 Preset Freq 3 Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 0 0 1 174 Preset Freq 4 Accel Time 3
26. 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Figure 78 Start Boost Parameter 188 Maximum Voltage Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts Voltage Parameter 186 Break Voltage Start Boost Parameter 186 Parameter 187 Parameter 134 Minimum Freq Brake Voltage Sets the frequency where brake voltage is applied when Parameter 184 Boost Select 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode 0 V Hz Brake Frequency Sets the frequency where brake frequency is applied when Parameter 184 Boost Select 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode 0 V Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 reak Frequency Parameter 132 Motor NP Hertz Frequency Parameter 135 Maximum Freq Parameter Number 186 Related Parameters 131 132 vas 185 187 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 1 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 25 0 Parameter Number 187 Related Parameters 131 132 erm 185 186 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value 15 0 Hz P September 2015 187 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Maximum Voltage Sets the highest voltage that the d
27. Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A the rating that is marked on any of the controllers The markings of each controller specify that a fuse having a maximum rating of 45 A may protect the motor controller When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault current of 5000 A or less the class of the fuse is not specified and may be any class When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault current from 5000 to 10000 A the class of the fuse must be CC J or T Since the electrical supply has an available fault current of 9000 A selecting a Class CC J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A or less ensures each motor controller is applied within its own ratings Supplementary Note 1 The rating of the fuse must not exceed the rating that is permitted by 7 2 10 4 2 to protect the smallest conductor in the circuit Selecting a Class CC J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A being less than 60 A also protects the conductors see Requirement 2 Although the ArmorStart LT products presently have a maximum fuse rating of 45 A future controllers may have maximum fuse ratings that exceed 60 A In this case the maximum rating of fuse is limited by the rating to protect the 14 AWG conductors 60 A The maximum rating that is permitted for the controller 45 A is a maximum rating and can be reduced for more conservative protection provided nuisance openi
28. ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller includes an embedded dual port switch that supports Device Level Ring DLR applications It supports IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock This allows synchronization within a distributed network of devices Transparent clocks in combination with enhanced or managed ethernet switches are able to adjust for network introduced timing delays and improve the performance of motion applications The ArmorStart EtherNet IP network address can be configured dynamically or statically via the embedded Web Server In addition the controller s IP address can be manually set via three IP address switches found on the I O section of the device The controller s embedded web server allows the user to check status diagnostics and perform simple device configuration using a standard web browser It also supports SMTP protocol that allows the user to configure the device to send an alert e mail of potential issues The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller is a modular plug and play PnP design that offers simplicity in wiring and installation The quick disconnects for the I O communications and motor connections reduce the wiring time and minimize wiring errors The controller offers as standard four configurable sink source DC inputs and two sourcing solid state outputs to be used with sensors and actuators respectively for monitoring and controlling the application process The ArmorStart controller
29. Curent 1 5A Rated Output I Current 1 5A I l l 6A fuse max Current 45Afusemax q a i ews TNS Maximum conductor size 10 AWG Motor Motor y b 4 This section uses Figure 108 to explain the requirements from 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 that are relevant to and permit the multiple motor branch circuit of Figure 106 The following is the complete text of 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 and an abbreviated version of Table 51 from the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79 The table is abbreviated to cover the size of conductors that are generally relevant to the ArmorStart LT motor controllers Complete Text 7 2 10 4 Two or more motors or one or more motor s and other load s and their control equipment shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit where short circuit and ground fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses provided the following conditions under 1 and either 2 or 3 are met 1 Each motor controller and overload device is either listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection or selected such that the ampere rating of the motor branch short circuit and ground fault protective device does not exceed that permitted by 7 2 10 1 for that individual motor controller or overload device and corresponding motor load 2 The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does
30. Decel Time 3 Input State of Digital In 1 I Input State of Digital In 2 I Input State of Digital In 3 I Accel Decel 0 Terminal 05 when 0 Terminal 06 when 0 Terminal 07 when Frequency Parameter Parameter 151 4 Parameter 152 4 Parameter 153 4 Source Used 1 0 1 175 Preset Freq 5 Accel Time 3 Decel Time 3 0 1 1 176 Preset Freq 6 Accel Time 4 Decel Time 4 1 1 1 177 Preset Freq 7 Accel Time 4 Decel Time 4 182 When a Digital Input is set to Accel 2 amp Decel 2 and the input is active that input overrides the settings in this table Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Jog Frequency Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued Jog Accel Decel Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued DC Brake Time Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor See Parameter 181 DC Brake Level DC Brake Level Defines the maximum DC brake current in amps applied to the motor when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to either Ramp or DC Brake Parameter Number 178 Related Parameters 135 151 154 179 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value
31. Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Renewal Parts Appendix D Bulletin 284E Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection Figure 113 Bulletin 284E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 284 E F V D2P3 Z N R Option Option2 Option3 L Bulletin Number i 284 VFD Starter Communications E EtherNet IP Enclosure Type F Type 4 IP67 Torque Performance Mode Vv Sensorless Vector Control Volts per Hz Output Current Control Module Control Voltage Z 24V DC N Control Module Only Option 3 EMI EM Filter oc Output Contactor Option2 DB DB Brake Connector DB1 DB Brake Connector for IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor SB Source Brake Connector Option 1 3 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Jog Function Blank Status Only Motor Media Type R Round Table 60 Bulletin 284E Control Module with Sensorless Vector Control IP67 NEMA 4 Input Voltage 380 480V 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 24V DC kW Hp Control Voltage 0 4 0 5 284E FVD1P4Z N R 0 75 1 0 284E FVD2P3Z N R 15 2 0 284E FVD4POZ N R 2 2 3 0 284E FVD6POZ N R 3 0 5 0 284E FVD7P6Z N R Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 343 AppendixD Renewal Parts Bulletin Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection Figure 114 Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structu
32. September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Table 12 Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly Status Tags Controller Input Status Tags Controller Name Name Logix Tag Name AS_ DEMO Fault AS_DEMO 1 Fault AS_ DEMO TripPresent AS_DEMO 1 TripPresent AS_ DEMO WarningPresent AS_DEMO 1 WarningPresent AS_ DEMO RunningForward AS_DEMO 1 RunningForward AS_ DEMO RunningReverse AS_DEMO I RunningReverse AS_ DEMO Ready AS_DEMO I Ready AS_ DEMO NetworkControlStatus AS_DEMO NetworkControlStatus AS_ DEMO AS_DEMO I NetworkReferenceStatus AS_ DEMO AtReference AS_DEMO 1 AtReference AS_DEMO Ind AS_DEMO I In0 AS_DEMO In AS_DEMO I In1 AS_DEMO In2 AS_DEMO I In2 AS_DEMO In3 AS_DEMO3 I In3 AS_DEMO Hand AS_DEMO I Hand AS_ DEMO DisconnectClosed AS_DEMO 1 DisconnectClosed AS_ DEMO BrakeContactorStatus AS_DEMO BrakeContactorStatus AS_ DEMO OutputContactorStatus AS_DEMO 1 0utputContactorStatus AS_DEMO OutputFrequency AS_DEMO 1 0utputFrequency AS_ DEMO Pt00DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt00DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt01DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt01DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt02DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt02DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt03DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt03DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt04DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt04DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt05DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt05DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt06DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt06DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt07DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt07D
33. 15 20 15 94 cehe l NA L p i ao FE A YL ete za r AK R2 030P1K2 AK R2 120P1K2 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Accessories Chapter 12 Recommended thermostat control wiring to prevent dynamic brake overheating Figure 104 Thermostat Control Wiring Z R L1 Power siz F T L3 xt M Contactor o U maa mee Power Off Power On JE olo ome M M Do Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Sensorless Vector Control SVC Recommended Dynamic Brake Modules for Option DB1 IP67 Resistor Application Type 1 Application Type 2 Drive and Max Braking Braking Braking Motor Size Resistance Continuous Max Energy Torque of Torque of Duty Torque of Duty kW Cat No Ohms 5 Power kW kJ Motor Motor Cyce Motor Cycle 380 480 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 284R 360P500 M 360 0 086 17 305 100 41 150 31 0 75 1 284R 360P500 M 360 0 086 17 220 100 23 150 15 1 5 2 284R 360P500 M 360 0 086 17 110 100 12 110 11 2 2 3 284R 120P1K2 M 120 0 26 52 197 100 24 150 16 4 5 284R 120P1K2 M 120 0 26 52 124 100 13 124 10 Drive rating and DB part numbers are not interchangeable Only use specified resistor Customer is responsible to evaluate if performa
34. 19 HW Warning Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor o a Lg PNB INT ofh sase 6 The Bulletin 284 bit definitions 0 Run Forward 1 Run Reverse Reserved 2 User Output A 3 User Output B 4 Drive Digital In 1 5 Drive Digital In 2 6 Drive Digital In 3 7 Drive Digital In 4 8 Jog Forward 9 Jog Reverse 362 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Application Examples Appendix F Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the ladder editor TagName Data Type DOP INT mae ONT 12 4 bf 8 B 10 11 12 113114 15 berz The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart units Produce network bit declaration 0 Net Output 0 1 Net Output 1 2 Net Output 2 3 Net Output 3 4 Net Output 4 5 Net Output 5 6 Net Output 6 7 Net Output 7 8 Net Output 8 9 Net Output 9 10 Net Output 10 11 Net Output 11 12 Net Output 12 13 Net Output 13 14 Net Output 14 15 Fault Reset 16 Accel 1 17 Accel 2 18 Decel 1 19 Decel 2 20 Freq Select 1 21 Freq Select 2 22 Freq Select 3 23 Motion Disable 24 Keypad Disable Rockwell Automation Pub
35. 889A CXN4 M4 Auzxiliary power trunk cables are four pin mini style patchcords Cat No 889N F4HKNM Straight Female to Straight Male D ArmorStart auxiliary adapter power tees allow connecting devices to the power trunk line using an associated power drop cordset Cat No 898N 543ES NKF Auxiliary power drop cable Cat No 889D R4HJDM 18AWG wire Right Female to Straight Male Control Power Media Patchcords Example Cat No 889N F65GFNM Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 57 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Figure 35 Interconnect Diagram Incoming Control Power M22 24V DC Only ArmorBlock amp ArmorPoint Pin 1 V Unswitched enon AS Motor AS Motor 1732D 1738 amp O OP mioma Controller Controller 173208 e o o wr o Pin 3 Not used green VO Power Pin 4 Not used blank A2 A2 User Pin 5 V Switched es AV blue A3 __Al Pin 6 Not used white PE HLT me FEMALE PN Reet ee Power Pwr G ae i Female Ao pn SAE Fi a SAE Male lal ois SAE e 2 ATO SAE 12 Auxilary Aux sree avoc zayoe Uneted Trunk 1 2 3 5 6 wv l 1 EF F 2 2 a M E A A t jmf 3 3 N 4 Shown with a common power 4 4 supply for switched and 11 AS Aux Pwr Tee 11 AS Aux Pwr Tee unswitched power Aux Bulk head C a SAE CENELEC Female fale Aeiesipoody SAE SAE Female Mre Female Male Black V 3Red V 1Red V
36. A PWM drive creates AC motor current by sending DC voltage pulses to the motor in a specific pattern These pulses affect the wire insulation and can be a source of electrical noise The rise time amplitude and frequency of these pulses must be considered when choosing a wire cable type The choice of cable must consider 1 The effects of the drive output once the cable is installed 2 The need for the cable to contain noise that is caused by the drive output 3 The amount of cable charging current available from the drive 4 Possible voltage drop and subsequent loss of torque for long wire runs Keep the motor cable lengths less than 13 7 m 45 ft unless otherwise noted in the device specifications Unshielded Cable Properly designed multi conductor cable can provide good performance in wet applications significantly reduce voltage stress on wire insulation and reduce cross coupling between drives Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 The use of cables without shielding is generally acceptable for installations where electrical noise created by the drive does not interfere with the operation of other devices such as communications cards photoelectric switches weigh scales and others Be certain the installation does not require shielded cable to meet specific EMC standards for CE C Tick or FCC Cable specifications depend on the installation type
37. Chapter 5 96 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software 3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type pull down menu For this example a Cat No 1769 L35E and software version 19 is used Click OK New Controller x E Vendor Allen Bradley Type 1763 L35E CompactLogixS335E Controller p Revision 19 z Cancel F Redundancy Enabled Help Name ArmorStart_QuickBtart Description a Ei Chassis Type kmo o Slot p Safety Partner Slot lt none gt Create In EAR SLogix 5000 Proects 00 Browse 4 To add a new module to the tree right click zs Ethernet and select New Module This allows you to add a new ArmorStart selection to the Logix Project a 1759 0956 Ethemet Pert SuEm A Camosctius E Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 5 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK 280 F12Z 10C ArmorRat DOL 1 14 5 5A 24 DC 2B0E F12Z 100 ArmorStart DOL 3 24 164 24 OC 281E F12Z I0A ArmorStart Reverser 0 24A 1 2A 24V DC 2B1E F 122 108 ArmorStart Reverser 0 54 2 54 24 DC 2B1E FI2Z 10C ArmorStart Reverser 1 14 5 5A 247 DC 2B1E FI2Z 100 Armorstart Reverser 3 2A 16A 24 DC 6 The AOP is shown below Enter a Name for this ArmorStart selection and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting is used T
38. Control and 3 Phase Power Connections Motor Cable Connection Code 7 6 A 3 3 kW 5 0 Hp 25 A Rated Device Option 1 3 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Jog Function Option 2 Code Description DB Brake Connector Connectivity to IP67 DB Resistor Source Brake Contactor No cable Option 3 EMI EMI Filter OC Output Contactor CR Conduit Round Media or RR Round Round Media Description Control Power Conduit Entrance 3 Phase Power Conduit Entrance Motor Cable 3 m unshielded cordset male 90 Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance 3 m shielded cordset male 90 Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance No cable Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain 3 m unshielded cordset male 90 Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain 3 m shielded cordset male 90 Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain No cable Round Media Male Receptacle Round Media Male Receptacle 3 m unshielded cordset male 90 Round Media Male Receptacle Round Media Male Receptacle 3 m shielded cordset male 90 Round Media Male Receptacle Round Media Male Receptacle No cable The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three phase squirrel cage induction motors as follows Bulletin 280E 281E up to 10 Hp 7 4 KW at 480V AC Bulletin 284E up to 5 Hp 3 0 kW at 480V AC ArmorStart EtherNe
39. Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded 8 Ramp EMB CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control Stop command clears active fault 9 Ramp EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 See Parameter 155 to set the EM brake actuation condition Speed Reference Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart are the following 1 Internal Freq 4 Preset Freq 5 Comm Port 9 Jog Freq Accel Time 1 Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases Maximum Freg Accel Rate Accel Time Parameter Number 137 Related Parameters 136 180 182 205 260 2610 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 9 Parameter Number 138 101 102 112 139 140 Related Parameters 151 154 169 170 177 232 240 247 and 250 257 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 139 138 140 151 154 167 Related Parameters 170 177 and 240 247 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 sec Maximum Value 600 0 sec Default Value 10 0 sec Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 177
40. H Fuses 2 i mer eine Branch short circuit and ground fault Cd rotection device i p Combined Load Conductors 10 AWG Controller ratings further restrict the fuse 1 Suitable for Motor Group Installation i 5S e Max Ratings H Sym Amps RMS SKA TOK l Fuse ASA ASA HP 2HP 5HP 5HP 1HP Type CC J and Tfuses only Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294 Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 D Compareto Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate controller max fuse ratings I ames Conductor Table 7 2 10 4 iiiar Cc protection Max protection oan neers Fuse 60 Amax E Smallest wo A any dass Determine conductor 1 fuse class r h a Sere and max J as a ma E i o wo tating for RHP 2HP SHP N SHP N HP i 3 150 Hts Res 5 A At PRC protection pr ag 7 6 a l rani w Y J Z P H smallest f OSEO o S the creuit Each controller is suitable for group installation with the same maximum ratings of fuse anma Table 430 250 of NFPA 70 2011 Figure 110 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit Minimum Conductor Ampacity Electrical Supply Minimum Required Ampacity MRA MRA 1 25 Max controller input currents Sum remaining controller input currents Controller input currents I1 12 13 14 15 Max controller input current 13 1
41. If at any point you go offline and a path is selected you can also go online by clicking the Offline drop down in the upper left corner of the screen Click Go Online to connect to the ArmorStart device as shown below g RSLogix 5000 ArmorStart_Ped in ArmorStart_Ped_BAKOOS File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsa S zale ol 3 He Offline J RUN Path AB_ No Forces Go Online f No Edits Upload R xi Safety Unlocked Download m paN E Safet A 2 E Bs F unset Bic amp Motion Gr Unare Add On 1 3 Armo Armo f G5 Guar Controller Properties amp Data Types amp User Defined Ep Strings oa Add On Defined Oi Predefined i Module Defined E Trends Note If a yellow triangle appears next to the ArmorStart Icon in the Controller Organizer Tree as shown below it means that the connection is faulted The problem must be fixed before you can connect to the ArmorsStart device The next steps assume that the connection was successful A 284E FYD1P4 4 ArmorStart_EtherNet Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Parameters Tab Return to the Parameters tab again once the AOP is opened by selecting the ArmorStart in the project tree Notice that when clicking in the Parameters tab an ArmorStart Correlation pop up window is displayed as
42. If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted 2 Non Resettable This type of fault may require drive or motor repair or is caused by wiring or programing errors The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared Automatically Clearing Faults Option Step Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 Auto Rstrt Delay to a value other than 0 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrImp Fault without Restarting the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 Auto Rstrt Delay to 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 237 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Auto Restart Reset Run The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention This allows remote or unattended operation Only certain faults are allowed to be reset Certain faults Type 2 that indicate possible drive component malfunction cannot be reset Caution should be used when enabling this feature since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command that is based on user selected programming The following table describes Bulletin 284E Faults as seen in Parameters 107 108
43. Input P151 P152 P153 or P154 Table 67 Selecting Drive Input Parameter Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Digital In 1 Sel Digital In 2 Sel 151 154 Selects the function for the digital inputs See leer gs Drive Advanced Setup Digital In 3 Sel page Liz Digital In 4 Sel e Set the Drive In you select to 27 Em Brk Release If EM Brake function enabled this input releases the brake manually 27 Em Brk RIs If EM Brake function enabled this input releases the brake See parameter 155 and set to EM Brk Cntrol 22 Provides programmable control of Em Brk via digital input 1 4 2 Set P137 Stop Mode to one of the following e 8 Ramp EM B CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control Stop command clears active fault e 9 Ramp EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 349 Appendix F 350 Application Examples Frequency Minimum Freq gt Commanded 260 EM Brk Off Delay 3 Set P155 Relay Out Sel to 22 EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized e Program Parameter 260 EM Brk OFF Delay for desired action Sets the time that the drive remains at minimum frequency P134 before ramping to the commanded frequency EM Brk OFF Delay Sets the time that the drive remains at minimum frequency before ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 1
44. Motor Cables Renewal Parts Appendix D Description Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No 90 M22 Motor IP67 Type 4 12 3 m 9 8 280 MTR22 M3 Cordset 6 m 19 6 280 MTR22 M6 14 m 45 9 280 MTR22 M14 90 M22 Motor IP67 Type 4 12 3 m 9 8 284 MTRS22 M3 Cordset Shielded 6 m 19 6 284 MTRS22 M6 14 m 45 9 284 MTRS22 M14 90 Male Straight IP67 Type 4 12 1m 3 3 280 MTR22 M1D Female M22 Pathcords 3 0 m 9 8 280 MTR22 M3D Table 64 Dynamic Brake Cable Description Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No 90 M25 Source Brake Cable IP67 Type 4 12 285 DBK22 M3 Table 65 Source Brake Cable Description Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No 90 M25 Source Brake IP67 Type 4 12 3m 9 8 285 BRC25 M3 Cable 6m 19 6 285 BRC25 M6 14m 45 9 285 BRC25 M14 Table 66 Miscellaneous Description Internal Replacement Fan 284 FAN Alignment Pin Replacement ONLY if base and control module have provision for it Cannot retrofit without placement Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 2 each 284 PIN 345 AppendixD Renewal Parts Replacement Fuses Description Output Fuse Fast acting high interupting capacity tubular fuse Rating 2 5 A 250V Littlefuse PN 021602 5 Dimension mm in 20 0 787 x 5 0 197 Control Fuse UL Listed Class CC CSA HRC 1 Cooper
45. Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Multiple Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group Installation General Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A The suitability of each ArmorStart LT motor controller for installation according to either NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 depends on the means of connecting the power circuit wiring All controllers are suitable for installation in multiple motor branch circuits on industrial machinery according to 7 2 10 4 of NFPA 79 The controllers that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option are also suitable for installation in multiple motor branch circuits according to 430 53 C and 430 53 D of NFPA 70 NEC The controllers that have the Power Media Gland Plate Option are suitable for installation only on industrial machinery These versions are limited to industrial machinery because the UL listing for the power media connectors themselves and their matching cable assemblies covers installation only on industrial machinery Multiple motor branch circuits like that shown in Figure 106 have this fundamental tradeoff protecting more than one controller with a single set of fuses requires more electrical and mechanical robustness in each controller In exchange for eliminating the cost and space necessary for a dedicated set of fuses in front of each controller the construction of each c
46. Start Run FWD Input Bit 1 Direction Run REV Input Bit 2 Stop Input Bit 3 Dynamic Brake Transistor On Dig In Status Status of the control terminal block digital inputs Bit 0 Digital In 1 Sel Bit 1 Digital In 2 Sel Bit 2 Digital In 3 Sel Bit 3 Digital In 4 Sel Comm Status Status of communications ports Bit 0 Receiving Data Bit 1 Transmitting Data Bit 2 Internal Communications Bit 3 Communication Error Elapsed Run Time Accumulated time drive is outputting power Time is displayed in 10 hour increments Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 113 Related Parameter 102 134 135 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 114 Related Parameter 151 154 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 115 Related Parameter 205 206 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 118 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 1 10 hrs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 173 Chapte
47. The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates as standard electronic motor overload protection This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an 2t algorithm The ArmorStart controller s overload protection is programmable via the communication network providing the user with flexibility The Bulletin 280E 281E overload trip class can be selected for class 10 15 20 protection The Bulletin 284E overload trip class is Class 10 only Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload see Chapter 11 for the specification for overload trip curves ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller includes embedded switch technology as standard Each ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller consumes one Common Industrial Protocol CIP connection The ArmorStart controller consumes a Class 3 connection when RSLogix 5000 software displays the AOP In general for a Device Level Ring DLR or linear network keep individual segments to 50 nodes or less In addition it is important to reserve a minimum of 10 of available bandwidth to allow for processing of explicit messages Common features are e Designed according to the ODVA specification for EtherNet IP ODVA specification found at http www odva org e Embedded switch technology is designed to enable end devices to form linear and ring network topologies e Supports DLR protocol e Supports IEEE 1588 transparent clock for CIP Motion and CIP Sync a
48. Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 4 Int02DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 15 This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET SET IntO2DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT Group Produced Assembly Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Int03DeviceOut Cfg This parameter is used to specify Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 or 151 Starter Protection Group Pr FitReset Mode This parameter configures the Protection Fault reset mode 0 Manual 1 Automatic Faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition is corrected Pr Fault Enable This parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1 Parameter Number 16 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group Produced Assembly Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 6 Parameter Number 23 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 24 Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 12419 Maximum Value 13287 Default Value 12419 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 139 Chapter7 Bul
49. W FWD LED St REV IED Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Else If REV LED Set FWD LED 9 9 9 9 9 If FWD LED transition to JOG FWD lence idn r idn r ares linor If REV LED Transition to JOG REV 9 9 9 9 9 auro Command motor OFF and Transition to AUTO Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore If FWD LED transition to HAND FWD tiers janore fang janet ianore if REV LED transition to HAND REV 9 9 9 9 9 Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor OFF Ignore OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition O to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP Keypad and HOA Disable Note In nearly all instances if the processor detects multiple buttons are pressed simultaneously the software interprets this as a no button pressed condition The only exception to this rule is if multiple buttons are pressed and one of them is the OFF button If the OFF button is pressed in combination with any combination of other buttons the processor will interpret this the same as if the OFF button were pressed by itself Parameter 46 Keypad Disable disables the HAND FWD REV and Jog buttons on the HOA keypad The OFF and AUTO buttons are always enabled even if Parameter 46 is set to 1 Disable In addition for Bulletin 284 the user can disable the HAND Reverse and Jog Reverse
50. and 109 Fault 1 2 or 3 Table 39 Bulletin 284E Faults Parameters 107 108 and 109 Fault 1 2 or 3 No Fault Type Description Action F2 Auxiliary Input 1 Auxiliary input interlock is open 1 Check remote wiring 2 Check communications F3 Power Loss 2 DC bus voltage remained below 85 of 1 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption nominal 2 Check input fuses F4 UnderVoltage 1 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum 1 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption value F5 OverVoltage 1 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum 1 Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can value also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option F6 Motor Stalled 1 Drive is unable to accelerate motor 1 Increase Parameters 139 or 167 Accel Time x or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 Current Limit 1 F7 Motor Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip 1 An excessive motor load exists Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 133 Motor OL Current 2 Verify Parameter 184 Boost Select setting F8 Heatsink Ovrlmp 1 Heatsink temperature exceeds a 1 Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins Verify that ambient temperature has not predefined value exceeded 40 C 2 R
51. is the vertical configuration This is especially important for the Bulletin 284 This allows proper air flow over the heat sink Improper mounting or debris build up reduces air flow and increased internal temperatures This may reduce the overall life of the product For alternate mounting contact your local sales representative IMPORTANT For proper heat dissipation and product operation mount in the vertical orientation as shown The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three phase squirrel cage induction motors as follows Bulletin 280E 281E 0 24 16 A 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 50 60 Hz Bulletin 284E up to 5 Hp 3 0 kW 480V AC The ArmorStart EtherNet IP Distributed Motor Controller accepts a control power input of 24V DC Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 37 Chapter 2 Wiring 38 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Power Control and Ground Wiring Table 2 provides the power control and ground wire capacity and the tightening torque requirements The power control ground and terminals accepts a maximum of two wires per terminal Table 2 Power Control Ground Wire Size and Torque Specifications Terminals Wire Size Torque Wire Strip Length Primary Secondary ett aa Power Terminal a 2 Nem and 1 5 4 0 mm 5 da Termii 0 35 in 9 mm Ground 16 10 American Wire ae Pa i Gage AWG 05 Nem 1 0 mm2 4 0 mm 6 2 Ibein
52. 0 Sink User 1 0 Configuration Common be sink or source Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 201 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Table 28 ArmorStart Parameters Parameter Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Controller This parameter along with Parameter 34 OutA Pr FitValue 0 f 33 Quta Pr FitState defines how Output A will respond when a trip occurs Goto PrFlt Value User 1 0 Configuration Common 34 OutA Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Output A 0 Open User 1 0 Configuration Common This parameter along with Parameter 36 OutA Net FitValue 0 35 OutA Net FitState defines how Output A will respond Goto Fault Value User 1 0 Configuration Common 36 OutA Net FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output 0 Open User 1 0 Configuration Common This parameter along with Parameter 38 OutA Net IdlValue 0 A 37 OutA Net IdlState defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle Goto Idle Value User 1 0 Configuration Common This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes 38 OutA Net IdlValue when the network is idle and Parameter 37 OutA Net 0 Open User 1 0 Configuration Common IdIState is set to 0 This parameter along with Parameter 40 OutB Pr FitValue 0 39 OutB Pr FitState defines how Output B will respond wh
53. 16 e 1 16 7 6amp 6 4amp It is possible to extend the operational range of the units if the ambient temperature is lower than 40 C 104 F or if line reactors are used Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 269 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP 270 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Chapter 12 Accessories Industrial Ethernet Media D Code Connectivity M12 1585D Patchcords and Cordsets IP67 Cat No M12 D Code Connector Type Unshielded 8 8 Male Straight to 1585D M4TBDM Male Straight a amp Male Straight to 1585D M4TBDE Male Right Angle amp Male Right Angle to 1585D E4TBDE Male Right Angle A Male Straight to 1585D M4TBDF Female Straight Available in 0 3 0 6 1 2 5 10 15 and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 271 Chapter12 Accessories Patchcords and Cordsets IP20 to IP67 Cat No Front Mount Receptacle Connector Type Unshielded Female Front Mount 3 to 1585D D4TBJM RJ45 Transition Cable Connector Type Unshielded Male Straight a aS i i to 1585D M4TBJM RJ45 Available in 0 3 0 6 1 2 5 10 15 and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters Note See www ab com networks media ethernet to learn more about Industrial Ethernet Media M12
54. 284E 123 Output Power Fctr ii aaa degrees between miotor voltage and Read Only Drive Display 284E Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 203 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Table 28 ArmorStart Parameters Parameter Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Controller 124 Drive Temp Present operating temperature of the drive power section Read Only Drive Display 284E 125 Counter Status The current value of the counter when counter is enabled Read Only Drive Display 284E 126 Timer Status The current value of the timer when timer is enabled Read Only Drive Display 284E 129 Torque Current Displays the current value of the motor torque current as Read Only Drive Display 284E measured by the drive 131 Motor NP Volts Set to the motor name plate rated volts Based on Drive Rating Drive Setup 284E 132 Motor NP Hertz Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency 60 Hz Drive Setup 284E 133 Motor OL Current Set to the maximum allowable current Based on Drive Rating Drive Setup 284E 134 Minimum Freq Sets the lowest frequency that the drive will output 0 0 Hz Drive Setup 284E continuously 135 Maximum Freq Sets the highest frequency that the drive will output 60 Hz Drive Setup 284E continuously Sets the control scheme that is used to start the Bulletin 284E 5 Comm Port 136 Start Source Ar
55. 29 Hex See Appendix B for Control Supervisor information If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 11x s check parameter 61 If value is 41 check the following e DB1 Comm Fault Communication loss exists between the Dynamic Brake board and the main control board This is also enunciated in the Trip Status parameter 4 bit 10 called Internal Comm fault Ifthe ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x s check parameter 61 If value is 42 DB1 Fault check the following e DBI Resistor Overtemperature Fault e DBI Overcurrent Fault e DBI Undercurrent Fault e DB1 Open Fault e DBI VBus Link Fault This is also enunciated in the Trip Status parameter 4 bit 15 called Miscellaneous Fault If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x s check parameter 61 If value is 43 check the following e DBI Switch Fault The DB1 option provides the following warning e DB1 Thermal Warning occurs once the resistor reaches 75 of maximum thermocapacity Once at 100 a DB1 over temperature occurs resulting in a DB1 over temperature fault DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault Control Supervisor Object DB1 Fault Attribute Bit 0 The DB1 measures current continuously and models resistor body temperature that is based on measured current and resistor model parameters The DB1 not only calculates the present resistor body temperature but also predicts the future resistor body temperature The resistor overtemperature level is based on the predicted future re
56. 323 above for fault codes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 0 Get Full All Info Struct of Alarm Code UINT Alarm Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT Device Object Instance USINT Alarm Text STRING Alarm Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULINT Timer Descriptor WORD Help Object Instance USINT Alarm Data 1 Get Basic Info Struct of Alarm Code UINT Alarm Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT Device Object Instance USINT Alarm Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULINT Timer Descriptor WORD 3 Get Help Text STRING Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 325 AppendixB CIP Information The following services are supported Implemented for Service Code Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single The table below lists Warning Codes Warning Text and Warning Help Strings that do not match the fault text 1P67 4X Mismatch Fault Code Help Text The Base enclosure type does not match the Control Module 101 enclosure type 102 DB Terminal A warning has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake 326 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Infor
57. 36 OutA Net FitValue defines how Output A will respond when a network fault occurs 0 Goto Net FitValue 1 Hold Last State When set to 1 Output A will hold state before trip occurrence When set to 0 Output A opens or closes as determined by setting in Parameter 36 This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter 35 OutA Net FitState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close This parameter along with Parameter 38 OutA Net IdlValue defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle 0 Goto Net IdlValue 1 Hold Last State When set to 0 Output A opens or closes as determined by the setting in Parameter 38 OutA Net IdIValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37 OutA Net IdIState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Parameter Number 35 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutANetFitValue ParameterNumber J 8H ttC S Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutANetidiState ParameterNumbe
58. 4 will respond when a network fault occurs When set to 1 Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to Drvin Net FltValue as determined by Parameter 52 0 Go to Fault Value 1 Hold Last State Drvin Net FitValue This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 when a network fault occurs and Parameter 51 Drvin Net FitState is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N Drvin Net IdiState This parameter along with Parameter 54 DrvIn Net IdlValue defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 will respond when a network is idle When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to Drvin Net IdlState as determined by Parameter 54 0 Go to Fault Value 1 Hold Last State Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 50 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 51 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 52 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 53 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maxim
59. 653ST NKF is used to connect to the Bulletin 800F On Machine Stop station using a control power media patchcord The E stop Out tee Cat No 898N 653ES NKEF is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Reducer connects from M35 male connector to M22 female connector Cat No 280 RA35 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 ArmorConnect Connections Control Power Overview Using 6 5 Pin Control Figure 30 ArmorConnect Receptacles 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating 10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating Control Power Receptacle Control Power Receptacle Three Phase Power Receptacle Three Phase Power Receptacle Factory installed ArmorConnect gland plate connections Figure 31 ArmorConnect Connections Table 5 ArmorConnect Gland Plate Conductor Color Code Terminal Designations Description Color Code A1 Control Power Input Blue A2 Control Power Common Black A3 Unswitched Control Power Red PE Ground Green Yellow 1 L1 Line Power Phase A Black 2 L2 Line Power Phase B White 3 L3 Line Power Phase C Red Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 55 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Figure 32 On Machine Stop Stations 800F 1YMQ 800F 1 MYMQ Table 1 Product Selection Enclosure Type Fi
60. A The controller that is shown on the left is intended for installation in individual motor branch circuits The controller that is shown on the right is the ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294 controller that must be listed for group installation to be installed as intended in multiple motor branch circuits For this example assume that all testing is done with fuses of the same class Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 285 Appendix A 286 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery The UL investigation of both controllers is done according to UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment The controllers are connected to the test supply through the three phase conductors and equipment grounding conductor and then covered with cotton in areas that are likely to vent hot gases and sparks during the tests During the test electrical faults are impressed on the output of and internal to these variable frequency AC drive based controllers Increasing the ampere rating of the fuses increases the magnitude of the fault currents that flow through and damage the controller before the fuses open Afterwards the damage to the controller is evaluated to determine whether a potential shock or fire hazard exists when protected by fuses having this ampere rating One criterion of the evaluation is the examination of the equipment grounding conductor that must not open during the t
61. Brake and Output Watts 15 3 84 Add power requirements for outputs 1 A max to A1 A2 Add power requirements for inputs 200 mA max to A3 A2 If A1 power is disconnected Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms which can exceed 20 A The power supply must be capable of supporting this amount of instant power demand when multiple units are turned ON simultaneously If supplies are weaker it is recommended to apply unswitched power A3 A2 first and after a 2 4 second delay apply switched power Drive Ratings VFD Output Current vs Input Current Output Current A Input Current A Frequency 3 Phase kW 3 Phase Hp Sensorless Vector Sensorless Vector Line Voltage V Hz Rating Rating Control Control 0 4 1 4 2 15 0 75 23 3 80 380 50 15 4 0 6 40 2 2 6 0 9 00 3 0 7 6 12 40 0 5 1 4 1 85 1 2 3 3 45 460 60 2 4 0 5 57 3 6 0 8 20 5 7 6 12 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 265 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Drive Characteristics Output Frequency 0 400 Hz Programmable Efficiency 97 5 Typical Sensorless Vector Control Maximum kW Hp Rating Input Voltage 5 Hp 3 3 kW 480V AC Preset Speeds 8 Skip Frequency y StepLogic Functionality v Timer Counter Functions y Sensorless Vector Control SVC Protective Specifications Sensorless Vector
62. DEMO_REV RunningForward DEMO_REV RunningForward DEMO_REV RunningReverse DEMO_REV RunningReverse DEMO_REV Ready DEMO_REV Ready DEMO_REV Ind DEMO_REV I In0 DEMO_REV In DEMO_REV I In1 DEMO_REV In2 DEMO_REV I In2 DEMO_REV In3 DEMO_REV I In3 DEMO_REV Hand DEMO_REV Hand DEMO_REV DisconnectClosed DEMO_REV 1 DisconnectClosed DEMO_REV Pt00DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt00DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt01DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt01DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt02DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt02DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt03DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt03DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt04DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt04DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt05DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt05DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt06DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt06DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt07DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt07DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt08DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt08DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt09DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt09DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt10DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt10DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt11DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt11DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt12DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt12DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt13DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt13DeviceOut DEMO_REV Pt14DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt14DeviceOut DEMO_REV LogicEnabled DEMO_REV 1 LogicEnabled DEMO_REV DEMO_REV DEMO_REV ProducedWord0Param ProducedWord1Param ProducedWord2Param DEMO_REV ProducedWord0Param DEMO_REV ProducedWord1 Param DEMO_REV 1 ProducedWord2Param DEMO_REV Rockwell Automation Publi
63. ETAP ArmorStart Ethernet IP 1783 ETAP PanelView Terminal Device Level Ring Device level Ring Topology 1734 AENTR 1738 AENTR 1756 EN2TR 1734 I O Modules 1738 I O Modules 1756 I O Modules Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3 Figure 49 OSI Model for ISO Standard for Network Communications CIP Motion Motor Control 1 0 Other CIP Safety Profiles Profiles Profiles Profiles Profiles Object Library Safety s Communications Applications Time Synchronization Object Library Data Management Services Safety Services Explicit and I O Messages and Messages widID 920404 jonysnpuj uowwog Connection Management Routing TCP UDP DeviceNet Network and Transport Internet Protocol Ethernet CAN CSMA CD CSMA NBA di jo suoynidopy y1OMIEN Ethernet DeviceNet Physical Layer Physical Layer EtherNet IP DeviceNet This approach provides real time technology into the Ethernet domain With the network extensions of CIP Safety CIP Sync and CIP Motion CIP networks allow for safety communication time synchronization and simple to high performance motion all over the same EtherNet IP network Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 69 Chapter3 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Linear Network Introduction A linear network i
64. Ellie Author Launch Editor Description Major Minor Date Revision T Revision Note Import Export Import From File e Export To File You must go online with this module s Parameter page and DeviceLogix page to ensure the controller and ArmorStart configurations are consistent with each other Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 333 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 2 Select Function Block or Ladder editor Note that once selected you are not able to switch back without recreating the logic DeviceLogix Editor Style lec x Select the editor style for this node Function Block Editor Ladder Editor OK Cancel 3 Refer to the tool bar at the top of the DeviceLogix editor window click the Move Logical group and select the RSTD Latch Reset Move it to the work space and click to drop it G Dia mam BoR pxor x07 swa swor ssf sem sm _TimeriCounter Moveiogical SsS S SSS RESD g Reset Dominant i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i r r i i i 334 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 4 From the toolbar Click the Bit Input button and select In 0 from the Hardware Boolean tree This is
65. Expand Minimize af System Data Connection Manager Cmd Object Info L 5 Home Diagnostics Connection Manager Cmd Object Info Value The Connection Manager Cmd Object Info web page of a scanner provides a summary of connection request activity on the Ethernet network The most commonly used field on this page is Connections Closed due to a Timeout This field shows the number of CIP connection timeouts that have occurred on the module Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley VATANA Diagnostic Overview CIP Common Service Requests 0 Network Settings Unconnected Send Service Requests 64 Application Connections FwdOpen Requests Conn s Originated Remotely 82 Bridge Connections FrdClose Requests Conn s Originated Remotely Ethernet Statistics ConnOpen Requests Conn s Originated Locally Ring Statistics Advanced Diagnostics Gi TCP IP Network Miscellaneous 4 0 ConnClose Requests Conn s Originated Locally 0 GetConnTags Requests 0 0 Secondary FwdOpen Requests Connections Closed due to a Timeout 0 System Data Tasks Event Loa Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 93 Chapter4 Product Commissioning Ring Statistics Web Page IMPORTANT The Ring Statistics web page and the descriptions in this section only apply to modules you can use in a Device level Ring DLR network e 1756 EN2TR communication module e 1756 EN3TR communication
66. Extended Error Code I Timed Out Error Path Error Text OK Cancel Apply Help E Message Path Browser x Path ArmorStart ArmorStart 8 1 0 Configuration 65 Backplane CompactLogix System a 1769 L35E Fault_Reset E 1769 L35E Ethemet Port LocalENB B s Ethemet 1769 L35E Ethemet Port LocalENB f 280E F12Z 104 A ArmorStart lt j 3 CompactBus Local 8 1 176s106x0w4e 10 Help OK Cancel j You do not need to configure anything in Tag Click Apply and then OK 8 Save your project Download the project to the PLC and go Online 9 Inhibit the ArmorStart using the AOP a Once online open the ArmorStart s AOP and click Connection Select Inhibit Module from the options General Connection Module Info Parameters Intenet Protocol Port Configuration Network Requested Packet Interval RPI Inhibit Module 20 0 ms 20 1280 0 T Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode IV Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP Module Fault Status Running Cancel App Heb b Click Apply The following screen should pop up Click Yes Click OK to close out the AOP RSLogix 5000 A DANGER Connection Interruption Listen Only connection s from other controllers may be broken Connection parameters changed that interrupt connections are Inhibited Connection Apply changes Changing connection parameters online wil
67. Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 309 Appendix B CIP Information Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009 310 Attribute ID The following class attributes are supported 1 Get Revision UINT 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT 4or 10 Four instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported for DOL Reverser units Ten instances are supported for Drive units The following table summarizes the DOP instances Instance Name Alternate Mapping Description TE Run Forward output For all starter types this output is hard wired from the 1 Run Fwd Output 0029 01 03 ArmorStart CPU to the actuator ro Run Reverse output For all starter types this output is hard wired from the a Run Rev Output 0029 01 04 ArmorStart CPU to the actuator 3 User Output 1 None These are the two ArmorStart user outputs for all starter types 4 User Output 2 None 5 Drive Input 1 None 6 Drive Input 2 None These four instances exist for Inverter units only They are drive the outputs on 7 Drive Input 3 None the main control board that are connected to Drive Inputs 1 4 8 Drive Input 4 None 9 Drive Jog Fwd None This instances exists for Inverter units only 10 Drive Jog Rev None All instances contain the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Ge
68. Name Description Factory Default Group Controller 1 Hdw Inputs This parameter provides status of hardware inputs 0 Basic Status Common 2 Network Inputs This parameter provides status of network inputs 0 Basic Status Common 3 Network Outputs This parameter provides status of network outputs 0 Basic Status Common 4 Trip Status This parameter provides trip identification 0 Basic Status Common 5 Starter Status This parameter provides the status of the starter 0 Basic Status Common 6 InternalLinkStat Status of the internal network connections 0 Basic Status Common 7 Starter Command The parameter provides the status of the starter command 0 Basic Status Common 8 Network Override This parameter allows for the local logic to override a 0 Misc Configuration uation Network fault 9 Comm vertid This parameter allows for local logic to override an absence of 0 Misc Configuration Cormon an 1 0 connection 13 Prod Assy Word 0 This parameter is used to build bytes 0 1 for produced 0 Network Configuration eaten assembly 150 or 151 This parameter is used to build bytes 2 3 for produced ge 14 Prod Assy Word 1 assembly 150 or 151 0 Network Configuration Common 15 Prod Assy Word 2 This parameter is used to build bytes 4 5 for produced 0 Network Configuration Cannan assembly 150 or 151 16 Prod Assy Word 3 This parameter is used to build bytes 6 7 for produced 0 Network Configuration Gimon assembly 150 or 151 This parameter identifies the Bulletin
69. Network a QB SafetyProgram F Unscheduled Programs Phases Type 284E FVD1P4 ArmorStart VFD 480V AC 0 5HP Gi Motion Groups Vendor Allen Bradley Ungrouped Axes Parent ENBT Ethemet Address 3 Add On Instructi oe aat ae Abi Name AimorStart_EtherNet Private Network 192168 1 1e G5 ArmorStart_284_AOI Description IP Address i G GuardIO_AOI 12 serail i Data Types O Host Name Gi User Defined a3 Gig Strings Module Definition ER Add On Defined sta ie Og Predefined Revision 11 ime Gi Module Defined Electronic Keying Compatible Module Trends Connection Dat 8 Yo Configuration ARPIN 2 1756 Backplane 1756 A4 a 0 1756 1635 Armorstart_Ped 1 1756 L5P ArmorStart_Ped Partner 2 1756 DNB DNB ge DeviceNet J 1 1756 DNB DNB 4 1732D5 IB8x0BV4 A CellGuard1 J 3 1756 ENBT A ENBT gy Ethernet 1756 ENBT a ENBT 284E FVD1P4 A ArmorStart_EtherNet x EIEEE Status Offline Cancel Help L ArmorStart_EtherNet L ArmorStart_EtherNet O Description Status Offline Module Fault S gt Add Branch ie CFCOTE 98 DOS wsS 2 AOT Tabs Quickstarts u RSLogix 5000 Armor s F The screenshot above displays that the AOP has seven tabs that can be used to configure and or monitor your ArmorStart selection The following lists the tabs and whether they are editable or not with the controller when OFFLINE ONLINE or both e General
70. Oo oO Class 10 Cold Hot Class 15 10000 O 2 o He Cold 100 g Hot o x lt 2 Qa Qa lt 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current Approximate Trip Time sec 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current Class 20 10000 100 _ i Cold e Hot 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current Note For 280 and 281 if an overload fault occurs it may require 60 s or more before a fault reset is allowed Refer to Overload Class Parameter 107 Thermo Utilization parameter 105 and OL Reset Level parameter 108 to adjust the reset time Note For 280 and 281 when the mechanical motor brake voltage is applied using power from the load side of the ArmorStart controller this current adds to the load and may result in a phase imbalance or overload if the FLA of the motor and the brake current are similar in scale Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 259 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Contactor Life Load Curves 280 1_ _12 100 C12 280 1_ _23 100 C23 Life Load Curves AC 3 Switching of squirrel cage motors while starting U 230 400 460V 10 amp 06 O1E 06 Operating cycles 10
71. P September 2015 Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Introduction This chapter provides a basic understanding of the programming of the factory installed optional built in Hand Off Auto HOA keypad The HOA keypad can be programmed for maintained or momentary operation Figure 72 Optional HOA Keypads A B Allen Bradley lt 7 Available on Bulletin 280E Available on Bulletin 281E Available on Bulletin 284E Keypad Description The keys that are found on the optional HOA keypads are described below Table 21 HOA Keypad Key Description HAND The Hand key initiates starter operation AUTO The Auto key allows for Start Stop control via the communications network OFF If the starter is running pressing the OFF key causes the starter to stop REV The REV key selects reverse direction of the motor FWD The FWD key selects forward direction of the motor DIR Arrow The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor either forward or reverse When pressed JOG will be initiated if no other control devices are sending JOG JOG a stop command Releasing the key causes the drive to stop using selected stop mode Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 121 Chapter6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Figure 73 Bulletin 280E 281E Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad
72. Power Sense AS Logic Control AS Logic Control 140M offripped in b 5 Ay Note This power supply is not j present in the Status Only versions Current supplied by control power due to the 2A SC Protected power supply voltage Class C being greater than A3 Output A gt _T voltage ap Port 1 Port 2 eo e ee e H Input 10mA 24V DC H Input 10mA 24V DC Ey Input 10mA 24V DC k Input 10mA 24V 0 AS Logic Circuits Ampere 4 Ma satus Total 2A SC Protected L Reversed bias 24V DC Status Noted Output B gt Ethernet under normal Logic operation Ca y may EELIS ak P c 300mA Max i RR an urrent supplied from A3 when vic Short be 4 Detect A1 control power is lost L gt en d am 27 gt B MEH 4 Inputs 50mA Max input depends on sensor attached to input Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Motor Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 L1 140M Off Tripped 2A SC Protected so 2A SC Protected Output B N Output A 1 Ampere Total A3 4 Inputs 50mA Max input depends on sensor attached to input Figure 21 ArmorStart EtherNet IP Bulletin 284E Drive Diagram Output Contactor Option Sensorless Vector Control 140M ul gt 2 B AS Lo
73. Rane 29 STOTINE sch Ante aaa aE as EIERE E E E A wanes 29 General Precautions enunnnseeeeurenesseserereresessserrre 30 Precautions for Bulletin 284E Applications ussesseercereen 30 Dimensionen nkan E a a a a a a a 31 280E 281E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin 31 280E 281E Daisy Chain DR Conduit Entrance 32 284E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin 00 0005 33 284E Daisy Chain DR Conduit Entrance 004 34 280E 281E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin 35 284E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin 36 Mount Orientationy o chxc skated se owleasniis veneer h aa wes 37 OPSTAO se an et ok ol och tous AN E E tele he ele tal 37 WITS oeer e rtrt rro po O EE eaa came bebe bere SRE EE PEPEE 38 Power Control and Ground Wiring sesssererrsrereerec 38 Standard Conduit Knockout Size 00 cece cece eee eee 38 Terminal Desi SM atlOns i oy au uae cya rane ede RelA Gene Cewancers 39 Control Power Witine 2 do 4sis po ae sie ee an deeueiareeoes seas 40 24V DC Control POW enon onacawesacranaarahoweapesaseddamease 40 ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Internal Wiring 006 4l Recommended Cord Gripss eiccstintenaon bee so 44 AC Supply Considerations for Bulletin 284E Units 45 Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems 45 Diseotinecting MOVsiscicssica ss os dues Khost Seba ieeoate seas 45 Group Mo
74. SEL 153 Related Parameters 170 179 240 247 Digital In 4 SEL 154 Access Rule GET SET Stop drive before changing this Data Type UINT parameter z Group Drive Advanced Setup Selects the function for the digital inputs Units Minimum Value See Table 24 for details Maximum Value Default Value Table 24 Digital Input Options Option Name Description i Ias e When active Parameter 167 Accel Time 2 and Parameter 168 Decel Time 2 are used for all ramp rates except Jog cc2 amp Dec e an only be tied to one input e When input is present drive accelerates according to the value set in Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel and ramps to the value set in Parameter 178 Jog Frequency 2 Jog When the input is removed drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel e A valid Start command will override this input Preset Freq 4 Parameters 151 and See Parameters 170 173 and 174 177 152 Default 6 Comm Port This option is the default setting 7 Clear Fault When active clears active fault 8 RampStop CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set 9 CoastStop CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set 10 DCInjStop CF Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set Jog Forward f Drive accelerates t
75. SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 197 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 191 Chapter 7 192 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters SW Current Trip Enables disables a software instantaneous within 100 ms current trip Process Factor Scales the output frequency value that is displayed by Parameter 110 Process Display Output Freq x Process Factor Process Display Fault Clear Stop drive before changing this parameter Resets a fault and clears the fault queue Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications 0 Ready Idle Default 1 Reset Fault 2 Clear Buffer Parameters 107 109 Fault x Code Program Lock Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel 0 Unlocked 1 Locked Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Parameter Number 198 Related Parameters 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value 0 0 Disabled o ProcessFactor PaameterNumber aa Related Parameters 110 Access R
76. September 2015 207 Chapter8 How to Configure an Explicit Message Formatting an Explicit Message 208 ControlLogix scanners and bridges accommodate both downloading Explicit Message Requests and uploading Explicit Message Responses The message format is shown in Figure 84 Figure 84 ControlLogix Message Format in RSLogix 5000 Message Configuration DriveMessageControl x Configuration Communication Tag Name D Message Configuration DriveMessageControl x Configuration Communication Tag Path i 0 Message Configuration DriveMessageControl Configuration hjni Tag Message Type 7 ctal Sevice Gp Smemmt Q z ype j Source Length g Bytes caves B Hex Class Lag Hex Destination ro a Instance om Attribute F Hex New Tag elp i I Enable 2 Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 2 Error Code Extended Error Code I Timed Out Error Path Eror Text omen J a j e Box Description 1 Message Type The message type is usually CIP Generic 2 Service Type The service type indicates the service for example Get Attribute Single or Set Attribute Single that you want to perform Service Code The service code is the code for the requested EtherNet IP service This value changes based on the Service Type that has been selected In most cases this is a read only box If you select Custom in the Service
77. September 2015 253 Chapter10 Troubleshooting Table 49 Source Brake Fuse Replacement Bulletin 284E only Specification Source Control Brake Fuse Cat No W25172 260 12 Description 3 0A UL Listed Class CC CSA HRC 1 Rejection Feature Current 3 0A Interrupting Capacity 200ka Voltage Rating 600V Maximum Cooper Bussman PN KTK R 3 or Manufacturer Littlefuse PN KLKRO03 T Dimension mm in 38 1 1 5 x 10 2 0 4 Figure 100 Source Brake Fuse Replacement Bulletin 284E only Source Control Brake Fuses Cat No W25172 260 12 Resetting Source Brake Fuse Faults Replace the fuse and cycled unswitched power to reset the fault 254 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Chapter 1 1 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Bulletin 280E 281E Electrical Ratings UL NEMA IEC Rated Operation Voltage 200 575V 200 575V Rate Insulation Voltage 600V 600V Rated Impulsed Voltage 6kV 6kV Dielectric Withstand 2200V AC 2500V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Power Circuit Utilization Category N A AC 3 Protection Against Shock N A IP2X 280E 10A 1 2A 280E 10B 25A Rated Operating Current Max A 280E_ 10C 5 5A 280E 25D 16A Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at volt
78. Type box then you need to specify a service code in this box for example 4B for a Get Attributes Scattered service or 4C for a Set Attributes Scattered service Class The class is an EtherNet IP class Instance The instance is an instance or object of an EtherNet IP class Attribute The attribute is a class or instance attribute eo Source Element This box contains the name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the module and drive Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 How to Configure an Explicit Message Chapter 8 Performing Explicit Messages Box Description 8 Source Length This box contains the number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message 9 Destination This box contains the name of the tag that receives service response data from the module and drive Path The path is the route that the message follow s Note Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of a module that you previously mapped D Name The name for the message IMPORTANT There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process that is defined below The details of each step vary depending on the controller See the documentation for your controller Figure 85 Explicit Message Process Set up and send Message Complete Message Retrieve Message Response Box Description Format the required
79. Yellow s see Table 31 e MOD LED Bicolor Red Green represents the Ethernet Module a status see Table 32 p P e NET LED Bicolor Red Green represents the Ethernet Network yn wee status see Table 34 Table 31 Link 1 or Link 2 Port Activity Status Link 1 or 2 Status LED Description Recommended Action OFF No link established Verify network cabling and correct as needed Green Link established at 100 Mbps None Flashing green Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps None Yellow Link established at 10 Mbps None Flashing yellow Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps None Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 215 Chapter 9 Diagnostics 216 Table 32 Module Status Indicator MOD Status LED Summary Requirement Steady OFF No power If no power is supplied to the device the module status indicator shall be steady OFF Steady Green Device operational If the device is operating correctly and the PLC is in Run mode the module status indicator shall be steady green Flashing Green Standby If the device has not been configured or the PLC is not in Run mode the module status indicator shall be flashing green Flashing Red Minor fault If the device has detected a recoverable minor fault the module status indicator shall be flashing red Note An incorrect or inconsistent configuration would be considered a minor fault Steady Red Major fa
80. a General Connection Madule Info Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Network protective shield in that location ee Aig Faut Tea e For the unstable connections issue determine Acive Ring Supervisor 10 8880115 where they exist on the network and correct Paesana 7 them 5 ORTEN Beset Counter e e Check the media counters for all devices on the Supervisor Statue Active network The device with the highest media eE counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Last Active Node on Port 2 00 00 80 02 48 05 Ring Fault eee lt Remove devices from the network one by one Status Rapid Fault Restore Cycles Clear Foult When you see the Rapid Ring Fault disappear cS ee after a device is removed that device is i causing the fault Finally your Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration may not be appropriate for your Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Fault neu y eee Five intentional disconnections reconnections of a node from the network within 30 s However if you think it is necessary to change A duplex mismatch between two connected devices these values we recommend that you call ee Rockwell Automation technical support Electromagnetic noise on the network Once the fault is fixed click Clear Fault e Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectors Given the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault Rapid Ring Fault condition is present A
81. an Internet Protocol network These addresses are represented as four sets of 8 bit numbers numbers from 0 to 255 with decimals between them Each node on the network must have a unique IP address Latency The time between initiating a request for data and the beginning of the actual data transfer Multicast In the CIP producer consumer model one producer multicasts broadcasts the data once to all consumers Producer The source of information in the CIP networking model See CIP Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3 This Term Means Subnet mask An extension of the IP address that allows a site to use a single net ID for multiple networks Switch Anetwork device that cross connects devices or network segments A switch provides each sender receiver the full network bandwidth 2x in full duplex mode reduces collisions and increases determinism TCP The transport control protocol is a more reliable but slower transport protocol than UDP It is used for explicit not time critical messaging in EtherNet IP Introduction to EtherNet P Automation architectures must provide users with three primary services e Control services involve the exchange of time critical data between controlling devices and I O devices e Networks must provide users configuration capabilities to set up and maintain t
82. ancetaa sty stenag aa weeeeeNes ants 313 CLASS CODE 0x0010 10 ccc ccc cece eet een h 313 Discrete Input Group Object cis jvnctaxteiaavabsytanerseebereanes 314 CLASS CODE 0x001D 0 e eens 314 Discrete Output Group Object lt nc aigasdt eile seepage ey 314 CLASS CODE OxO0OTE isis son esd dates 3 SORES aw eater esd 314 Control Supervisor Object 4a ices ios sa sd estan sass 316 CEASS CODE 0x0029 2 cok Sita teams wows eww aaa paw 316 Overload Objectes rive ord aa a leah aiid ae kee tole 318 CLASS CODE 0x002G wi sisaccve tes ential E Bede ee 318 Device Level Ring DLR Object 4s wt se cine Sacs bee ee ateate ste catdecaas 319 GEASS CODE UKO0A47 erecri trener GO ee al call te 28 ae 319 Qos ODj ct anes ese te glance een rene teed ag a weave wage 320 CLASS CODE 0x004 oy has 25 ch eras ou edaeautitin gs abate 320 DPI Fault Objects iiniss ni kienean annae EEA E REANA 321 CLASS CODE OX00I ZA a ht oe ote A E A A E ENG A 321 DPLAlarm Objects cng de bakes gaan rn de a ES E E 325 CLASS CODE 0x0098 iiciin n rE a E EEEE EE EANA 325 Interface Objectes isanda nen E Eea ee 327 CLASS CODE UxDOBS raedt raa ena ana EREE 327 TCP IP Interface ODject lt cassdan hag Seeccncetiends duds Gas nernenes 328 CLASS CODE 0x0 0E Sie ois sacas sets eves vote eis cae aie es 328 Ethernet Link Objecte areek site crates eadih ee SU a eA 329 CLASS CODE OXOOF Gvinea E A A NAS IES 329 Appendix C DeviceLogix Programming sssssssrssserrererrerrrrrrssets 332 DeviceLogix
83. as downloading programs or peer to peer messaging between two PLC units Full duplex A mode of communication that allows a device to send and receive information simultaneously effectively doubling the bandwidth Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 65 Chapter 3 66 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology This Term Means Fully qualified domain name A fully qualified domain name FQDN is a domain name that includes all higher level domains relevant to the entity named If you think of the DNS as a tree structure with each node having its own label a fully qualified domain name for a specific node would be its label followed by the labels of all other nodes between it and the root of the tree For example for a host a FQDN would include the string that identifies the particular host plus all domains of which the host is a part up to and including the top level domain the root domain is always null For example PARIS NISC SRI COM is a fully qualified domain name for the host at 192 33 33 109 Gateway A module or set of modules that allows communications between nodes on dissimilar networks Hardware address Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address sometimes called a MAC address that is 48 bits The address appears as six digits separated by colons such as XX XX XX XX XX Xx Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 0x00 to OxFF
84. at T1 T2 T3 DC Bus Voltage Present DC Bus voltage level Drive Status Present operating condition of the drive Bit 0 Running Bit 1 Forward Bit 2 Accelerating Bit 3 Decelerating Fault 1 Code A code that represents the drive fault The code appears in this parameter as the most recent fault that has occurred See Internal Drive Faults in Chapter 10 for more information Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 104 Related Parameters 131 184 188 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units WAC Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 480V Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 105 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 1V DC Minimum Value Maximum Value Based on Drive Rating Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 106 Related Parameter 195 Access Rule GET Data Type Byte Group Drive Display Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 107 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units Minimum Value F2 Maximum Value F122 Default Value Read Only Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 171 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters 172 Fault 2 Code A code that represents a drive fault The code appears in this parameter a
85. be necessary Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Phase Loss Indicates a missing supply phase This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Phase Short Indicates the drive has detected a phase short This fault cannot be disabled Ground Fault Indicates the drive has detected a ground fault This fault cannot be disabled Stall Indicates the drive has detected a stall condition indicating the motor has not reached full speed This fault cannot be disabled Control Power Indicates a loss of control power voltage or a blown control power circuit This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 1 0 Fault This error can indicate a shorted sensor shorted input device or input wiring mistakes It can also indicate a blown output fuse This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Over Temperature Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded This fault cannot be disabled Phase Imbalance Indicates an imbalance supply voltage This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 213 Chapter 9 214 Diagnostics Over Current Indicates the drive has detected an over current fault This fault cannot be disabled A3 Power Loss Power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default
86. before 261 EM Brk On Delay stopping and de energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 0 0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup Stop Mode is set to Option 8 or 9 262 MOP Reset Sel Sets the drive to save the current MOP Reference command 1 Save MOP Ref Drive Advanced Setup 263 DB Threshold Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation 100 Drive Advanced Setup Determines whether parameter changes made over the communication gt 264 Comm Write Mode port are saved and stored in Non Volatile Storage NVS or RAM only 0 Save Drive Advanced Setup 206 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Programming ControlLogix Explicit Message Chapter 8 How to Configure an Explicit Message Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix In the ControlLogix platform explicit messaging can be done easily from within a logic program The request and response is configured within the MSG function The MSG function can be found in the Input Output tab of RSLogix 5000 Setting Up the MSG Instruction A tag name must be given to the MSG function before the rest of the information can be defined In this example a tag was created with the name explicit_mess After the instruction has been named click the gray box _ to define the rest of the instruction Figure 83 MSG Function Found in the Input Output Tab MS Message Message Control p Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P
87. data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message Request to the scanner or bridge module download The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the EtherNet IP network The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner The data is stored in the scanner buffer The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner s buffer upload 0 The Explicit Message is complete Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 209 Chapter8 How to Configure an Explicit Message The MSG message instruction handles all explicit messaging that is initiated by a Logix Controller program It automatically creates and manages TCP connections and CIP encapsulation sessions The user has no direct influence on this process Figure 86 Example Message Configuration Tab Message Configuration Explicit_Mes Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic EA i Get Attribute Single x E J Servi al seni e Hex Class F Hex ect Explicit Data Instance 404 Attribute 1 Hex Teor Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 Eror Code Extended Eror Code I Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text oR cows rey ne The Class Instance and Attribute define the actual information being requested Addit
88. data to the controller or the controller should send data to the device Only data producing modules require an RPI For example a local EtherNet IP communication module requires no RPI because it produces no data for the system Instead it functions only as a bridge To set an RPI follow these steps 1 Verify the ArmorStart EtherNet IP module AOP is installed started and connected to the controller 2 In the Controller Organizer tree right click the ArmorStart EtherNet IP module and choose Properties i A New Modde Jie cut Ctrl E Copy Ctrl C WA Paste tr Delete Cel Cross Reference Ctrl E Properties Alt Enter Print Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3 The Module Properties dialog box appears General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Port Diagnostics Requested Packet Interval API 20 0 ms 1 0 750 0 ms F Inhibit Module I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault 3 Click the Connection tab 4 From the Requested Packet Interval RPI menu enter the rate at which you want data to be updated over a connection Only set the RPI to the rate the application requires IMPORTANT The RPI determines the number of packets per second that the module produces on a connection Each module can produce only a limited number of
89. e 480 277 or 400 230V AC 3 Phase If applied to a grounded or ungrounded 480V AC Delta power source the EMI filter will not function properly and will be damaged To prevent drive damage the MOVs connected to ground must be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage To disconnect the MOVs remove the jumper shown in Figure 25 Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal 1 Before installing the Bulletin 284E loosen the four mounting screws 2 Unplug the control module from the base unit by pulling it forward Figure 24 Bulletin 284E Removal of Control Module Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 45 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines Figure 25 Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal Remove Jumper The ArmorStart Distributed Motor controllers are listed for use with each other in group installations per National Fire Protection Association NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery When applied according to the group motor installation requirements two or more motors of any rating or controller type are permitted on a single branch circuit Group motor installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada Note For
90. e Bad hardware such as a cable or switch part Troubleshoot and General Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network it is Solutions f or Linear or DLR recommended to first take the following actions when a fault appears Fora DLR network check that Networks At least one node is configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology Ring All cables on the network are securely connected to each device All devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly The Network Status field on the active supervisor node s status page to determine the fault type Fora linear network check that None of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology Linear If any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network All cables on the network are securely connected to each device All devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 241 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Issue Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault 242 Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network Use the
91. fffiFakResct gt Style MM I Constant I Open MESSAGE Configuration d Click the box next to AS_Reset to open Configuration Dialog Message Message Control view Configuration Dialog e From the Message Type pull down menu choose CIP Generic f From the Service Type pull down menu choose Custom Message Configuration AS_Reset x Configuration Communication Tag l Message Type CIP Generic gt Tl pe lt Source Length 1 Bytes Servi 3 Cede Wen Gass fo tHe Desnan a Instance fo Attribute f0 Hex a New Tag O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Lenath 0 Eror Code Extended Error Code I Timed Out Error Path Error Text OK _ Cancel Anny Heb 224 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Chapter 9 g From the Source Element pull down menu choose Datal tag that was created earlier and press Enter Message Configuration AS_Reset Configuration Communication Tag x e 3 Message Type CIP Generic X Service Custom x Type Source Length vt z Showa Tage M Service fo 3 p ATE Code o Hen Gass Jo ney Destination Name 8 Data Type Description a Instance 0 Attribute f0 Hex J E ArmorStart AB 280E E ArmorStart o AB 280E f GAS Reset MESSAGE f Data q DNT 9 BiLocalt C ame Dakai ABM769 fF Localt Data Type DINT 4B 1769 O Enable O E
92. following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on your DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions that are described above Table 46 Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network Description Alink on the DLR network may be broken Intentionally for example because you are adding or deleting nodes but have not made all physical connections to restore the set up of the network with without the node Unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctions When this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field Ring Fault The screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 10 88 80 115 and 10 88 80 208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the node s MAC ID Figure 92 Ring Fault Section AB_ETH 1 10 88 80 81 1783 ETAP A Configuration General Port Configuration Advanced Port Configuration Network Network Topology Ring Advanced Network Status Ring Fault Active Ring Supervisor 10 88 80 81 Active Supervisor 150 Precedence M Enable Ring Supervisor Ring Faults Detected 7 Reset Counter Supervisor Status Ring Fault Port Buffer Utilization Last Active Node on Port 1 10 88 80 115 Port 1 Last Active Node on Port 2 10 88 80 208 Port 2 erity Fatittoca
93. implemented for the Discrete Output Group Object Implemented for Service Code Instance Service Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 315 AppendixB CIP Information Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029 No class attributes are supported A single instance Instance 1 of the Control Supervisor Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set Run BOOL These Run outputs also map to DOP Instances 1 and 2 40 Get Set Run 2 BOOL 7 Get Running 1 BOOL 80 Get Running 2 BOOL 9 Get Ready BOOL 10 Get Tripped BOOL 12 Get Set Fault Reset BOOL 0 gt 1 Trip Reset 100 Get Set Keypad Mode BOOL 0 Maintained 1 Momentary 101 Get Set Keypad Disable BOOL 0 Not Disabled 1 Disabled Bits 0 1 Reserved Bit 2 PL Warning does not apply for Ethernet version Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 PR Warning does not apply for Ethernet version Bit 5 CP Warning Bit 6 1 0 Warning 115 Get Warning Status WORD Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 PI Warning does not apply for Ethernet version Bit 9 DN Warning Bits 10 12 Reserved Bit 13 HW Warning Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 DB Warning 124 Get Set Trip Enable WORD Bit enumerated trip enable word 130 Get Set Trip Reset Mode BOOL 0 Manual 1 Aut
94. is displayed in the Alignment Error field Figure 94 Media Counter Screen AB_ETH 1 10 88 80 54 1783 ETAP A Statistics General Port Diagnostics Connection Manager Interface Counters Counter Name Value Counter Name In Octets 32385327 Out Octets 5748877 In Ucast Packets 79293 Out Ucast Packets 44513 In NUcast Packets 309821 Out NUcast Packets 695 In Discards 0 Out Discards 0 In Errors 0 Out Errors 0 In Unknown Protos 0 Media Counters Curent Port Port 1 1 Counter Name Value Counter Name Alignment Errors Late Collisions FCS Errors Excessive Collisions Single Collisions MAC Transmit Errors Multiple Collisions Carrier Sense Errors SQE Test Errors Frame Too Long Deferred Transmissi IMAC Receive Errors Reset Counters Tarcal On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appear With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clears A high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearing To access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right click the device select Module Properties and click Port Di
95. later that supports Unicast 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Parameters Tab Click the Parameters tab to display the following General Connection Module Info Parameters Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Group Drive Setup hi Motor NP Volts 460 Set to the motor Motor NP Hertz 60 10 400 Set to the motor Motor OL Current 14 0 0 1 6 Set to the maxin Minimum Freq 0 0 0 0 400 0 Sets the lowest Maximum Freq 60 0 400 Sets the highes Start Source Comm Port zll Sets the control Stop Mode Ramp EM Brk xl The stop mode Speed Reference Comm Port xl The speed refel Accel Time 1 10 0 0 0 600 0 The rate of acc Decel Time 1 10 0 0 1 600 0 The rate of deci Motor OL Ret Disabled xl Enables disable Ea 4 gt Reset Defaults Reset Fault Set lt i The values displayed here are read directly from the project when offline and from the ArmorStart when online These values are not sent to the ArmorStart when a connection is established Click Set to write updated values A You must go online with this Parameters tab to ensure the controller and ArmorStart configurations are consistent with each other Status Offline Cancel Apply Help The parameters are divided into groups that are based on the type of Armor
96. mode and if a network fault such as Duplicate MAC ID or module Bus off condition occurs e Ifthe Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled the device does not need any I O connection to run the logic As long as there is control power and a DeviceNet power source that is connected to the device the logic controls the state of the outputs e DeviceLogix provides a Motion Disable function that is driven from the DeviceLogix program When this is active all motor run commands are disabled including the HOA The run command is disabled regardless of where the command is initiated from such as DeviceLogix or DeviceNet Device Logix Programming DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only limited to the imagination of the programmer Keep in mind that the application of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators such as AND OR NOT timers counters and latches Decision making is done by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I O The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device hardware Hardware I O is the physical Inputs and Outputs that are on the device such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the ArmorStart There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality but some of the most common are listed b
97. not exceed the values in Table 51 for the smallest conductor in the r circult 3 not considered in this appendix Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 287 Appendix A 288 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Table 51 Abbreviated Table 7 2 10 4 Table 7 2 10 4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short Circuit Protective Device for Power Circuits Group Installations Conductor Size AWG Maximum Rating Fuse or Inverse Time Circuit Breaker amperes 14 60 12 80 10 100 8 150 6 200 The following text and Figure 108 provide an explanation of 7 2 10 4 1 and 2 In the following the text not relevant to Figure 106 is replaced by ellipsis points Then each individual requirement is underlined and followed by an underlined letter in parentheses This underlined letter in the following text corresponds to the letter in Figure 108 7 2 10 4 Two or more motors a and their control equipment b shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit c where short circuit and ground fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses d provided the following conditions under 1 and 2 are met 1 Each motor controller and overload device is listed for group installation with speci
98. of Contents Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media cceccccecucececcuces Ethernet and I O Conhecionsini sick k chee Ss vaste es ees wetee Power Connections se e 0 ccc cence eect e nent e aT ERa Optional Locking Clip es ca adi ss akon Serine te nk wads eS Ree RS Maint han ce ici3 63 ood wa seed oles eed CO as ee sees SE Chapter 3 Terminology aye ties des a p55 same RAA ck rs Introduction to EtherNet IP cccc cence ccecnccceeeenees Linear Network Introduction ss 4 0 6sesivein dares elie oxeddcare Device Level Rai sas tic piacere eter adnate cheesy ane lntrod ctionserr inaenea a aA EE aan Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 0 c cece eee eens Fthernet Swite esas sae cay ae shore Sik eR te tenes toa Ethernet Medias oxen ah rae iri oe pS eacodat vane case E ERE EtherNet IP General Wiring Guideline 0 0 cae Requested Packet lntervaliccavsaiiouts cuted ceived atiiletouateeaior dees Chapter 4 IPAddress rana hbo hare aa Rees tot PRR Gateway Address elec wel has isc eeu beurre etd tae ee onder Subnet Maskin itd tate tea eR cel ch a at hte iat es ant tg Configuring Ether Net 1P Addressicawad stn rasamnnewcerieerarnentns Manually Configure the Network Address Switches Use the Rockwell Automation BootP DHCP Utility Save the Relation ist sGccneanevatiwrnieese hin wueeunianamen DHCP IP Support s aina nee ee a ee eae EEEN U
99. of frames for which transmission via a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmission error Important MAC transmit errors are only counted if either late collisions excessive collisions or carrier sense errors are not counted MAC Receive Errors The number of frames for which reception via a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmission error Important MAC receive errors are only counted if the frame too long count alignment errors or FCS errors are not counted Carrier Sense Errors Carrier sense errors fall into these categories e No Carrier Sense Present The number of times the carrier is not present when a transmission starts e Carrier Sense Lost The number of times the carrier is lost during a transmission Carrier sense errors usually indicate a problem with a cable on the Ethernet infrastructure The number of incoming packets that exceed the maximum Ethernet packet size Frame Too Long Troubleshoot Intermittent Ethernet Connectivity 5 Home To troubleshoot intermittent ethernet connectivity follow these steps 1 From the ArmorStart EtherNet IP and or the ControlLogix EtherNet IP bridge click Ethernet Statistics Figure 95 Ethernet Statistics http 4 10 83 92 101 index html gt C Alien Bradiey BEANA emei e Diagnostics E Diagnostic Overview 1 Netvork Settings Message Connections I 1 0 Connections 1 Ethe
100. operation by setting parameter 195 Reverse Disable See Chapter C for an example how to dynamically disable the keypad Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 125 Chapter6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Notes 126 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Basic Setup Parameters To configure the basic ArmorStart functionality see Table 22 below These are the minimum setup configurations that are required for Bulletin 280E 281E or Bulletin 284E There are additional capabilities and motor protection that are not enabled or left at their default values Table 22 Quick Parameter Setup Bulletin 280E 281E Bulletin 284E 106 FLA Setting 131 Motor NP Volts 107 Overload Class 132 Motor NP Hertz 108 OL Reset Level 133 Motor OL Current 134 Minimum Freq 135 Maximum Freq 137 Stop Mode 138 Speed Reference 139 Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 127 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Parameter Groups Bulletin 284E Common to Bulletin 280E 281E and Bulletin 284E Units Units Only Produced Assembly Basic Status Config Group Starter Protection User 1 0 Config Miscellaneous Config Drive 1 0 Config 1 Hdw Inputs 13 Int00DeviceOut Cfg 23 Pr FitResetMode 30 Anti bounce On Delay 8 Network Override 48 Drive Co
101. packets per second Exceeding this limit prevents the module from opening more connections 5 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 75 Chapter3 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Notes 76 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 IP Address Class A Class B Class C Chapter 4 Product Commissioning The IP address identifies each node on the IP network or system of connected networks Each TCP IP node on a network must have a unique IP address The IP address is 32 bits long and has a net ID part and Host ID part Networks are classified A B C or other The class of the network determines how an IP address is formatted Figure 55 IP Address on the IP Network 0 78 31 0 Net ID Host ID 0 15 16 31 10 Net ID Host ID 0 2324 31 110 Net ID Host ID You can distinguish the class of the IP address from the first integer in its dotted decimal IP address as follows Range of first integer Class Range of first integer Class 0 127 A 192 223 C 128 191 B 224 255 other There are reserved values that you cannot use as the first octet in the address These numbers are examples of values you cannot use QOLXXX XXX XXX 27 XXX XXX XXX 223 to 255 XXX XXX XXX The specific reserved values that cannot be used vary according to the conditions of each applic
102. parameter resets the Protection Fault Access Rule GET SET on a transition of 0 gt 1 Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 161 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Str Net FitState Parameter Number 26 This parameter along with Parameter 27 Access Rule GET SET Str Net FitValue defines how the starter Data Type BOOL will respond when a fault occurs as determined by Parameter 27 Group Starter Protection 0 Goto Fault Value 1 Hold Last State Units Allows Starter to hold last state or go to FitValue on NetFaults Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Str Net FitValue Parameter Number 27 This parameter determines how the starter Access Rule GET will be commanded in the event of a fault Data Type BOOL State the Starter will go to ona Net Fit if Parameter Group Starter Protection 26 Str Net FitState 0 Goto Fault Value Units 0 0FF 1 0N Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Str Net IdlState Parameter Number 28 This parameter along with Parameter 29 Access Rule GET SET Str Net IdIValue defines how the starter Data Type BOOL will respond when a network is idle as determined by Parameter 29 Group Starter Protection 0 Goto Idle Value 1 Hold Last State U
103. partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring Determine where the fault condition exists and member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for some reason such as because of a component correct it failure The active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC ID s for each node displayed Partial Fault When this fault occurs the Network Status field Partial Fault Condition Condition Once the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 243 Chapter10 Troubleshooting Issue Media Counter Errors or Collisions Media Counter Alignment Errors Table 46 Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network Description The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors that are encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error
104. peratures anne ie naia aA EE EEE ES Phase Lin balancerc victiie ct eters hehe NAN e ee ko OVER Gurre ntesssiscc ie arse his 6 a Ea Ro E SERT SOE AS Power EOSS sachs belts Fae EE cha a N ate ie eee Meader Internal Communication Fault 00cccesceceeeeeens DG Bits Pats oc dae chery by ity and der iewed ahah aoateed ode Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EEPROM Paul Bic dvsness cana aknumrdent wegen geiee teas Hardware Fault yc tour he e a a is che eis ahh ot Restart Retries d 2 45 2 tctdiediseeie Sha SN a Sistas eee a Miscellaneous Faults ac svt Gcsasiscat darasanebdaewe asin edastent EtherNet IP LED Status Indication ccccececeeeeeecece Control Module LED Status and Reset 0 00 c cee eens Control Module Fault LED Indications 0 0000eeeeeee Pattee ta ua eae teens Serta le cased a vee ena amram eden Resetting Device to Factory Defaults ciss cd csurie ee Sas evt awe Sugnceds Chapter 10 erodUCHlOns se Benne goatee a T whe de cae ake Bulletin 280E 281E Troubleshooting acca saitcenbaaiy naw tte Bulletin 284E Troubleshooting 0 cc cece eee e eee eee Faule Definito sie ta koe eteniete a a Rakiat a aa IP67 Dynamic Brake Diagnostic DB1 sssrscersrsrerrreree DBA PAG egestas Sarees Pate e Sed a a ohn E Sy ate ee O Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 Dynamic Brake DBI Resistor Overtemperature Fault 000 eee eee DBI Overcurrent Fault tc
105. possible supply impedances For this reason the magnitude of current measured on a particular electrical system may be less than the specified value 296 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 High Level Product Description CIP Explicit Connection Behavior CIP Information Appendix B The ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller is an extension of the ArmorStart DeviceNet controller Three product types are offered zE 281E Reversing 284E Inverter Product Codes and Name Strings The following table lists the product codes and name strings that will be added to the ArmorStart product family for EtherNet IP Product Code Product Code hex decimal Identity Object Name String 0x91 145 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 0 5 2 5 A 24V DC 0x92 146 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 1 1 5 5 A 24V DC 0x93 147 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 3 2 16 A 24V DC Ox9A 154 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 0 3 1 5 A 24V DC OxD1 209 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0 5 2 5 A 24V DC OxD2 210 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 1 1 5 5 A 24V DC 0xD3 211 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 3 2 16 A 24V DC OxDA 218 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0 3 1 5 A 24V DC 0x172 370 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 0 5 Hp 0x174 372 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 1 Hp 0x176 374 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 2 Hp 0x177 375 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 3 Hp 0x178 376 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 5 Hp The ArmorS
106. reference by Parameter 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 115 Chapter 5 Table 15 Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 280E 281E Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit 0 0 OutB OutA ResetFault RunReverse RunForward 1 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 2 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln PtO9Deviceln Pt08Deviceln Table 16 Bulletin 280E 281E Controller Output Command Tags Controller Name Logix Tag Name DEMO_REV RunForward DEMO_REV 0 RunForward DEMO_REV RunReverse DEMO_REV 0 RunReverse DEMO_REV ResetFault DEMO_REV 0 ResetFault DEMO_REV OutA DEMO_REV 0 0utA DEMO_REV OutB DEMO_REV 0 0utB DEMO_REV Pt00Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt00Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt01Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt01Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt02Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt02Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt03Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt03Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt04Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt04Deviceln DEMO_REV PtO5Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt05Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt06Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt06Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt07Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt07Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt08Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt08Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt09Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt09Dev
107. resistor to dissipate excessive power Parameter settings less than 100 should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the dynamic brake resistor s wattage rating is not exceeded In general values less than 90 are not needed This parameter s setting is especially important if Parameter 182 DB Resistor Sel is set to 2 No Protection Comm Write Mode Parameter Number 264 Determines whether parameter changes Access Rule GET SET made over communication port are saved and stored in Non Volatile Storage NVS Data Type BOOL or RAM only If they are stored in RAM the Group Drive Advanced Setup values will be lost at power down 0 Save Default Units 1 RAM Only Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists If a controller is programmed to write parameter data to Non Volatile Storage NVS frequently the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a program that frequently uses configurable outputs to write parameter data to NVS unless Parameter 264 Comm Write Mode is set to Option 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Linear List of Parameters for Bulletins 280E 281E and Table 28 ArmorStart Parameters Parameter Number Parameter
108. tag Reset HH teat te de fe lt gt or Favorites A AddOn A Alarms A Bit A Timer Cou E zZ 222 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Chapter 9 b Adda Message MSG instruction that will be used to execute the reset The message instruction can be found in the Input Output instruction set tab Hfj nsa fase ssu zor AddOn K Alarms A ek QA Tmercounter A Input Output ae se ee eT eee i i c The completed rung should look like the one below Reset SG JE Message HCENS Message Control EKon KER gt 7 Configure the message instruction a Begin by double clicking the tag name field and entering AS_Reset SG Message A Message Control F Message New 4S Reset Ctrl W amp Cut Instruction Ctrl x Copy Instruction Ctrl C E Paste Ctrl Delete Instruction Del Add Ladder Element Alt Ins Edit Main Operand Description Ctrl D Save Instruction Defaults Clear Instruction Defaults Remove Force Go To Ctrl G Instruction Help Fi Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 223 Chapter9 Diagnostics c Check the tag data type and options with the figure below and click OK Name rae am OK Description ri a Help B Usage j lt normal gt m Type Jee z Connection i Alias For Data Type JMessaGE Oo Scope
109. to ArmorStart ArmorStart Value 270011 0010 1000 0011 Project Value Pr Fault Enable 2 0011 0000 1000 0011 30 Off to On Delay 0 2000 31 On to Off Delay 0 2000 46 Keypad Disable Not Disabled Disabled 106 FLA Setting 0 24 1 15 107 Overload Class 15 20 Comes je oome je Co Cr Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 105 Chapter5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software If you want to keep the parameters in the AOP select Download If you want to keep the parameters in the ArmorStart device select Upload Otherwise select Cancel Clicking Cancel locks the user out of viewing the values If you are connected to a new ArmorStart device and you just created the ArmorStart object and have not made any changes in the parameters the ArmorStart correlation should not find any discrepancy Note If you make any changes to the parameters offline they will not be downloaded to the ArmorStart device when the connection is made going Online For the Offline changes to take effect you must go to the Parameters tab Once you click the Parameters tab ArmorStart correlation takes place and then the changes can be downloaded to the ArmorStart device Module Info Tab Click the Module Info tab to display the following Z Module Properties ENBT 284E FVD1P4 1 1 Jog General Connection Module Info Parameters Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Networ
110. zero No action is required Important If two stations attempt to transmit data simultaneously the packets collide with each other However collisions are not errors and do not indicate a network problem The number of network collisions can vary greatly due to traffic patterns or CPU utilization Consequently there is no set range of acceptable collisions for each outgoing packet Collisions are a normal aspect of Ethernet networking Late Collisions are greater than zero 1 Check to see if a network segment is too long 2 Remove repeaters from between devices Excessive Collisions are greater than zero Calculate your network s typical rate of excessive collisions and decide whether the rate of packet loss will affect your network s performance Important Excessive collisions indicate that your network has become congested For each collision after the sixteenth your network drops a packet MAC Transit Errors are greater than zero No action is required Frame Too Long is greater than zero 246 Limit the size of your tags to lt 500 bytes Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Ethernet Statistics The Ethernet Statistics web page presents the current configuration of an EtherNet IP communication module and any errors that have occurred on the module 1 Review the values in the Ethernet Port 1 table Ethernet Port 1 Interface State Li
111. 0 Bulletin 280E 281E Control Module LED Status Yes Ta Display No AA y Fault Network Motor does LED LED not Start See See See Table 30 Table 34 Table 40 Fault Definitions Some of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller faults are detected by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart controller while others are detected by the internal drive For internal drive faults the internal hardware of the ArmorStart controller simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and reports the fault state No fault latching is done by the internal hardware of the ArmorsStart controller for these faults The PrFlt ResetMode parameter Parameter 23 determines the Auto Resettability of only the faults that are detected on the main control board The Auto Resettability of the faults that are detected in the internal drive is controlled by internal drive parameters see Table 38 The following flowchart for Bulletin 284E units is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Figure 91 Bulletin 284E Control Module LED Status Faulted Display Yes Define Nature of the Problem Fault Network LED LED Motor does not start See See Table 37 Table 34 See Table 40 Actions IP67 Dyn amic The IP67 operation is different from most ot
112. 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 225 Related Parameters 184 187 227 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Motor NP FLA Set to the motor nameplate full load amps Autotune Stop drive before changing this parameter Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 IR Voltage Drop and Parameter 229 Flux Current Ref that affect sensorless vector performance Parameter 226 Motor NP FLA must be set to the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure 0 Ready Idle Default 1 Static Tune 2 Rotate Tune Ready 0 Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune Static Tune 1 A temporary command that initiates a non rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 228 IR Voltage Drop A start command is required within 30 seconds of setting this parameter following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Used when motor cannot be uncoupled from the load Rotate Tune 2 A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 229 Flux Curr
113. 1 0 m The IP67 Dynamic Brake is separately ordered See Chapter 11 for available IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistors Note The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor is used only with the DB1 factory installed option Only the specified IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor can be used based on the VFD horsepower Connecting resistors other than those specified result ina DB1 fault Output Contactor Bulletin 284E only An internal contactor is sourced from the 24V DC A1 A2 control voltage to isolate the load side of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller When control power is applied to A1 A2 the output contactor closes When control power is removed the output contactor opens There is no other switching element that allows alternate control of the output contactor A sequenced stop involving the output contactor cannot be performed Shielded Motor Cable Bulletin 284E only If the EMI Filter is selected a 3 meter shielded 4 conductor cordset is provided as standard Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Overview Chapter 1 ArmorSta rt EtherNet N P Figure 10 Bulletin 280E 281E ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Communication Protocol Features Local Disconnect LED Status va 4 Indication and Reset BT Lo Control Module Hand Off Auto Keypad IP Address Notation Area Motor Connection Figure 11 Bulletin 284E ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Communication Protocol Local Disconn
114. 10 0 Parameter Number 179 Related Parameters 151 154 178 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 10 0 Parameter Number 180 Related Parameters 137 181 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value De os Setting of 99 9 Continuous Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 181 Related Parameters 137 180 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1 8 Default Value Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Drive rated amps X 0 05 183 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters ATTENTION Ramp to Stop Mode Volts Speed Stop Command Voltage Volts Speed DC Injection Braking Mode DC Brake Time DC Brake Level Time Stop Command e Ifa hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used e This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking DB Resistor Sel Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables external dynamic braking Setting Min Max 0 Disabled 1 Normal RA Res 5 Duty Cycle 2 No Protection 100 Duty Cyc
115. 140M used in this 0 22 Breaker Type product 140M D8N C10 Basic Status Common 23 Pr FitReset Mode This parameter configures the Protection Fault reset mode 0 Manual Starter Protection Common 4 Pr Fault Enable a parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit 12419 Starter Protection Gmin 5 Pr Fault Reset a parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition 0 gt 0 Starter Protection Conon This parameter along with Parameter 27 Str Net FitValue v 26 Str Net FitState defines how the starter will respond when a fault occurs as Goto Fault Val Starter Protection Common determined by Parameter 27 oto Fault Value 27 Str Net FitValue This parameter determines how the starter will be 0 0FF Starter Protection Common commanded in the event of a fault 28 Str Net IdIState This parameter determines response when Idle fault occurs ae Starter Protection Common Goto Fault Value This parameter determines the state that starter assumes 29 Str Net IdlValue when the network is idle and Parameter 28 Str Net IdIState 0 OFF Starter Protection Common is set to Goto Fault Value ee This parameter allows the installer to program a time Bie is 30 Off to On Delay duration before being reported ON 0 User 1 0 Configuration Common shh This parameter allows the installer to program a time ee 31 On to Off Delay duration before being reported OFF 0 User 1 0 Configuration Common 32 In Sink Source This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to
116. 140U D6D3 xxx circuit breaker not rated more than 480 277 30 A having an interrupt rating not less than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 263 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Operating Temperature Range UL NEMA IEC 20 40 C 4 104 F Storage and Transportation Temperature Range 25 85 C 13 185 F Altitude 1000 m Environmental Humidity 5 95 on condensing Pollution Degree 3 Enclosure Ratings NEMA 4 12 IP67 Approximate Shipping Weight 13 6 kg 30 Ib Resistance to Shock Operational 15G Non Operational 30G Resistance to Vibration Operational 1G 0 15 mm 0 006 in Displacement Non Operational 2 5 G 0 38 mm 0 015 in Displacement Power and Ground Terminals Wire Size Primary Secondary Terminal Primary Secondary Terminal Mechanical 16 10 AWG 1 0 4 0mm2 ighening Toue Le Lee Wire Strip Length 9 mm 0 35 in Control Terminal Wire Size 18 10 AWG 1 0 4 0 mm2 Tightening Torque 6 2 lb in 0 7N m Wire Strip Length 9 mm 0 35 in Disconnect Lock Out Recommend 8 mm 5 16 in lock shackle or hasp The hasp should not exceed 8 mm 5 16 in when closed Refer to Altitude Derating on pa ge 269 for derating guide EMC Emission Levels Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions 10V rms Communication
117. 15 14 13 12 11 10 X Pt00Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt07Deviceln Pt08Deviceln Pt09Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt14Deviceln 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Pt15Deviceln Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 DeviceOut Data Parameter Number 3 This parameter provides status of network Access Rule GET device outputs Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 6 5 4 3 0 X Pt0ODeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut X Pt03DeviceOut X Pt04DeviceOut X Pt05DeviceQut X Pt06DeviceOut Pt07DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut X Pt10DeviceOut X Pt11DeviceQut X Pt12DeviceOut X Pt13DeviceOut X Pt14DeviceOut X Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 131 Chapter7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters
118. 2 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Supersedes Publication 280E UM001B EN P July 2012 Copyright 2015 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
119. 2 36 0 08 1 97 0 06 16 54 0 2 17 32 0 2 Length is user selectable based on the suffix added to the catalog number For a length of 500 10 mm add M05 to the end of the catalog number For a length of 1000 10 mm add M1 to the end of the catalog number Note The customer must protect the resistor in the event of a shorted switch in the VFD This is done via PLC control An example ControlLogix program can be downloaded from http samplecode rockwellautomation com 280 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Introduction Background Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery In the general multiple motor branch circuit case installing a motor controller that is not listed for group installation violates the NEC and NFPA 79 Each ArmorStart motor controller is listed for group installation This appendix explains how to use this listing to apply ArmorStart motor controllers in multiple motor branch circuits The NEC is NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NFPA 79 is the Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery The 2012 NEC refers to NFPA 79 in Article 670 s first informational note Group installation means that a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker protects a branch circuit that supplies two or more motors and their controllers Both the NEC and NFPA 79 have rules for installing controllers in the
120. 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits 360 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits 00 cece eee ees 361 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits 00 cece eee eee 361 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs cee e eee eee eee 362 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits 363 Reporting Examples otdeck ieee Geeta vasa eakdae cei iGaa s 364 How to Report the RPM of the 284 Internal Fan 364 How to report the Heat Sink Temperature of the 284 364 How to Report the Last Four Faultsis cssanesersesvs soe davon 365 How to Report an IP Address Conflict Detection 365 Demand Torque Off Considerations i 2 2 0i 4 2 2 eveneed betes 366 Keypad Disable with DeviceLogix cowed ewavieneneth cteeesws oan 366 Motion Disable tae tee ori aides aS nine meted aaa vere ae meee 366 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 13 Table of Contents Notes 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Overview a aie Ta F i a d Chapter 1 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Type EtherNet IP Horsepower Range 0 5 10 Hp 0 37 7 5 kW v 0 5 5 Hp 0 4 3 0 kW v Starting Method Full Voltage and Reversing v Sensorless Vector Control v Environmental Rating IP67 NEMA Type 4 v v Control
121. 31 0 56 in Used with Control Power Media Used with Three Phase Power Cordset Example Media Cordset Example Cat No 889N M65GF M2 Cat No 280 PWR22G M1 Figure 23 Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating 0 75 in Lock Nut ef h C a lin Lock Nut Ss Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Cat No 2931NM Cat No 2942NM 0 75 in Stain Relief Cord Connector 1in Stain Relief Cord Connector Cable Range 0 31 0 56 in Cable Range 0 70 0 95 in Used with Control Power Media Used with Three Phase Power Cordset Example Media Cordset Example Cat No 889N M65GF M2 Cat No 280 PWR35G M1 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 AC Supply Considerations for Bulletin 284E Units Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems ATTENTION The Bulletin 284E contains protective Metal Oxide Varistors A MOVs that are referenced to a ground These devices should be disconnected if the Bulletin 284E is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system ATTENTION Do not remove this jumper that is shown in Figure 25 if the unit is equipped with an EMI filter installed Disconnecting MOVs IMPORTANT Do not apply the EMI filter option to grounded or ungrounded Delta power source The EMI option requires a solidly grounded Wye Y power source i
122. 37 Stop Mode is set to Option 8 or 9 Parameter Number 260 Related Parameters 134 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 01 sec Minimum Value 0 01 sec Maximum Value 10 sec Default Value 0 0 sec e Program Parameter 261 EM Brk On Delay for desired action e P137 EM Brk On Delay Sets the time that the drive remains at minimum frequency before stopping and de energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to Option 8 or 9 gt G amp es Time A EM Brk Stop Energized Off Commanded Parameter Number 261 Related Parameters 134 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 01 sec Minimum Value 0 01 sec Maximum Value 10 00 sec Default Value 0 0 sec De Energized 0n Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Drive Stops Application Examples Appendix F 4 See the consume assembly below The Drive Input that was configured in step 1 is used to control the mechanical brake Default Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs ArmorStart EtherNet IP Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Out B Out A JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForward 1 Drivelnput4 Drivelnput3 Drivelnput2 Drivelnput1 DecelCtrl_1 DecelCtrl_0 AccelCtrl_1 Acce
123. 4 0 of 256 2 Double click the hardware address of the device that you want to configure The New Entry dialog with the device s Ethernet Address MAC is shown Figure 60 New Entry Dialog Box z Ethernet Address MAC fo0 00 BC 21 20 14 IPAddess 10 88 70 2Q Hostname Description l a Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 81 Chapter 4 82 Product Commissioning 3 Enter the IP Address that you want to assign to the device and click OK The device is added to the Relation List displaying the Ethernet Address MAC and corresponding IP Address Hostname and Description if applicable Figure 61 Relation List File Tools Help m Request History Clear History la x P Address _Hostname WBE U 2 m Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Disable BOO TP DHEP Ethemet Address MAC Type IPAddress Hostname Description 00 00 BC 21 20 14 DHCP 10 88 70 2 r Status Entries Sent 10 88 70 2 to Ethernet address 00 00 BC 21 20 14 1 of 256 When the address displays in the IP Address column in the Request History section it signifies that the IP address assignment has been made To assign this configuration to the device highlight the device in the Relation List panel and click the Disable BOOTP DHCP button When power is cycled to the devi
124. 4 choose 13 as Max either is ok MRA 1 25 13 11 12 14 15 1 25 7 6A 1 8A 5 5A 7 6A 3 0A 274A Combined Load Conductors Min Amp 125 7 6A Min Amp 125 7 6A Min Amp Min Amp Cb 125 3 0A 125 1 8 A Min Amp 125 5 5 A 4 7 6A Ya HP 2 HP 5 HP Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin 294 294 291 290 294 Min Amp 125 7 6A Min Amp a 125 7 6A l Min Amp Min Amp 125 2 1 A 125 1 1A Min Amp 125 3 4A Lare N L am N sue N sup N ame N c m m m R VIIA aaae ea Jen aaa Table 430 250 of NFPA 70 2011 290 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A 1 Requirement One Controller Ratings The motor controllers and overload relays must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection Text 7 2 10 4 1 Each motor controller and overload device is listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection Analysis To apply the ArmorStart LT motor controllers in the multiple motor branch circuit that is shown in Figure 109 7 2 10 4 1 must be satisfied each controller must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit pro
125. 4 Boost Select 214 Slip Hertz FLA 105 Therm Utilized 105 DC Bus Voltage 135 Maximum Freq 155 Relay Out Sel 185 Start Boost 217 Bus Reg Mode 106 Drive Status 136 Start Source 156 Relay Out Level 186 Brake Voltage 218 Current Limit 2 Starter Setup 107 Fault 1 Code 137 Stop Mode 167 Accel Time 2 187 Brake Frequency 219 Skip Frequency 106 FLA Settin 108 Fault 2 Code 138 Speed Reference 168 Decel Time 2 188 Maximum Voltage 220 Skip Freq Band 107 Overload ie 109 Fault 3 Code 139 Accel Time 1 169 Internal Freq 189 Current Limit 1 221 Stall Fault Time 108 OL Reset Level 110 Process Display 140 Decel Time 1 170 Preset Freq 0 190 Motor OL Select 224 Var PWM Disable 112 Control Source 141 Reset To Defaults 171 Preset Freq 1 191 PWM Frequency 225 Torque Perf Mode 113 Contrl In Status 143 Motor OL Ret 172 Preset Freq 2 192 Auto Rstrt Tries 226 Motor NP FLA 114 Dig In Status 173 Preset Freq 3 193 Auto Rstrt Delay 227 Autotune 115 Comm Status 174 Preset Freq 4 194 Start At PowerUp 228 IR Voltage Drop 116 Control SW Ver 175 Preset Freq 5 195 Reverse Disable 229 Flux Current Ref 117 Drive Type 176 Preset Freq 6 196 Flying Start En 260 EM Brk OFF Delay 118 Elapsed Run Time 177 Preset Freq 7 197 Compensation 261 EM Brk On Delay 122 Output Power 178 Jog Frequency 198 SW Current Trip 262 MOP Reset Sel 123 Output Power Fctr 179 Jog Accel Decel 199 Process Factor 263 DB Threshold 124 Drive Temp 180 DC Brake Time 200 Fault Clear 264 Comm Write Mode 125 Counter Status 126 Timer St
126. 5 Parameter Number 16 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group Produced Assembly Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 263 Default Value 6 Parameter Number 23 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 is set to allow the drive faults to auto reset the Pr FltReset Mode takes precedence In this case the ArmorStart will remain faulted until the fault is manually cleared 160 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Pr Fault Enable Parameter Number 24 This parameter enables the Protection Access Rule GET SET Fault by setting the bit to 1 Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 64927 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 64927 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 43 0 X Short Circuit Overload Phase Loss X Ground Fault X Stall X Control Power X 1 0 Fault X Over Temperature X Over Current X A3 Power Loss X Internal Comm X DC Bus Fault X EEprom X HW Fault X Restart Retries X Misc Fault Cannot be disabled Pr Fault Reset Parameter Number 25 This
127. 5DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt0ODeviceOut 9 LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut P10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut 10 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0 low byte Int0O0DeviceOut 11 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0 high byte IntO0DeviceOut 12 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1 low byte Int01DeviceOut 13 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1 high byte Int01DeviceOut 14 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2 low byte Int02DeviceOut 15 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2 high byte IntO2DeviceOut 16 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3 low byte Int03DeviceOut 17 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3 high byte IntO3DeviceOut 112 Identifies if a Communication Fault exists If a communication loss is present the PLC writes four bytes of 1 s to this tag The user should monitor this tag to ensure the data is valid IMPORTANT The user PLC control program should monitor the I Fault tag to ensure the data is accurate When a communications fault occurs the data in the consume and produce tags may not accurately reflect the status Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P
128. 8 150 12 127 H A MOTOR CONNECTION 185 7 3 M22 CORDSET e MOTOR CONNECTION 243 9 57 M35 CORDSET m 373 14 69 11 43 O 195 7 68 ry o 679 0 0 3 7 o o 0 0 39 SS 0 75 in CONDUIT OPENING Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 31 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance 280E 281E Daisy Chain DR Conduit Entrance Figure 13 Dimensions for Bulletin 280E 281E DR Option 351 13 82 290 30 5 p 189 11 42 1 20 r n 268 7 10 55 Ie 287 5 111 32 CAUTION e Soria 2 ORD Fon Q Q o AN a We ll 32 3 02 O 12 68 27 150 6 MOTOR CONNECTION 185 7 3 M22 CORDSET MOTOR CONNECTION 243 9 57 M35 CORDSET 14 69 NOTE Cord grips are supplied separately 373 o eo e o o
129. 80 FAM22M File No 318496 Guide PVVA 10 AWG 600V 25 A 0 48 0 81in 280 FAM35F 280 FAM35M When used with Cat No 280 PWRM24_ M E F G or H use Cat No 280 FAM35 and the corresponding mating receptacle 280 M35F M Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 275 Chapter12 Accessories Sealing Caps EtherNet IP Description Input Output Plastic Sealing Cap M12 1485A M12 1485A M12 Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap M22 for 10A protection HELE Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap M35 for 25A protection CEROC Dynamic Brake Connector M22 1485A C1 Source Control Brake Cap M25 280 BRCAP M25 Toachieve IP67 rating sealing caps must be installed on all unused 1 0 connections Handle and Cord Accessories Description Cat No Locking Tag Padlock attachment to the lockable handles 140M C M3 Up to three padlocks 4 8 mm 5 16 in diameter shackle Cord Grips for use with CR CRW Gland Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Thomas amp Betts 0 75in Strain Relief Cord Connector 0 75in Lock Nut Part No Fi Cable Range 0 31 0 56 in 2931NM Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Thomas amp Betts 1 in Strain Relief Cord Connector 1 in Lock Nut Part No Cable Range 0 31 0 56 in 2940NM Cord Grips for use with DR DRW Gland Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Thomas amp Betts d 0 5 in Strain Relief Cord Connector 0 5 in Lock
130. 80E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters InternalLinkStat Parameter Number 6 Status of the internal network Access Rule GET connections Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 31 Default Value 0 ee Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 3 Explicit Connection 1 0 Connection Explicit Fault X 1 0 Fault X 1 0 Idle X X X X _X RX X X X X Reserved Starter Command Parameter Number 7 The parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET starter command Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Bit Function 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 X Run Fwd X Run Rev Fault Reset X Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X OutA OutB 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Breaker Type This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this product 0 140M D8N C10 1 140M D8N 25 Base Enclosure Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating Bit 0 IP67 Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 15 Reserved Base Options Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit Bit 0 Output Fuse Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect Bits 3 7 Reserv
131. AUTO g Set FWD LED Ignore Ignore Set FWD LED REY Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED AUTO Command ee transition to Ignore Ignore Ignore If FWD LED transition to HAND FWD if REV LED Ignore Ignore Ignore l transition to HAND REV OFF Ignore Command motor OFF and transition to HAND STOP Command motor OFF and transition to HAND STOP Command motor OFF and transition to HAND STOP OFF Ignore HAND STOP HAND STOP HAND STOP The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 0 maintained HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV AUTO NO KEY hae Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to inore PRESSED 9 HAND STOP HAND STOP 9 g Set FWD LED Ignore Ignore Set FWD LED a Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED AUTO Command m Mi transition to Ignore Ignore Ignore If FWD LED transition to HAND FWD if REV LED Ignore Ignore Ignore i Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 123 Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Figure 75 Bulletin 284E Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with JOG and Direction Arrow Functions A B Allen Bradley lt 7 The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog HOA behavior when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 1 momentary HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV
132. Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Application Examples Appendix F Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 284 Status bit declaration 0 Tripped 1 Warning 2 Running Fwd 3 Running Rev 4 Ready 5 Net Ctl Status 6 Net Ref Status 7 At Reference 8 Drive Opto 1 9 Drive Opto 2 10 Keypad Jog 11 Keypad Hand 12 HOA Status 13 140M On 14 Contactor 1 15 Contactor 2 16 Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists 17 IO Cnxn Exists 18 Explicit Cnxn Fault 19 IO Cnxn Fau 20 IO Cnxn Idle 21 Keypad Hand Direction Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits The screen capture below shows how to choose Fault Bits in the ladder editor e DIP INT ig CNB INT gt Te i SB INT HA Latch 1 2 3 4 5 6 E Counter 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A Timer hehzhahas Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 361 AppendixF Application Examples The following table contains the fault bit definitions for ArmorStart 284 Fault bit declaration 0 Short Circuit 1 Overload 2 Phase Short 3 Ground Fault 4 Stall 5 Control Power 6 IO Fault 7 Over Temp 8 Phase Over Current 9 DNet Power Loss 10 Internal Comm 11 DC Bus Fault 12 EEprom 13 HW Fit 14 Reset Retries 15 Misc Fault 16 CP Warning 17 IO Warning 18 DN Warning
133. B assumes when a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 OutB Pr FitState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB Net FitState This parameter along with Parameter 42 OutB Net FitValue defines how Output B will respond when a network fault occurs 0 Goto Idle Value 1 Hold Last State When set to 1 Output B will hold state before trip occurrence When set to 0 Output B opens or closes as determined by setting in Parameter 42 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 38 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User I 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 39 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 40 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 41 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 165 Chapter 7 166 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters OutB Net FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter 41 OutB Net F
134. Bradley lt 7 Source Brake Contactor and Connector Bulletin 284E only An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake On Off The motor brake contactor is powered from the main power circuit The configuration of the R1 relay controls the function of the brake A customer accessible 3 A fuse is provided to protect the brake cable Included is a 3 meter 3 pin cordset for connection to the motor brake as standard EMI Filter Bulletin 284E only The EMI filter is required to be CE compliant When selected a 3 meter shielded 4 conductor motor cordset is provided as standard The filter must only be used in installations with solidly grounded AC supply distribution and must be bonded to the power distribution ground Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 25 Chapter 1 26 Product Overview Dynamic Brake Connector Bulletin 284E only The user selectable DB Option includes a 3 meter 3 pin cordset for connection to an IP20 Dynamic Brake Module See Chapter 11 for available dynamic brake modules Note The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor cannot be used with the DB factory installed option IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor Bulletin 284E only The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor design offers simplicity in wiring and installation The user selectable DB1 option provides the quick connector and an internal resistor monitoring circuit board The cable lengths available are 0 5 m and
135. Bussman PN KTK R 7 Rating 7 A 600V or Dimensions in 1 5 x 0 405 Littlefuse PN KLKROO7 T Source Brake Fuse For use with Bulletins 284 and 283 with Brake option CB SB UL Listed Class CC CSA HRC 1 Cooper Bussman PN KTK R 3 Rating 3 A 600V or Dimensions in 1 5 x 0 405 Littlefuse PN KLKR003 T Replacement Parts Description Cat No Replacement At Motor Disconnect Handle Kit Includes 1 handle 1 guard and 3 screws ee Replacement Fan for 284 Control Module 284 FAN Replacement Guide Pins 2 pins per package 284 PIN 346 These pins are replacement parts for factory installed alignment pins They cannot be retrofitted in the field The base module and control module require mating features as indicated in the following diagrams Guide Pins Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Mating Features Appendix E General Rule Reasons to Use System Design Considerations When Using a Line Reactor Generally a line reactor for an ArmorStart controller is not required Customers familiar with Rockwell Automation PowerFlex drives may ask this when installing an ArmorStart controller The most common reason s to use a line reactor are to e Extend the working life of the DC bus capacitors by reducing the associated heating impact that is caused by ripple noise currents in these capacitors e Reduce the impact of line disturbances on other equipment that r
136. Codes and Name Stags canawarswennsty nw Relves ereo 297 CIP Explicit Connection Behavior jis sficcgese ee ised beds 297 EDS Piles ntact shed ai h ATE tus wee eedee E EATA 298 CIP Object Requirements ta 1 i siisigs 3a cancta cea nasulsaday as eacens 298 Identity ODjeCt sa nendadnxiyesrsyawents e EE E S E RE mens 299 CLASS CODE 0x0001 sainia cece E a Eh 299 Assembly ODect sasacv aka devise ihre aes ede acecr ness s 301 CEASS CODE Ox 0008 te seis tod wie ranma aan ae ate aang aaraa 301 TVO Assemblies k gaene o a E E ead 302 Connection Manager Object cicss nascent seed benusevas eases 306 CLASS CODE Ox0006 2 5 0 30 25 ioe tee tedesuseei eet alates 306 Class IC onh ection Sais ccearannwewat osama athena R EA 307 Exclusive Owner Connection vec wen iverdnte recat caw emcedut 307 Listen Only Connection cc22 2e3 ea SE Ge eS 308 Class 3 CIP C Onin Cts a ars ava as aetna EEEE anole 308 Discrete Input Point Objects iva teh aee ty Peta ey bien sna ee uals 309 CLASS CODE 0x0008 a Ea eile NO eee nee 309 Discrete Output Point Objccti 55 5 srnureewes ea yas das pees 310 CLASS CODE 0x0009 0 ccc cece cece eee n eens 310 Parameter Object eddie kasi iki neuen a a a a 311 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 11 Table of Contents Using DeviceLogix Renewal Parts System Design Considerations When Using a Line Reactor CLASS CODE OxOO0F ccc ccc cece eee e ene eeees 311 Parameter Group ODICCE ies catast
137. Control I EERE REST Ee EST ORO TEE M otor Overload Protection It overload protection 150 for 60 seconds 200 for 3 seconds provides Class 10 protection Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous fault Over Voltage 380 460V AC Input Trip occurs 810V DC bus voltage equivalent to 575V AC incoming line Under Voltage 380 480V AC Input Trip occurs 390V DC bus voltage equivalent to 275V AC incoming line Faultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds Control Specifications Sensorless Vector Control Carrier Frequency 2 16 kHz Drive rating is based on 4 kHz Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Within 0 05 of set output frequency Speed Regulation Open Loop with Slip Compensation 1 of base speed across a 60 1 speed range Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast DC Brake Ramp to Hold and S Curve Accel Decel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 600s in 0 1 s increments Electronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Minimum DB Resistance Drive Rating Minimum DB Resistance Input Voltage kW Hp Q 0 4 0 5 97 480V 50 60 H 2 ae la 2 d 2 2 3 97 4 0 5 77 266 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 of P133 Motor OL Current Specifications for ArmorS
138. Control Inputs 18 10 AWG 0 7 Nem 0 35 in 9 mm Standard Conduit Knockout Size The following table shows conduit or cord grip size and the diameter of the punched hole For example 0 5 in conduit requires a hole punch of 0 885 in for proper installation Table 3 Conduit and Knockout Sizes Conduit Cord Size Conduit Cord Size Actual Hole Actual Hole mm in Diameter mm Diameter in 16 00 0 50 22 48 0 885 21 00 0 75 28 32 1 115 27 00 1 00 34 59 1 362 35 00 1 25 43 21 1 701 41 00 1 50 49 48 1 948 53 00 2 00 61 34 2 415 63 00 2 50 73 91 2 910 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 Terminal Designations As shown in Figure 18 the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains terminals for power control and ground wiring Access can be gained by removing the terminal access cover plate Figure 18 ArmorStart Power and Control Terminal Connections applies to Bulletin 280E 281E and Bulletin 284E Detail A See Detail A Table 4 Power Control and Ground Terminal Designations Terminal Designations No of Poles Description Al 2 Control Power Input M2 2 Control Power Common A3 2 Unswitched 24V Control PE 2 Ground 1 11 2 Line Power Phase A 3 L3 2 Line Power Phase B 5 L5 2 Line Power Phase C Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P
139. Controller Input Status Tags Tag Description Use Fault Communication Fault between PLC and Device all 1 s Fault all 0 s Normal TripPresent Fault exists with unit WarningPresent Warning of potential fault RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse Ready Control Power and 3 phase present Ind Input 0 Inl Input 1 In2 Input 2 In3 Input 3 Hand HOA is in Auto mode DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed Pt00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt01DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt02DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt03DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt04DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt05DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt06DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt07DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt08DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt09DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Ptl10DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt11DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt12DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt13DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Ptl4DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status LogicEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled Produced Word0Param Data reference by Parameter 13 Produced Word1 Param Data reference by Parameter 14 Produced Word2Param Data reference by Parameter 15 Produced Word3Param Data reference by Parameter 16 120 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN
140. Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 31 Default Value 0 bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 3 Explicit Connection 1 0 Connection Explicit Fault X 1 0 Fault X 1 0 Idle X X X X _X XX X X X Reserved Starter Command Parameter Number 7 The parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET starter command Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Bit Function 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 X Run Fwd X Run Rev Fault Reset X Jog Fwd X Jog Rev X Reserved X OutA OutB 154 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Breaker Type This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this product 0 140M D8N C10 1 140M D8N 25 Base Enclosure Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating Bit 0 IP67 Bits 1 15 Reserved Base Options Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit Bit 0 Output Fuse Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect Bits 3 7 Reserved Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Bit 10 15 Reserved Wiring Options Bit 0 Conduit Bit 1 Round Media Bits 2 15 Reserved Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 22 Access Rule GET Data Ty
141. E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group 205 ominis Action Selects the drive s response toa loss of the communication connection or 0 Fault Drive Advanced Setup excessive communication errors 206 Comin LossTiime Sets the time that the drive remains in communication loss before 15 0 Secs Drive Advanced Setu implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 Comm Loss Action P 3 Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor This frequency r 214 Slip Hertz FLA is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current 2 0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134 215 Process Time Lo Minimum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 0 00 Drive Advanced Setup Process Display indicates the duration of the process Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135 216 Process Time Hi Maximum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 0 00 Drive Advanced Setup Process Display indicates the duration of the process 217 Bus Reg Mode Enables the bus regulator 1 Enabled Drive Advanced Setup ae A F ae Drive Rated 218 Current Limit 2 Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs Ampsx1 5 Drive Advanced Setup 219 Skip Frequency Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate 0 0 Hz Drive Ad
142. Fault X Restart Retries X Misc Fault See Parameter 61 Last PR Fault for details 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Starter Status Parameter Number 5 This parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET starter Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 6 5 4 3 0 X TripPresent WarningPresent RunningForward X RunningReverse X Ready X Net Ctl Status X Net Ref Status At Reference DrvOpto1 X DrvOpto2 X Keypad Jog X Keypad Hand X HOA Status X Disconnect Closed Contactor 1 Contactor 2 Refers to source brake contactor status Refers to output contactor status Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 153 Chapter7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters InternalLinkStat Parameter Number 6 This parameter provides status of the Access Rule GET internal network connections
143. Green represents the ethernet network status The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs Figure 7 LED Status and a Reset button Indication and Reset The POWER LED The LED is illuminated solid green when switched A1 A2 control power is present and with the proper polarity RUN LED This LED is illuminated solid green when a start command and control power are present NETWORK LED This bicolor red green LED indicates the status of the internal communication link FAULT LED This indicates a Controller Fault trip condition Reset Button is a local trip reset 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Overview Chapter 1 Electronic Data Sheet EDS Fault Diagnostics EtherNet IP devices have Electronic Data Sheets EDS These are specially formatted text files as defined by the CIP specifications that represent the object model of the device EDS files contain details about the readable and configurable parameters of the EtherNet IP device They also provide information about the I O connections the device supports and the content of the associated data structures EDS files are used by EtherNet IP device configuration tools such as RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP and data servers such as RSLinx Classic EDS files for all ArmorStart EtherNet IP devices can also be uploaded directly from the device via the web server interface Rockwe
144. JOG FWD JOG REV AUTO If FWD LED If FWD LED If FWD LED Set REV LED Set REV LED Set REV LED noe lahore innate Else If REV LED Set FWD LED Else If REV LED Else If REV LED 9 9 9 Set FWD LED Set FWD LED If FWD LED transition to JOG FWD rained lanare iior fanaa rane If REV LED transition to JOG REV 9 9 9 9 9 auro Command motor OFF and transition to AUTO Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore If FWD LED transition to HAND PWD Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Else If REV LED transition to 9 9 9 9 9 HAND REV Command motor Command motor No Key Pressed Ignore Ignore Ignore OFF and transition OFF and transition Ignore to HAND STOP to HAND STOP Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor Ignore OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition O to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Chapter 6 The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog HOA behavior when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 0 maintained HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV JOG FWD JOG REV AUTO Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor No Key Pressed Ignore OFF and transition OFF andtransition OFF and transition OFF and transition Ignore to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP
145. LA Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 75 148 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Bulletin 284E Basic Status Group Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 1 This parameter provides status of Access Rule GET hardware inputs Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 15 Default Value 0 Bit Function 3 2 1 Ind X In X In2 X In3 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 149 Chapter7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters This parameter provides status of network Deviceln Data device inputs Bit Parameter Number 2 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 X Pt00Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt07Deviceln Pt08Deviceln Pt09Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt14Deviceln 150 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Pt15Devicel
146. Level USINT 75 Parameter editable Seconds between refresh 15 Disable Refresh with 0 Copyright 2010 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved In the figure above the Starter Setup parameters are viewed The user can view all parameters from this screen To modify a parameter the user clicks the Edit button Figure 69 Enter Network Password x ye This secure Web Site at 192 168 1 11 requires you to log on Please type the User Name and Password that you use for ArmorStart 281E 0 5 2 54 24VDC UserName Administra z Password I Save this password in your password list Cancel The user is prompted to enter the default user name Administrator There is no password set by default The user is expected to change the user name login and password to avoid unauthorized access to the device configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 E starter Protest F User 1 0 Config E mise Config E orme t0 config D ore osiv E dries setue E Drive Advanced Diagnostics D Diagnostic Overview Protection Trip Status P Hetarik Settings E it oenet Statines Ring Statisties Macellaneous GB Adminisvative Suttings DB cence rdantey DB Network Configuration BD Emai Configuration E Passrerd Configuration By Fos File orStart 284E PF40 480V 0 5HP ee Device Identity Networie Confi
147. MTR22 M68 90 M22 Motor Cordset IP67 NEMA Type 4 10 32 8 280 MTR22 M10 12 39 4 280 MTR22 M12 14 45 9 280 MTR22 M14 20 65 6 280 MTR22 M20 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 273 Chapter12 Accessories Description Rating Length m ft Cat No 3 9 8 280 MTR35 M3 6 19 6 280 MTR35 M6 90 M35 Motor Cordset IP67 NEMA Type 4 10 32 8 280 MTR35 M10 14 45 9 280 MTR35 M14 20 65 6 280 MTR35 M20 Motor Cable Cordsets High Flex 3 9 8 280 MTRF22 M3 4 13 1 280 MTRF22 M4 6 19 6 280 MTRF22 M6 90 M22 Motor Cordset IP67 NEMA Type 4 8 26 2 280 MTRF22 M8 10 32 8 280 MTRF22 M10 14 45 9 280 MTRF22 M14 20 65 6 280 MTRF22 M20 Motor Cable Cordsets Shielded VFD Motor Cable Cordsets Shielded VFD 3 9 8 284 MTRS22 M3 4 13 1 284 MTRS22 M4 6 19 6 284 MTRS22 M6 90 M22 Motor Cordset IP67 NEMA Type 4 8 26 2 284 MTRS22 M8 10 32 8 284 MTRS22 M10 12 39 4 284 MTRS22 M12 14 45 9 284 MTRS22 M14 Motor Cable Cordsets Extended Source Control Brake 1 3 3 285 BRC25 M1 3 9 8 285 BRC25 M3 4 13 1 285 BRC25 M4 6 19 6 285 BRC25 M6 90 M25 Source Brake Cable IP67 NEMA Type 4 8 26 2 285 BRC25 M8 10 32 8 285 BRC25 M10 12 39 4 285 BRC25 M12 14 45 9 285 BRC25 M14 20 65 6 285 BRC25 M120 Extended Source Control Brake Cable Cordse
148. Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 190 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Reverse Disable Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables the function that allows the direction of the motor rotation to be changed The reverse command may come from a digital command or serial command All reverse inputs including two wire Run Reverse will be ignored with reverse disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Flying Start En Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Compensation Enables disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability 0 Disabled 1 Electrical Default Some drive motor combinations have inherent instabilities that are exhibited as non sinusoidal motor currents This setting attempts to correct this condition 2 Mechanical Some motor load combinations have mechanical resonances that can be excited by the drive current regulator This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition 3 Both Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 195 Related Parameters 106 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 196 Access Rule GET
149. N P September 2015 0 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 PWM Frequency Parameter Number 191 Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM Related Parameters 224 output waveform The Figure 80 provides Access Rule GET SET derating guidelines that are based on the PWM frequency setting Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 2 0 Hz Maximum Value 16 0 Hz Default Value 4 0 Hz Figure 80 Derating Guidelines that are Based on the PWM Frequency Setting 100 96 92 gt 88 84 30 S 76 B Ss 68 L 64 60 56 52 1234567 8 9 001112 1314 15 16 Carrier Frequency kHz Auto Rstrt Tries Parameter Number 192 Set the maximum number of times the Related Parameter 155 193 drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 0 Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 Auto Rstrt Delay to a value other than 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 189 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto R
150. Nut Part No s w Cable Range 0 5 0 75 in 2922NM Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Thomas amp Betts 1in Strain Relief Cord Connector 1 in Lock Nut Part No Cable Range 0 70 0 95in 2942NM 276 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Accessories Chapter 12 Dynamic Braking Resistors Sensorless Vector Control SVC Minimum Resistance and Recommended Modules for Option DB Table 50 Dynamic Brake Specification for Option DB IP20 Resistor Application Type 1 Application Type 2 Drive and Max Braking Motor Size kW Resistance Continuous Max Energy Torque of BrakingTorque Braking Torque Hp Cat No Ohms 5 Power kW kJ Motor of Motor Duty Cycle of Motor Duty Cycle 380 480 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 AK R2 360P500 360 0 086 17 305 100 47 150 31 0 75 1 AK R2 360P500 360 0 086 17 220 100 23 150 15 1 5 2 AK R2 360P500 360 0 086 17 110 100 12 110 11 2 2 3 AK R2 120P1K2 120 0 26 52 197 100 24 150 16 4 5 AK R2 120P1K2 120 0 26 52 124 100 13 124 10 The resistors that are listed in this table are rated for 5 duty cycle Note 1 Always check resistor ohmic value against minimum resistance for drive being used Note 2 Duty cycle that is listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration For constant regen at full speed duty cycle capability is half of what is listed Application Type 1 r
151. O 0 Pt03Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt04Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt04Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt05Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt05Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt06Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt06Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt07Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt07Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt08Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt08Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt09Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt09Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt10Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt10Deviceln Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 111 Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Controller Output Command Tags Controller Name Logix Tag Name AS_ DEMO Pt11Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt11Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt12Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt12Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt13Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt13Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt14Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt14Deviceln Table 11 Default Produce Assembly for Bulletin 284E Produce Assembly Instance 151 Drive Status Bulletin284E Starters Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Reserved name Fault 1 Reserved name Fault 2 Reserved name Fault 3 Reserved name Fault 4 AtReference NetWork NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent ReferenceStatus 5 EA Be as DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In Ind 6 OutputFrequency Low xxx x Hz 7 OutputFrequency High xxx x Hz 8 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt0
152. OFFLINE e Connection OFFLINE Module Info ONLINE e Parameters OFFLINE ONLINE Internet Protocol ONLINE e Port Configuration ONLINE Network ONLINE e The last five tabs in the list do not display information until the ONLINE connection has been established with the ArmorStart device The General Connection and Parameters tabs are discussed first because they are used to define OFFLINE settings so that connection with the ArmorStart device can be established Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Offline Connection General Tab Click the General tab to display the following General Connection Module Info Parameters Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Type 284E FYD1P4 ArmorStart VFD 480V AC 0 5HP Vendor Allen Bradley Parent ENBT Ethermet Address Name ArmorStart_EtherNet Private Network 192 168 1 12 Description O IP Address O Host Name Module Definition Series A Revision 11 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Status Offline Cancel Help This tab allows you to name your module which should be descriptive and representative of the module The IP Address of the module must also be input so that communication can be established The IP Address should be the one defined using the BootP DHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches or the ArmorStart int
153. P4Z 0 5 1 4 Rated ja Operating gt 84E FVD2P32 1 3 urrent 284E FVD4P0Z 2 4 284E FVD6P0Z 3 6 284E FVD7P6Z 5 7 6 Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V ae Rated Impulsed Voltage 4kV Control Circuit Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC Overvoltage Category Ill Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Short Gland Current Circuit Type Rating Protection 480Y 277V 480V 0 24 1 2A Sym Amps rms 65 kA 65 kA 05 25 10A 0P Max Circuit Breaker 100A 60A AnyCR 1 1 5 5A Max Fuse 100A 60A or DR Sym Amps rms 30kA 30kA 3 2 16A 25D Max Circuit Breaker 100A 60A Short Circuit Protection Device Short Circuit SCPD Performance Type 1 Max Fuse 100A 60A Protection 0 24 1 2A Sym Amps rms 45 kA 65kA 65kA ot 5 0 5 2 5A 10A 108 Max Circuit Breaker 30A N A N A 10C Max Fuse 1 1 5 5A Non time Delay 40A 40A 40A Any RR Time Delay 20A 20A 20A Sym Amps rms N A 30kA 30kA 3 2 16A 250 Max Circuit Breaker N A 100A 60A Max Fuse N A 100A 60A SCPD List Size per NFPA 70 NEC or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications Type J CC and T fuses only Only when used with Bulletin 140U H frame Only when used with Cat No 140U D6D3 xxx frame or smaller Bulletin 140U H or 140G H circuit breaker not rated more than 480V 100 A and a maximum interrupt of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes When protected by Cat No
154. PF40 480V 0 5HP Automation Device Name Device Description Device Location Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Product Revisions ArmorStart 284E PF40 480V 0 5HP 00 00 BC C1 90 17 192 168 1 1 Resources information ArmorStart 284E PF40 480V 0 5HP Main Control Board Boot Code PowerFlex 40 3P 460V 50HP ArmorStart 284E PF40 480V 0 5HP EtherNet IP Boot Code EtherNet IP FPGA Code Firmware Version Date Serial Number Status Uptime Sep 17 2010 15 36 28 A0120E9D Run 0 days 5h 32m 51s Seconds Between Refresh 15 Disable Refresh with 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 85 Chapter4 Product Commissioning From here you are able to view parameter settings device status and diagnostics from multiple tab views Figure 66 Multiple Tab Views ArmorStart 284E PF40 480V 0 5HP M ze Basic Status ArmorStart 284E PF40 480V 0 5HP Ai e A i Diagnostic Overview Qogqoqoaq E cpu 15 Established Classi Connections 1 P Established Class3 Connections o G Web Server Timed out Classi Connections 0 Go Server Errors o Timed out Class3 Connections o Page Hits 61 Connection Open Requests 11 o Connections Established 2 Connection Open Format Rejects 0 5 Connection Open Resource Rejects 0 G Email statisties Connection Open Other Rejects o D Warning emails o Connection Close Requests 10 B Warning recovered emails o Connection Close For
155. Programming Example 000 c eee eee 333 Import and Export Pvsvie t ind scustia ck ct de tease sca kage cores 339 Appendix D Bulletin 280E 28 E 2 toe ae eae ee oe ee Nk nat ole Stee cal 341 Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection 341 Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection 342 Balletin cook cc caw ds ovat is ane ve aes Hans Sowa sa ae aoe 343 Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection 343 Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection 344 Replacement Fuses cece sel na ceri beers ot ate eee eda 346 Replacement Parts tiga ite eta a a ee 346 Appendix E General Rules thet chal cinder uth eum ued ell el UN th es Ae OR oll 347 MREASG INS TOUS Gress sien el ca sy a ee Gof yer a a a ont cen ON tea ar 347 DVS Sic tina ented cana gpa aed ie esate aaa E eases as tec a 348 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Application Examples Table of Contents Appendix F Manual Brake Conttol 2 2i063 0cciaid a bi dae SR aa eid bas 349 284 VFD Preset Speed Exaniple c sic sapac oui onsies fete aces 352 Operati n ss ann nrs aE e EET EEEE E O DNA RE SA ee 855016 EG 357 DeviceLogix Ladder Editor Examples sincotincntieassasecerdanss 358 ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits cccccceeeeeens 358 Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits 00 359 Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs 000005 360 Bulletin
156. Protective Equipment PPE Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment PPE gt gt gt Allen Bradley ArmorConnect ArmorStart ControlLogix DeviceLogix On Machine PowerFlex RSLinx RSLogix 5000 RSNetWorx and StepLogic are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies European Communities EC Directive Compliance If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives Low Voltage and EMC Directives This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2006 95 EC Low Voltage Directive and Council Directive 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC by applying the following standard s e Bulletin 280E 281E EN 60947 4 1 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4 1 Contactors and motor starters Electromechanical contactors and motor starters e Bulletin 284E EN 61800 5 1 Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy e Bulletin 284E EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods This product is intended for
157. S stored in flash memory 6 Main Control Board Boot Code The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board boot code stored in flash memory 7 The Internal PF 40 Inverter The firmware rev of the Inverter as read from the RS 485 connection 80 MCB IIC Daughter Board The firmware rev of the MCB IIC Daughter Board 90 BASE IIC Daughter Board The firmware rev of the Base IIC Daughter Board These instance numbers assume the next available instance base on the unit configuration If the unit is a DOL No Drive and there is an MCB Daughter board present its instance number will be 7 IMPORTANT Attempts to access Attribute 10 of all DeviceNet Main Control Board instances are blocked If Attribute 10 Heartbeat Interval is accessed an Attribute Not Supported error will be generated Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 299 Appendix B CIP Information Instance 1 of the Identity Object contains the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Vendor UINT 1 2 Get Device Type UINT 22 3 Get Product Code UINT Starter Rating specific Revision Structure of 4 Get Major Revision USINT See table above Minor Revision USINT Bit 0 0 Not Owned 1 Owned by Master Bit 2 0 Factory Defaulted 1 Configured Bit 8 Minor Recoverable fault gt Get Status WORD Bit 9 Minor Unrecoverable fault Bit 10 Major Recoverable fault Bit 11 Major Unrecov
158. September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Device Level Ring DLR Object CLASS CODE 0x0047 The following class attributes are supported for the DLR Object A single instance Instance 1 are supported with the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Network Topology USINT 0 Linear 1 Ring 2 Get Network Status USINT 0 Normal 1 Ring Fault 2 Unexpected Loop Detect 3 Partial Network Fault 4 Rapid Fault Restore Cycle 10 Get Active Supervisor Address Struct of Ring Supervisor UDINT Array of 6 USINT 12 Get Capability Flags DWORD 0x00000002 The following common services are implemented for the DLR Object Service Code Implemented for Class Instance Service Name 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 319 AppendixB CIP Information Qos Object CLASS CODE 0x0048 The following class attributes are supported for the QoS Object A single instance Instance 1 are supported and it contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Set 802 10 Tag Enable USINT 0 Disable Default 1 Enable 4 Set DSCP Urgent USINT Default 55 5 Set DSCP Scheduled USINT Default 47 6 Set DSCP High USINT Default 43 7 Set DSCP Low USINT Default 31 8 Set DSCP Explicit USINT Default 27
159. September 2015 39 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Control Power Wiring ArmorsStart EtherNet IP controller uses 24V DC control power for communications and I O The control power terminal connections are labeled A1 A2 and A3 Switched power supplies the outputs Unswitched power supplies logic power and sensor inputs 24V DC Control Power e 24V DC 15 10 e Al Switched V e A2 Common for both switched and unswitched V e A3 Unswitched V Input and Output Characteristics e 5 pin female connectors M12 e 4 fixed inputs two per connector software selectable sink or source e 2 sourcing outputs DC solid state one per connector Input and Output Power Connection e Sensor Power is sourced from 24V supplied from A3 and A2 e Output power is sourced from 24V supplied from Al and A2 e Max current per output point is 0 5 A and is not to exceed 1 0 A total IMPORTANT Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms that can exceed 20 A The power supply must be capable of supporting this amount of instant power demand when multiple ArmorStart controllers are turned ON simultaneously For supplies without this capacity it is recommended to apply unswitched power A3 A2 first and after a2 4 second delay apply switched power If control power falls below 19V DC there is a higher risk of communications issues or device faults 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P Se
160. Start device By clicking in the Group pull down menu you can choose which parameter group is displayed When the Parameters tab is selected the tab defaults to the Drive Setup Bulletin 284E or Starter Setup Bulletin 280E groups depending on the ArmorStart selection These Setup groups are the minimum required parameters to get the ArmorStart device running After this parameter group has been set the next time that the Parameters tab is opened all parameters are shown and the tab is no longer default to the setup groups Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 101 Chapter5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Online Connection Now that the offline connection settings have been set connect to the ArmorStart device to review the last five AOP tabs Note If you are using a Cat No 1756 ENBT Ethernet module to communicate with the PLC verify that you have updated the module s firmware to Revision 6 001 or later The latest firmware can be found at http support rockwellautomation com controlflash 1 Ifa controller path is not set in the field that is shown below you must first set a path before going online with the controller Click the Zl RSwho button shown below Path lt none gt E 2 Expand and browse the AB_ETHIP 1 Ethernet driver fe Who Active El v Autobrowse E Workstation STUDENT gs AB_DF1 1 Data Highway Plus on S AB_
161. T Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Config Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 31 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Config Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 Default Value 0 sn Sink Source Parametern o a Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 33 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 163 Chapter 7 164 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters OutA Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Output A assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 33 OutA Pr FitState is set to ug 0 Open 1 Close OutA Net FitState This parameter along with Parameter 36 OutA Net FitValue defines how Output A will respond when a network fault occurs 0 Goto Net FitValue 1 Hold Last State When set to 1 Output A will hold state before trip occurrence When set to 0 Output A opens or closes as determined by the setting in Parameter 36 This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter 35 OutA Net FitState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutA Net IdIState This parameter along with Parameter 38 OutA Net IdlValue defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle 0 Goto Net IdlVal
162. The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 1 momentary HAND STOP HAND FWD AUTO Command motor OFF and AUTO transition to AUTO Ignore Ignore i Command motor ON and anole bane a transition to HAND FWD g 9 OFF liore Command motor OFF and Command motor OFF and O g transition to HAND STOP transition to HAND STOP The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 0 maintained HAND STOP HAND FWD AUTO Command motor OFF and NO KEY PRESSED Ignore transition to HAND STOP Ignore Command motor OFF and AUTO transition to AUTO gnor gnore k Command motor ON and id r inate paro transition to HAND FWD 9 9 OFF inore Command motor OFF and Command motor OFF and re g transition to HAND STOP transition to HAND STOP 122 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Figure 74 Bulletin 281E Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Forward Reverse Function Chapter 6 The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 1 momentary transition to HAND REV Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV
163. This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed The hardware address is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP utility Host name The host name is the unique name for a computer within its domain It s always the first element of a full name and with its domain and top level domain suffix creates the unique name of that computer on the Internet For example let s say a trading website is www trading com The host name is www which is not unique on the web but is unique within the trading domain The host name can also see the fully qualified domain name FQDN or in this example www trading com Both naming methods seem to be used interchangeably in various documents For the purposes of this document the host name sees the FQDN or as in this example www trading com Hub A central connecting device that joins devices together in a star configuration Hubs are generally not suitable for use in 1 0 control systems since they are time critical applications that cannot tolerate lost packets Implicit messaging Real time messaging of 1 0 data IP Internet protocol that provides the routing mechanism for messages All messages contain not only the address of the destination station but the address of a destination network that allows messages to be sent to multiple networks within an organization or around the world IP address A32 bit identification number for each node on
164. User Manual Allen Bradley ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet IP Catalog Numbers 280E 281E 284E Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation configuration and operation of this equipment before you install configure operate or maintain this product Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes laws and standards Activities including installation adjustments putting into service use assembly disassembly and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to u
165. VBP 1 1789 A17 A Virtual Chassis Path AB_ETHIP 1 Path in Project lt none gt 3 Select the Controller path Then click Go Online Oo TEA PEE Esheret Bort ia 1 We boaa k 0 GS a eee i i 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 4 The following appears and for this example click Download to connect to the controller Connected To Go Online x Options General Date Time Major Faults Minor Faults File Nonvolatile Memory Condition The open project doesnt match the project in the controller Connected Controller Controller Name ArmmorStart_Quick Start Controller Type 1769 L35E A CompactLogx5335E Controller Comm Path AB_ETHIP 1 192 168 1 7 Backplane 0 Serial Number 40394E97 Security No Protection Offline Project Controller Name try Controller Type 1769 L35E CompactLogx5335E Controller File C Student try ACD Serial Number lt none gt Security No Protection 5 Ifa download confirmation dialog box appears click Download again 6 Click Yes to bring the controller back to Remote Run RSLogix 5000 A Done downloading Change controller mode back to Remote Run Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 103 Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software 104 7 The controller should now be online
166. Voltage 24V DC v y Operational Voltage Ratings 200 480V AC v 380 480V AC v Rated for Group Motor Installations v y Local logic using v v Logix 1 0 Capability Four Inputs y v Two Outputs y v Network Communications EtherNet IP v v LED Status Indication v y Gland Plate Entry Conduit Entrance v y ArmorConnect Power Media y v Quick Disconnects 1 0 Communications Motor v A Connection Three Phase and Control Power Extended Length Motor and Brake Cables v y Factory Installed Options Hand Off Auto HOA Keypad A A Source Brake Contactor v Dynamic Brake Connector E v Output Contactor y EMI Filter v Shielded Motor Cable v Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 15 Chapter1 Product Overview Introduction Description 16 This chapter provides a brief overview of the features and functionality of the ArmorStart EtherNet Industrial Protocol IP Distributed Motor Controllers Bulletin 280E 281E and 284E The ArmorStart EtherNet IP Distributed Motor Controllers are integrated pre engineered motor starting solutions Bulletins 280E and 281E are used for full voltage and reversing applications respectively Bulletin 284E is used in variable frequency applications where more precise motor control is needed The ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller offers a robust IP67 UL Type 4 12 enclosure design that is suitable for water wash down environments
167. YTE 4 Get Size UINT Number of bytes in attribute 3 100 Get Name String STRING The following services are implemented for the Assembly Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x18 No Yes Get_Member Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 301 AppendixB CIP Information 1 0 Assemblies The following table summarizes the Assembly instances that are supported in the ArmrorStart EtherNet IP product Instance Type Description 3 Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance 52 Produced Required ODVA Produced Instance 150 Produced Default Bulletin 280 281E Produced Assembly 1510 Produced Default Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly 162 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for DOL and Reversing Starters 1660 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type Starters 191 Consumed Empty assembly for Input Only 1 0 Connection 192 Consumed Empty assembly for Listen Only 1 0 Connection These assemblies are selectable on Inverter Type ArmorStart units only Instances 3 and 52 are required by the ODVA Motor Starter Profile When used as an EtherNet IP Class 1 connection point the I O data attribute is simply passed through the bridge Instance 3 This is the required output consumed assembly Instance 3 ODVA Starter Bit 0 Run Fwd Instance 52 This is the r
168. able 1 Enable Parameter Number 43 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 44 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 8 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 9 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 145 Chapter 7 146 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Keypad Mode This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary 0 Maintained 1 Momentary Keypad Disable This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons 0 Not Disabled 1 Disabled Set to Defaults This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults but will not cause the ArmorStart to reboot 0 No Operation 1 Set to Defaults Starter Display Group Bulletin 280E 281E only Phase A Current This parameter provides the current of Phase A measured n increments of 1 10 of an ampere
169. able 1 1 Hold Accel Rate Selected Decel 2 Decel 1 0 0 No Command 0 1 Decel 1 Enable 1 0 Decel 2 Enable 1 1 Hold Decel Rate Selected Freq Ctrl 2 Freq Ctrl 1 Freq Ctrl 0 0 0 0 No Command 0 0 1 Freq Source P136 Start Source 0 1 0 Freq Source P169 Internal Freq 0 1 1 Freq Source Comms 1 0 0 P170 Preset Freq 0 Accel Decel 1 1 0 1 P171 Preset Freq 1 Accel Decel 1 1 1 0 P172 Preset Freq 2 Accel Decel 2 1 1 1 P173 Preset Freq 3 Accel Decel 2 Using parameters 170 173 set them to 0 10 30 and 60 respectively Figure 116 shows the preset frequencies 0 3 Figure 116 P170 173 Preset Frequency Settings General Connection Module Info Parameters DeviceLogix Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Network Group lt All Parameters gt v l 156 EM Brake Contactor Level 0 Sets the trip p 167 Accel Time 2 20 0 0 0 600 0 Mhen active lt 600 0 When active 400 0 Provides the fi 400 0 Provides a fixe 400 0 Provides a fixe 1400 0 Provides a fixt 400 0 Provides a tel 1400 0 Provides a tix 400 0 Provides a fix 400 0 Provides a fixt 177 Preset Freq 7 400 0 Provides a fixt 178 JogFrequency 100 loo 4000 Sets the outpu v Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 353 AppendixF Application Examples In this example DeviceLogix receives data from the PLC program The co
170. additional information regarding group motor installations with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller see Appendix A In addition to conduit and seal tite raceway it is acceptable to use cable that is dual rated Tray Cable Exposed Runs TC ER and Cord STOOW for power and control wiring on ArmorStart installations In the USA and Canada installations the following guidance is outlined by the National Electrical Code NEC and NFPA 79 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision verify that only qualified persons service the installation and where the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical damage using mechanical protection such as struts angles or channels Type TC tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC Metal Clad cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC ER Exposed Run shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization equipment or device as open wiring The cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 1 8 m 6 ft and installed in a good workman like manner Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an equipment grounding conductor within the cable Historically cable meeting these crush and impact requirements was designated and
171. age source Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V eats Rated Impulsed Voltage 4kV Control Circuit ae Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC Overvoltage Category Ill Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz Gland Current Short Circuit Type Rating Protection 480Y 277V 480V 0 24 1 2A Sym Amps rms 65 kA 65 kA 0 5 2 5A 10A 10B 10C Max Circuit Breaker 100 A 60A AnycR 11 55 A Max Fuse 100A 60A or DR Sym Amps rms 30kA 30kA 3 2 16A 25D Max Circuit Breaker 100A 60A Short Circle Short Circuit Protection Device SCPD Max Fuse 100A 60A ort Circui Protection Performance Type 1 0 24 1 2A Sym Amps rms 45KA 65kA 65kA 0 5 2 5A Max Circuit Breaker 30A N A N A 10A 10B 10C Max Fuse 1 1 5 5A Non time Delay 40A 40A 40A Any RR Time Delay 20A 20A 20A Sym Amps rms N A 30 kA 30 kA 3 2 16A 25D Max Circuit Breaker N A 100A 6048 Max Fuse N A 100A 60A SCPD List Size per NFPA 70 NEC or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications See Contactor Life Load Curves on page 260 Type J CC and T fuses only Only when used with Bulletin 140U H frame Only when used with Cat No 140U D6D3 xxx frame or smaller Bulletin 140U H or 140G H circuit breaker not rated more than 480V 100 A and a maximum interrupt of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes When protected by Cat No 140U D6D3 xxx circuit breaker not rated more than 480 277 30 A having an interrupt rating not less than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes Ro
172. agnostics Table 47 Media Counter Errors Definition A frame containing bits that do not total an integral multiple of eight Alignment errors often result from e Starting or stopping of a module e MAC layer packet formation problems e Cabling problems that corrupt or eliminate data Packets passing through more than two cascaded multi port transceivers Solution Some example solutions include e Check for a mismatch of speed and or duplex between two linked nodes e Check that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location FCS Errors A frame containing 8 bits at least one of which has been corrupted Frame Check Sequence FCS errors often result from Starting or stopping of a module Cabling problems that corrupt or eliminate data Important Even though the acceptable Ethernet bit error rate is 1 in 108 the typical rate is 1 in 1012 or better Single Collisions The number of outgoing packets that encountered only one collision during transmission Multiple Collisions The number of outgoing packets that encountered 2 15 collisions during transmission SQE Test Errors A test to detect the collision present circuit between a transceiver and a network interface card NIC Important Because most NICs now have an integrated transceiver
173. al details on the last protection fault See the following table for troubleshooting information that is based on what Parameter 61 returns Also see Parameters 107 109 to get the VFD fault code that can be referenced below Description Control power was lost or dipped below the lower threshold long enough to cause the Internal Comm fault Recommended Action Check that control power is turned on and within specified tolerances Check the Control Power fuse replace if necessary Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once control power is restored 14 Control Power Fuse The control power fuse has blown and the control power circuit no longer is a closed circuit Additional investigation as to why the fuse blew is needed Take corrective action accordingly Replace the fuse and reset the ArmorStart either locally or over the network 21 A3 Power Loss Unswitched A3 A2 control power was lost or dipped below the lower threshold long enough to cause the Internal Comm fault e DeviceNet power loss Check that the A3 or DNet power terminal does not have any loose connections Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once the unswitched control power is restored 22 Internal Comm 24 Power Loss 3 Phase 25 Under Voltage 3 Phase The ArmorStart s MCB lost communications with the VFD This is most likely due to a loss of 3 phase power PF Fault Code 3 or 4 Chec
174. ample as shown in Requirement Three a lower value may be necessary to protect the motor controller within its ratings because its specified maximum protection is less than the rating that Table 51 permits for the smallest circuit conductor Another reason to use a lower rating of fuse is to provide more conservative conductor and controller protection However in all cases it is important to ensure the ampere rating is sufficient to start and operate the motors without nuisance opening of the fuse s Supplementary Note 2 The note at b points to the conductor on the output of the 0 5 Hp Bulletin 294E controller to emphasize that the smallest conductor in the circuit includes the conductors between each controller and motor This includes the output of the variable frequency AC drive based Bulletin 294E controllers even though these drives have electronic short circuit protection According to NFPA 79 the fuse and not the drive s electronic short circuit protection provides the short circuit fault and ground fault protection for these output conductors Supplementary Note 3 Generally connecting a smaller conductor to a larger conductor requires the installation of fuses at the connection This connection may be made without this fuse in some cases by using a tap rule that indirectly protects the smaller conductor by limiting two things the ratio of the ampacity of the larger conductor to the ampacity of the smaller conductor and the max
175. amps for full motor flux EM Brk OFF Delay Sets the time that the drive will remain at minimum frequency before ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to Option 8 or 9 Parameter Number 228 Related Parameters 227 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1V AC Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 230 Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 229 Related Parameter 227 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 01A Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Motor NP Volts Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 260 Related Parameters 134 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 01 sec Minimum Value 0 01 sec Maximum Value 10 sec Default Value 0 0 sec Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Figure 82 EM Brk OFF Delay Frequency 260 EM Brk Off Delay gt 261 EM Brk On Delay i i we i i WS gt Minimum Freq gt ane SS SS Se oS Se yN yN Time a YN y N Start EM Brk Stop EM Brk Drive Stops Commanded Energized Off Commanded De Energized On EM Brk On Delay Parameter Number 261 Sets the time that t
176. and outputs that are connected to the ArmorStart unit product port This may cause an unsafe state to occur in the ArmorStart or the WARNING A Type 1 Reset cannot be done if there is an 1 0 device plugged into the A environment around the ArmorStart Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 221 Chapter9 Diagnostics 5 Create a new Controller Tag of data type DINT and enter a value of 1 a Double click Controller Tags in the Controller Organizer Controller Organizer E Controller Fault_Reset Controller Tags Aea E3 Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler 3 8 Tasks b Select Edit Tags at the bottom of the tag list screen 4 gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags c Create another new tag the example that is used below is named Datal _ J Datat DINT Read Write TF Decimal d To assign Datal a value of 1 click Monitor Tags tab and enter a 1 in the Value field Fe Decimal Dnt l E e Create a tag for reset input 1 Double click Program Tags in the Controller Organizer E ea MainProgram Program Tags gt a ER MainRoutine 3 Unscheduled Programs Phases H E Motion Groups 2 Select Edit Tags at the bottom of the screen and create a tag named Reset of the type BOOL Boolean Reset BOOL Read Write O Decimal 6 Create a rung in ladder logic for executing the Type 1 Reset a Add an XIC Input and assign it the BOOL
177. and until the motion disable is off Net Input 2 gt aA Motion Dissble i RO i read E Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs You can also visit our Support Center at https rockwellautomation custhelp com for software updates support chats and forums technical information FAQs and to sign up for product notification updates In addition we offer multiple support programs for installation configuration and troubleshooting For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com services online phone Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support overview page or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Roc
178. ard 1 Drivelnput4 Drivelnput3 Drivelnput2 Drivelnput1 DecelCtrl_1 DecelCtrl_0 AccelCtrl_1 AccelCtrl_0 2 FreqCommand Low xxx x Hz 3 FreqCommand High xxx x Hz 4 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 5 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt9Deviceln Pt8Deviceln Table 10 Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly Command Tags Controller Output Command Tags Controller Name Logix Tag Name AS_ DEMO RunForward AS_DEMO 0 RunForward AS_ DEMO RunReverse AS_DEMO 0 RunReverse AS_ DEMO ResetFault AS_DEMO 0 ResetFault AS_ DEMO JogForward AS_DEMO 0 JogForward AS_ DEMO JogReverse AS_DEMO 0 JogReverse AS_DEMO OutA AS_DEMO 0 0utA AS_DEMO OutB AS_DEMO 0 0utB AS_ DEMO AccelCtrl_0 AS_DEMO 0 AccelCtrl_0 AS_ DEMO AccelCtrl_1 AS_DEMO 0 AccelCtrl_1 AS_ DEMO DecelCtrl_0 AS_DEMO 0 DecelCtrl_0 AS_ DEMO DecelCtrl_1 AS_DEMO 0 DecelCtrl_1 AS_ DEMO Drivelnput1 AS_DEMO 0 Drivelnput1 AS_ DEMO Drivelnput2 AS_DEMO 0 Drivelnput2 AS_ DEMO Drivelnput3 AS_DEMO 0 Drivelnput3 AS_ DEMO Drivelnput4 AS_DEMO 0 Drivelnput4 AS_ DEMO FreqCommand AS_DEMO 0 FreqCommand AS_ DEMO Pt00Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt00Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt01Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt01Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt02Deviceln AS_DEMO 0 Pt02Deviceln AS_ DEMO Pt03Deviceln AS_DEM
179. are connected to earth with separate copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge Most equipment has specific provisions to connect a safety ground or PE protective earth directly to it Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 49 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Shield and Grounding of Motors and Motor Cables 50 Grounding PE or Ground The safety ground PE must be connected to earth ground This point must be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist a floor ground rod bus bar or building ground grid Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes Some codes may require redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity IMPORTANT To avoid electrolytic corrosion on the external earth terminal avoid spraying moisture directly on the terminal When used in washdown environments apply a sealant or other corrosion inhibitor on the external ground terminal to minimize any negative effects of galvanic or electro chemical corrosion Ground connections should be inspected regularly The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the PE connection with a separate ground conductor It is recommended that each motor frame be grounded to building steel at the motor Motor Cable Considerations Most recommendations regarding motor cable address issues are caused by the nature of the drive output
180. are used to control the motor These drives use a power conversion method that generates input currents that are larger than the output currents The input currents are larger because unlike the output currents to the motor they are not sinusoidal Consequently when determining the minimum ampacity of the input conductors the requirement of 12 5 3 must be based on the rated input current of the controller rather than the full load current rating of the motor Therefore the minimum ampacity of the input conductors must be 125 of the controller rated input current while that of the output conductors must be 125 of the motor full load current rating Referring to Figure 110 the 1 Hp Bulletin 294E controller has a rated input current of 3 0 A Using the rated input current the conductors from the combined load conductors to the controllers must have an ampacity of 125 of 3 0 A or 3 75 A The output conductors must have an ampacity of 125 of 2 1 A or 2 6 A The requirement for the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is given by 12 5 4 When the combined load conductors supply one or more Bulletin 294E controllers the minimum ampacity calculation of 12 5 4 must be made by substituting the rated input current of the Bulletin 294E controllers for the full load current rating of the motors that these controllers supply In Figure 110 the currents I1 I2 I3 14 and I5 are the input currents to each controller I3 and I4 are the f
181. as blown Remove power and replace fuse 15 Input Short Flags a shorted sensor input device or input wiring mistake 16 Output Fuse The Output Fuse has blown Remove all power and replace the fuse 17 Over Temp Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded 18 Fault 18 19 Phase Imbalance Indicates an imbalanced supply voltage 20 Fault 20 21 A3 Power Loss Unswitched A3 Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold 22 Internal Comm Communication with an internal component has been lost 23 Fault 23 24 Fault 24 25 Fault 25 26 Fault 26 27 MCB EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable 28 Base EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable 29 Fault 29 322 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Table 52 Bulletin 280E 281E CIP Information Appendix B Fault Code Fault Text Help Text 30 Wrong Base The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type 31 Wrong CTs This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable 32 Fault 32 33 Fault 33 34 Fault 34 35 Fault 35 36 Fault 36 37 Fault 37 38 Fault 38 39 Fault 39 40 Unknown Fault 4 Fault 41 42 Fault 42 43 Fault 43 44 Fault 44 45 Fault 45 The table below lists Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for VFD
182. as chosen as the tradeoff between the maximum number and type of controllers in the branch circuit limited by the maximum fuse rating and the electrical and mechanical robustness engineered into each controller Therefore to make its use in the multiple motor branch circuit of Figure 106 practical the 0 5 Hp Bulletin 294 controller was engineered to be robust enough to safely contain the damage when protected by a fuse having a rating of 45 A rather than just 6 A Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 Figure 107 UL508C Variable Frequency AC Drive Motor Controller Evaluation Short Circuit Test Circuit Short Circuit Test Circuit UL 508C Manufacturer s choice test with6 4 r Reduce rating fortest ampere max to45A Maximum i i i 1 7 I I conductor size I I I I I i sees Z l r J MG VHP Motor Max 400 Rated Output Current Max rating for 10 AWG 1D buletin294 i Controller 400 15A 6A 250A i f 2HP Motor l f i l Controller H l Max permitted rating f Suitable for I Max permitted _ fortestfusebased y motor group rating fortest 1 T onmaximumsize 4 instalation l aed Jf fuse based on of power conductors f RatedOuput
183. ated amps x 2 Default Value Based on Drive Rating Minimum Freq Parameter Number 134 Sets the lowest frequency that the drive Related Parameter 101 102 oe ee 187 will output continuously Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 0 0 Maximum Freq Parameter Number 135 Related Parameter 101 102 113 134 135 178 Stop drive before changing this 185 187 parameter Access Rule GET SET Sets the highest frequency that the drive will output continuously Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 60 0 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Stop Mode Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart are the following 0 Ramp CF Ramp to Stop Stop command clears active fault 1 Coast CF Coast to Stop Stop command clears active fault 2 DC Brake CF DC Injection Braking Stop Stop command clears active fault 3 DCBrkAuto CF DC injection Braking with Auto Shutoff Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 DC Brake Time or Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped Stop command clears active fault 4 Ramp Ramp to Stop 5 Coast Coast to Stop 6 DC Brake DC Injection Braking Stop 7 DC BrakeAuto DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 DC Brake Time or
184. ates that the drive is ready for operation Relay returns drive to shelf state when 0 Ready Fault Default power is removed or a fault occurs 1 At Frequency Drive reached commanded frequency 6 Above Freq Drive exceeds the frequency Hz value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set threshold 7 Above Cur Drive exceeds the current Amps value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set threshold 20 ParamControl Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 156 Relay Out Level 0 OFF 1 ON 22 EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized Program Parameter 260 EM Brk OFF Delay and Parameter 261 EM Brk On Delay for desired action The customer is responsible to make sure the brake release function operates properly and safely Relay Out Level Parameter Number 156 Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 155 Relay Out Sel is 6 7 8 10 16 17 18 or 20 Related Parameters 155 Parameters 155 Setting Parameter 156 Min Max Access Rule GET SET 6 0 400 Hz Data Type UINT 7 0 180 8 0 815V Group Drive Advanced Setup 10 0 100 Units 0 1 16 0 1 9999 sec 17 1 9999 counts Minimum Value 0 0 18 1 180 Maximum Value 9999 20 0 1 Default Value 0 0 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chap
185. ation The previous values are only examples of reserved values Each node on the same physical network must have an IP address of the same class and must have the same net ID Each node on the same network must have a different Host ID thus giving it a unique IP address Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 77 Chapter4 Product Commissioning Configuring EtherNet IP Address 78 Gateway Address A gateway connects individual physical networks into a system of networks When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network a gateway transfers the data between the two networks This field is set to 0 0 0 0 by default Subnet Mask Subnet addressing is an extension of the IP address scheme that allows a site to use a single network ID for multiple physical networks Routing outside of the site continues by dividing the IP address into a net ID and a host ID via the class Inside a site the subnet mask is used to redivide the IP address into a custom network ID portion and host ID portion This field is set to 0 0 0 0 by default If you change the subnet mask of an already configured module you must cycle power to the module for the change to take effect Before using the ArmorStart you may need to configure an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address The rotary network address switches found on the I O section of the ArmorStart are set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory defa
186. ation Appendix B Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010 The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT Revision The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances MttributelD AccessRule Name Daa ye o vwe ooo a ee sGroupNameString sons 2 Get Number of Members UINT 3 Get 1st Parameter UINT 4 Get 2nd Parameter UINT n Get Nth Parameter UINT The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Group Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 313 AppendixB CIP Information Discrete Input Group Object CLASS CODE 0x001D No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DIP Instances 6 Get Set Off_On_Delay UINT 7 Get Set Off_On_Delay UINT The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group Object Implemented for Discrete Output Group Object Service Code Class I
187. atus 129 Torque Current 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 ArmorStart EtherNet IP Parameters Bulletin 280E 281E Introduction This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function Parameter Programming Each Distributed Motor Controller type has a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type Parameters 1 100 are common to all ArmorStart devices IMPORTANT Parameter setting changes take effect immediately unless otherwise noted in the parameter listing These changes maybe immediate even during the running status Basic Status Group Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 1 This parameter provides status of Access Rule a hardware inputs Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 15 Default Value 0 Bit Function 3 1 Ind X In In2 X In3 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 129 Chapter7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters This parameter provides status of network Deviceln Data device inputs Bit Parameter Number 2 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Function
188. ble 1 Enable Keypad Mode This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary 0 Maintained 1 Momentary Keypad Disable This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons 0 Not Disabled 1 Disabled Set to Defaults This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults but will not cause the ArmorStart to reboot 0 No Operation 1 Set to Defaults Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Parameter Number 9 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 45 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 46 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Setto Defaults ParmeterNumber svo o Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 167 Chapter 7 168 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Drive 1 0 Configuration Group Bulletin 284E only
189. c teen dar eesi iena a r Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Table of Contents Specifications for EtherNet IP Accessories DB1 Undercurrent Patt tect teete eisai ti NS 233 TBO witeh Panes ass cxk st aacosce cacti oe dete A Lares 234 PB Open Fated Ate ied actos ee a ae ies 234 DBI VBus binke Fault sci veteces Bot hak baSueuscacaes 234 TB ly Comin Fault eso oss yn 2S oar an ced ida ies cena 235 DB1 Thermal Warnings Ce vcciasai etude se eeescua ents 235 Reading the Control Supervisor Object 00 000s 235 Hardware Fault Fan RPM Warning 0 0 c ee ee ee eee ee 235 FAN Fault Handling with Firmware 66 21 of 284 235 Operans Cee re cts its Loe aN lala le Mate de ees lol 235 Starter Status Warning Bit Sisscarcrsios weer ves xexeuees 236 Warning Status Parameter G2ii12 3 25saneqceiuihs Sune vgedetrsrs 236 Annunciation using PLC Logic i 2425 oii Gay eater Rh 236 Internal Drive Paulise sce cot ice terete teers ieee wen tedas 237 Ethernet Statistics ss nu hes coco bated eax a dee es eRe Rae 241 Troubleshoot and General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 241 Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network 242 Troubleshoot Intermittent Ethernet Connectivity 245 Ethernet Statistics nsir eeann cdc enh aac earns 247 Etherner Managed Switch Considerations 0000 00 0 249 Internet Group Multicast Protocol j 2s4s baesdewent er
190. cation 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 ProducedWord3Param DEMO_REV ProducedWord3Param Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Table 19 Bulletin 280E 281E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation Controller Output Command Tags Tag Description Use RunForward Command VFD forward RunReverse Command VFD reverse ResetFault Fault reset OutA OutputA OutB OutputB Pt0ODeviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt01Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt02Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt03Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt04Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt05Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt06Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt07Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt08Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt09Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt10Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt11Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt12Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt13Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt14Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt15Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 119 Chapter5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Table 20 Bulletin 280E 281E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation
191. ccurrence When set to 0 Output B opens or closes as determined by Minimum Value 0 setting in Parameter 42 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutB Net FitValue Parameter Number 42 This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET SET Output B assumes when a network fault Data T BOOL occurs and Parameter 41 OutB Net ata ype FltState is set to 0 Group User 1 0 Config 0 Open 1 Close Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 144 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 OutB Net IdIState This parameter along with Parameter 44 OutB Net IdlValue defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle 0 Goto PrFit Value 1 Ignore PrFit When set to 0 Output B opens or closes as determined by the setting in Parameter 44 OutB Net IdlValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43 OutB Net IdIState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Configuration Group Network Override This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault 0 Disable 1 Enable Comm Override This parameter allows for local logic to override the absence of an 1 0 connection 0 Dis
192. ce it uses the configuration you assigned and does not issue a DHCP request To enable DHCP for a device with DHCP disabled highlight the device in the Relation List and click the Enable DHCP button You must have an entry for the device in the Relation List panel to re enable DHCP Figure 62 Enable DHCP Button qj BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 C Documents and Settings tiggs Desktop Bootp Servertc E alx Fie Tools Help m Request History Clear History Add to Relation List _ hr min sec Type Cthemet Address MAC _IF Address Hostname 12 47 24 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 10 88 70 2 12 47 24 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 m Relation List Ne W Delete Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable BOOTP DHCP Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Commissioning Save the Relation List Chapter 4 You can save the Relation List to use later To save the Relation List perform the following steps 1 Select Save As from the File menu Figure 63 Save the Relation List fq BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 C Documents and Settings tigas Desktop Bootm control s ioj x File Tools Help New Open Add ta Relation ist Type Ethernet Address MAC IP Address DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 10 88 70 2 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 m Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable BOOTP DHCP Etheme
193. ce Connections The device supports both scheduled Class 1 and unscheduled Class 3 amp UCMM CIP connections A maximum of two Class 1 CIP connections one exclusive owner and one listen only are supported one per PLC Six Class 3 CIP connections are supported 90 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Commissioning Chapter 4 Ownership Ownership Type Owner controller In a Studio 5000 system modules multicast data Therefore multiple modules can receive the same data simultaneously from a single module When choosing a communication format decide whether to establish an owner controller or listen only relationship with the module Table 6 Communication Relationship Description The controller that creates the primary configuration and communication connection to a module The owner controller writes configuration data and can establish a connection to the module New Module 1756 1B16 16 Point 10 31 2 DC Inpi Type Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name Description An owner connection is any connection that does not include Listen Only in its Comm Format Listen only connection An 1 0 connection where another controller owns provides the configuration data for the 1 0 module A controller using a listen only connection monitors only the module It does not write configuration data and can only maintain a connection to the 1 0 module wh
194. ceLogix configuration Major Minor could result in unexpected equipment operation re ee Enable DeviceLogix logic in the connected Yes No ArmorStart After the DeviceLogix correlation is successful the following window is displayed RSLogix 5000 F x i The DeviceLogix program downloaded successfully to the connected ArmorStart After both correlations are complete place the PLC in run mode and test the program by exercising speed 1 2 and 3 bits IMPORTANT To download anew DeviceLogix program connect to the PLC and stay in program mode There can be no active 1 0 connections to the device or the download fails Open the AOP and select the DeviceLogix tab to start the correlation process If a difference exists then an upload or download is necessary Operation When bit Speed_1 is ON then the Bulletin 284E accelerates to 10 Hz or decelerate using accel decel Time 2 When bit Speed_2 is ON then the Bulletin 284E accelerates to 30 Hz or decelerate using accel decel Time 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 357 AppendixF Application Examples Device Logix Ladder Editor ArmorStart EtherNet IP supports DeviceLogix in a ladder programming Exampl e environment When using the ladder editor additional explanation is needed with regard to naming conventions Fault bits such as Overload Trip are tagged FBO FB1 FB2 etc Status bits such as Running Fwd are ta
195. cedure e Set Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode to Option 0 V Hz Table 43 Motor Operation is Unstable Cause s Corrective Action Motor data was incorrectly 1 Correctly enter motor nameplate data into Parameters 131 132 and 133 entered 2 Enable Parameter 197 Compensation 3 Use Parameter 184 Boost Select to reduce boost level Table 44 Drive Does Not Reverse Motor Direction Cause s Indication Corrective Action Digital input is not selected for None Check Parameters 151 154 Digital In x Sel Choose correct input and program for reversing reversing control mode Motor wiring is improperly None Switch two motor leads phased for reverse Reverse is disabled None Check Parameter 195 Reverse Disable Table 45 Drive Does Not Power Up Cause s Indication Corrective Action No input power to drive None Check the power circuit Check the supply voltage e Check all fuses and disconnects Jumper between 1 0 Terminals P2 None Install jumper or connect DC Bus Inductor and P1 not installed and or DC Bus Inductor not connected 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Ethernet Statistics The EtherNet IP communication module may experience intermittent network connectivity due to these conditions e Duplex mismatch e Electrical noise that is induced into a cable or resulting from a Logix switch ground potential difference
196. cess Rule GET SET program a time duration before an input is Data T UINT reported OFF Anti bounce 3a Ipe Group User 1 0 Config Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 Default Value 0 In Sink Source Parameter Number 32 This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET SET program the inputs to be sink or source Data T BOOL 0 Sink AS 1 Source Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA Pr FitState Parameter Number 33 This parameter along with Parameter 34 Access Rule GET SET OutA Pr FitValue defines how Output A will respond when a protection trip occurs Data Type BOOL 0 Goto Pr FitValue 1 Ignore Pr Fit Group User 1 0 Config When set to 1 Output A continues to Uni i nits operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output A opens or closes ini as determined by setting in Parameter 34 Minimum Value Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA Pr FitValue Parameter Number 34 This parameter determines the state the Access Rule GET SET Output A assumes when a trip occurs and Data T BOOL Parameter 33 OutA Pr FitState is set to ata ype o Group User 1 0 Config 0 Open 1 Close Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 142 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 OutA Net FitState This parameter along with Parameter
197. ckwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 255 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP UL NEMA IEC Operating Temperature Range 20 40 C 4 104 F oe and Transportation 25 85 C 13 185 F emperature Range Altitude 2000 m Environmental Humidity 5 95 on condensing Pollution Degree 3 Enclosure Ratings NEMA 4 12 IP67 Approximate Shipping Weight 10 4 kg 23 Ibs Resistance to Shock Operational 15G Non Operational 30G Resistance to Vibration Operational 1G 0 15 mm 0 006 in Displacement Non Operational 2 5 G 0 38 mm 0 015 in Displacement Power and Ground Terminals Wire Size Primary Secondary Terminal 16 10 AWG Primary Secondary Terminal 1 0 4 0 mm2 Mechanical i Primary Terminal 10 8 Ib in Primary Terminal 1 2 N m Tightening Torque Secondary Terminal 4 5 lb in Secondary Terminal 0 5 N m Wire Strip Length 0 35 in 9 mm Control Terminals Wire Size 18 10 AWG 1 0 4 0mm2 Tightening Torque 6 2 Ib in 0 7N m Wire Strip Length 0 35 in 9 mm Disconnect Lock Out Recommend 8 mm 5 16 in lock shackle or hasp The hasp should not exceed 8 mm 5 16 in when closed CatNo 100 Ops C12 AC3 C23 AC3 Contactor Mechanical Life 280 1_ _12 Mil 13 280 1_ _23 Mil 13 EMC Emission Levels Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions 10V rms Com
198. code should generate a Get Single explicit message of Class 0x0098 Instance 1 and Attribute 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 This message returns a structure of the following data Alarm Code UINT lt Alarm Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT Device Object Instance USINT Alarm Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULINT Timer Descriptor WORD When Alarm Code UINT 31 decimal this isa FAN RPM warning For a full list of fault code references see parameter 61 When the fault occurs the following Trip bits are activated e Parameter 4 Trip Status bit 13 turns to a 1 indicating a hardware trip has occurred e Parameter 5 Starter Status bit 0 turns to a 1 indicating a TripPresent e Parameter 61 displays Fan RPM Fault 31 as the last protection fault Internal Drive Faults A fault is a condition that stops the drive There are two fault types Table 38 Internal Drive Faults Type Name Description 1 Auto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries and related Parameter s 155 Relay Out Sel 193 Auto Rstrt Delay are set to a value greater than 0 a user configurable timer Parameter 193 Auto Rstrt Delay and related Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries begins When the timer reaches zero the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault
199. cription A Cc 0 24 1 2A 0 5 2 5A Enclosure Type 1 1 5 5 A Lenea IP67 UL Type 4 12 d Control and 3 Phase Power Connections Motor Cable Connection i CR Conduit Round Media or RR Round Round Media or DR D Round Media Contactor Size Control Voltage E Description 24V DC Control Power 3 Phase Power Motor Cable R 3 m unshielded cordset 23Z Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance male 90 Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance P P A 3 3 m unshielded cordset bian Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain No cable Round Media Male Round Media Male 3 m unshielded cordset Receptacle Receptacle male 90 w Round Media Male Round Media Male No cable Receptacle Receptacle Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 17 Chapter 1 Product Overview Bulletin Number VFD Starter Communications EtherNet IP Enclosure Type Type 4 IP67 Operation 18 Torque Performance Mode Sensorless Vector Control e Output Current Figure 2 Catalog Number Explanation for 284E 284 E F V D2P3 D 10 CR Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 and Volts per Hertz 380 480V Description 1 4A 0 4 kW 0 5 Hp 10 Control Voltage 24V DC g Short Circuit Protection Motor Circuit Protector 10 A Rated Device 25 2 3 A 0 75 kW 1 0 Hp 4 0 A 1 5 kW 2 0 Hp 6 0 A 2 2 kW 3 0 Hp
200. ctors and NPT PG adapters from LAPPUSA are good examples of this type of shield terminating gland Figure 28 Terminating the Shield with a Connector Braid wires pulled back in a 360 pattern ane conar via around the ground cone of the connector the braid wires ut OJE Ground Bushing V T2 B W T3 O S PE IEF One or More Q IE Ground Leads m Y Metal locknut bonds the Drain wires pulled back in a 360 pattern connector to the panel around the ground cone of the connector ArmorConnect Power Media 52 ATTENTION Shielded connector or motor cable is mandatory for CE compliant installations Description Details of ArmorConnect Power Media are described in Publication 280PWR SG001 ArmorConnect Power and Control Media The ArmorConnect power media offers both three phase and control power cable cord set systems including patchcords receptacles tees reducers and accessories to be used with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller These cable system components allow quick connection of ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers reducing installation time They provide for repeatable consistent connection of the three phase and control power to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller and motor by providing a plug and play environment that also avoids system mis wiring IMPORTANT ArmorConnect connections should be made hand tight Se
201. d 13 Control Power Loss 14 Control Power Fuse 15 1 0 Short 16 Output Fuse 17 Overtemp 18 Reserved 19 Phase Imbalance 20 Reserved 21 A3 Power Loss 22 Internal Comm 23 26 Reserved 27 MCB EEPROM 28 Base EEPROM 29 Reserved 30 Wrong Base 31 Wrong CTs 32 100 Reserved Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 60 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 66535 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 61 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Warning Status This parameter warns the user of a condition without faulting Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Warnings are always enabled The warning conditions are reported even if the corresponding fault conditions are disabled Warning bits in the Warning Status parameter are cleared automatically when the warning condition is no longer present
202. d Setup frequency setting 192 Auto Rstrt Tries Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault 0 Drive Advanced Setup and restart 193 Auto Rstrt Delay Kee ee Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt 1 0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup Enables disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to 194 Start At PowerUp automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed 0 Disabled Drive Advanced Setup after the drive input is restored 195 Reverse Disable Enables disables the function that allows the direction of the motor O Disabled Drive Advanced Setup rotation to be changed 196 Flying Start En ek that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor 0 Disabled Drive Advanced Setup 197 Compensation A correction options that may improve problems with 1 Electrical Drive Advanced Setup 198 SW Current Trip Enables disables a software instantaneous within 100 ms current trip 0 0 Disabled Drive Advanced Setup 199 Processador Scales the output frequency value that is displayed by Parameter 110 30 0 Drive Advanced Setup Process Display 200 Fault Clear Resets a fault and clears the fault queue 0 Ready Idle Drive Advanced Setup 201 Program Lock Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel 0 Unlocked Drive Advanced Setup Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 205 Chapter 7 Parameter Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Table 29 Bulletin 284
203. d Tr anemii Late Collisions Excessive Collisions MAC Transmit Errors Carrier Sense Errors Frame Too Long MAC Receive Errors Struct of 6 Get Set Interface Control Control Bits Forced Interface Speed 7 Get Interface Type USINT 8 Get Interface State USINT 9 Get Set Admin State USINT 10 Get Interface Label SHORT_STRING stance 1 Port Instance 2 Port 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 329 Appendix B 330 CIP Information The following common services are implemented for the Ethernet Link Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Appendix C Using DeviceLogix DeviceLogix is a stand alone Boolean program that resides within the ArmorStart controller The program is embedded in the product software so that there is no additional module that is required to use this technology To program DeviceLogix you need the latest AOP for ArmorStart EtherNet IP for ControlLogix or other Logix family PLCs EE Module Properties SLogix_Ethernet 284E FVD1P4 1 1 E jol x General Connection Module Info Parameter Devices Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Type 284E FYD1P4 ArmorStart VFD 480V AC 0 5HP Vendor Allen Bradley Par
204. ddress DHCP enabled by default Ethernet Port DHCP Timeout 30s Communication Rate 10 100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex Transported over both TCP and UDP Data Min of 5001 0 packets second pps e Supports up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets Embedded web server Security Login and password configurable Web Server z E mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Configuration Status diagnostics and configuration tabs Supports scheduled Class 1 and unscheduled Class 3 amp UCMM connections 6 Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections Exclusive owner data or listen only One connection per PLC Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established Device Connections 258 Class 1 Connection API 2 3200 ms Class 3 Connection API 100 10 000 ms 20 ms Request Packet Interval RPI default 3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Chapter 11 Motor Overload Trip Curves Motor overload current parameter provides class 10 15 and 20 overload protection Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload Figure 101 Bulletin 280E 281E Overload Trip Curves Approximate Trip Time sec 10000 1000 QO
205. detected Default 0 RemoteMAC Array of 6 MAC address of a remote node from the ARP DPU in which a USINT conflict was detected Default 0 AroPdu Array of 28 Copy of raw ARP DPU in which a conflict was detected j USINT Default 0 The following common services are implemented for the TCP IP Interface Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 328 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Ethernet Link Object CLASS CODE 0x00F6 The following class attributes are supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 3 2 Get Max Instance UINT 2 3 Get Number of Instances UINT 2 One instance of the Ethernet Link Object are supported with the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT 10 or 100 Mbit Sec 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD See ENet IP Spec 3 Get Physical Address ARRAY of 6 USINTs MAC Address Struct of In Octets In Ucast packets In NUcast packets In Discards In Errors 4 Get Interface Counters In Unknown Protos Out Octets Out Ucast packets Out NUcast packets Out Discards Out Errors Struct of Alignment Errors FCS Errors Single Collisions SQE Test Errors 5 Get Media Counters Deferre
206. e See publication 280PWR SGO001 for ordering details The following shows example configurations for power control and communication media Figure 29 Cable System Overview Motor Branch Power Supply Circuit 24VDC Protection Bul 1606 280E or 281E Ethernet CATSe Bulkhead Connector and Receptacle Example Cat No 1585A DD4JD CATSe Patchcord IP67 M12 D Code Male Straight Male Right Angle Example Cat No 1585D M4TBDE CATS5Se Patch Cable IP20 RJ45 Male to RJ45 Male Example Cat No 1585J M4TB O Three Phase Power Receptacles Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads Example Cat No 280 M35F M1 OThree Phase Power Trunk Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Cat No 280 PWR35A M Three Phase Drop Cable Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Cat No 280 PWR22A M 16AWG or Cat No 280 PWR24A M 14AWG Three Phase Power Tee connects to a single M35 drop line to trunk connectors Cat No 280 T35 or Tee connects to a M22 drop Cat No 280 RT35 Control Power Receptacles Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads Cat No 888N D65AF1 Control Power Media Patchcords Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Cat No 889N F65GFNM Control Power Tees The E stop In Tee Cat No 898N
207. e X10 x1 0 0 0 N 1 N 4 N 1 IP address set to 163 8 2 8 2 8 2 for IP Address 192 168 1 163 2 2 x a 6 i 4 2 4 6 i 4 Valid IP address switch settings range from 001 to 254 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapter s IP address will be 192 168 1 xxx where xxx represents the number set on the switches see Figure 57 The adapter s subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 and the gateway address is set to 0 0 0 0 A power cycle is required for any new IP address to take effect Note The upper three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded webserver must be used to configure the IP address to a value other than 192 168 1 xx If the switches are set to an invalid number such as 000 or a value greater than 254 the adapter will check to see if DHCP is enabled If DHCP is enabled the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address along with other TCP configurable parameters stored in non volatile memory IMPORTANT See Figure 58 The ArmorStart is shipped with the control module rotary switches set to a value of 99 DO NOT modify this setting If these are changed and the unit stops responding the switches will need to be manually set to node address 63 and power cycled Figure 58 Rotary Switch on Control Module Factory Sett
208. e U to Gnd PF Fault Code 38 6 Phase V to Gnd PF Fault Code 39 7 Phase W to Gnd PF Fault Code 40 8 Phase UV Short PF4 Fault Code 41 9 Phase UW Short PF Fault Code 42 10 Phase VW Short PF Fault Code 43 11 Ground Fault PF Fault Code 13 12 Stall PF Fault Code 6 13 Control Pwr Loss 14 Control Pwr Fuse 15 Input Short 16 Output Fuse 17 Over Temp 18 Heatsink OvrTmp PF Fault Code 8 19 HW OverCurrent PF Fault Code 12 20 SW OverCurrent PF Fault Code 63 21 A3 Power Loss 22 Internal Comm 23 Drive Comm Loss PF Fault Code 81 24 Power Loss PF Fault Code 3 25 Under Voltage PF Fault Code 4 26 Over Voltage PF Fault Code 5 27 MCB EEPROM 28 Base EEPROM 29 Drive EEPROM PF Fault Code 100 30 Wrong Base 31 Fan RPM 32 Power Unit PF Fault Code 70 33 Drive 1 0 Brd PF Fault Code 122 34 Restart Retries PF Fault Code 33 35 Drive Aux In Fit PF Fault Code 2 36 Analog Input PF Fault Code 29 37 Drv Param Reset PF Fault Code 48 38 SCV Autotune PF Fault Code 80 39 Source Brake 40 Reserved 41 DB1 Comm 42 DB1 Fault 43 DB Switch Short 45 Incompatible Drive Firmware Warning Status This parameter warns the user of a condition without faulting Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 61 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Stat
209. e firmware revision of your Logix controller and switch or converter are identical 3 If the revisions are not identical replace the controller switch or converter so that they match Single Collisions or Multiple Collisions are greater No action is required than zero Important If two stations attempt to transmit data simultaneously the packets collide with each other However collisions are not errors and do not indicate a network problem The number of network collisions can vary greatly due to traffic patterns or CPU utilization Consequently there is no set range of acceptable collisions for each outgoing packet Collisions are a normal aspect of Ethernet networking Late Collisions are greater than zero 1 Check to see if a network segment is too long 2 Remove repeaters from between devices Excessive Collisions are greater than zero Calculate your network s typical rate of excessive collisions and decide whether the rate of packet loss will affect your network s performance Important Excessive collisions indicate that your network has become congested For each collision after the sixteenth your network drops a packet MAC Transit Errors are greater than zero No action is required Frame Too Long is greater than zero Limit the size of your tags to lt 500 bytes 248 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Ethernet Mana ged Switch To help troublesho
210. e ies 249 Virtual Local Area Networks cccccecescucccucesueees 250 Port Mirroring e ea uae steer T E O A E eked 251 Control Module Removal and Installation 0 0000 eae 252 Removal of Control Module ccccccececeeeeencece 252 Installation of Control Module 00 c cece cece eens 252 Fuse Replacement obey vic as sete ok ol el ceeds te Coe ot 253 Resetting Source Brake Fuse Faults sagas babvcauas guna sax enaa 254 Chapter 11 Bulletin 280E OSU el U kh eal te uo ada e cheat BM Me tied 255 Motor Overload Trip Curves 2s c0224 hcte a bbe de eeautene tat 259 Contactor Life Load Cutvess 5 S525 fates vacated ae Rhein 260 EATA bape tae ath aera Sioa oleae tepasee stick ona Grae areas hay 264 Sensorless Vector Control SVC ecccceceecnceeences 267 Motor Overload Trip Curves 45s ose y4sGte eee aes 268 Altitude Der ting fais bia i rena acne OEA 270 Altitude Rating for 280 28 tucie take ue e iN ea da oe bays beh al 270 Altitude Rating for 284 sccsassin oseeonawesabeoeers eens bareates 270 Chapter 12 Industrial Ethernet Medias cosi nunc kot ey chokes Counties eee date 271 D Code Connectivity M12 1585D s2suschasdensnantanenes 271 SO D L E REEE EEE E E EE 273 Sensor Wiring sito sco A N A A E E 273 Motor and Brake Cables icc i sahevcsnaathvieis eu dtiastasetaawters 273 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Bra
211. e of the Fault LED indications for Bulletin 280E 281E and Bulletin 284E Distributed Motor Controllers Table 30 Fault Indication Blink Pattern aml La Bulletin 280E 281E Bulletin 284E 1 Short Circuit Short Circuit 2 Overload Trip Overload Trip 3 Phase Loss Phase Short 4 Reserved Ground Fault 5 Reserved Stall 6 Control Power Control Power 7 1 0 Fault 1 0 Fault 8 Over Temperature Over Temperature 9 Phase Imbalance Over Current 10 A3 Power Loss A3 Power Loss 11 Reserved Internal Communications 12 Reserved DC Bus Fault 13 EEPROM Fault EEPROM Fault 14 Hardware Fault Hardware Fault 15 Reserved Restart Retries 16 Reserved Misc Fault Short Circuit Short Circuit indicates that the Bulletin 140M motor protector has tripped or that the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current surge This fault cannot be disabled Overload Trip The load has drawn excessive current and based on the overload trip class that is selected the device has tripped This fault cannot be disabled When using Bulletin 280 281 with a mechanical motor brake actuator connected to motor out leads care must be taken with 1 Hp 0 73 kW or smaller loads as the current is elevated in those legs that influence the electronic overload and may cause nuisance phase imbalance or overload faults An adjustment to the full load amps FLA setting to offset this additional current may
212. e that Drive Digital Inputs 54 Drvin Net FitValue 1 4 assume when the network is idle and Parameter 53 0 OFF Drive 1 0 Configuration 284E Drvin Net FitState is set to 0 56 Base Enclosure Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating 1 Basic Status Common 57 Base Options Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit 0 Basic Status Common 58 Wiring Options This parameter provides the Wiring Options 0 Basic Status Common 59 Starter Enclosure This parameter provides the Starter Enclosure 1 Basic Status Common 60 Starter Options This parameter provides the Starter Options 0 Basic Status Common 61 Last PR Fault This parameter provides the Last PR Fault 0 None Basic Status Common 62 Warning Status This parameter provides the Warning Status 0 Basic Status Common 63 Base Trip This parameter provides the Base Module Trip Status 0 Basic Status Common 101 Phase A Current This parameter provides the current of Phase A 0 Starter Display DOL 102 Phase B Current This parameter provides the current of Phase B 0 Starter Display DOL 103 Phase C Current This parameter provides the current of Phase C 0 Starter Display DOL 104 Average Current This parameter provides the average current 0 Starter Display DOL 105 Therm Utilized This parameter displays the Thermal Capacity used 0 Starter Display DOL 106 FLA Setting The motor s full load current rating See Table 23 Starter Setup DOL 107 Overload Class Selects the overload class E dss 10 Star
213. e the ArmorConnnect instructions for recommended tightening torque The use of a tool to help in the tightening of the connector is not recommended Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers Bulletins 280E 281E and 284E use only motor and power cables that are listed for use with ArmorStart ArmorConnect power cables are UL 2237 Listed IMPORTANT The ArmorStart UL listing does not permit using a third party or un listed motor and power cable assembly Using a cable assembly that is not permitted results in a loss of Listing and does not comply with NFPA 79 or the NFPA 70 NEC see 110 3 B of the NEC For reference the UL White Book states the following for power media cable assemblies meeting UL 2237 standard These devices are intended for use only with the Listee s same line of products that are covered under this category SHOCK HAZARD Risk of electrical shock Do not disconnect or connect power cables under load under load This may result physical injury or equipment damage as a result of high ATTENTION ArmorConnect cables are not intended to be connected or disconnected A make and break currents and potential fault currents Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 53 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenanc
214. e to avoid electromagnetic emission and also capacitive currents e Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance e Using an EMI filter with any drive rating may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore the filter must only be used in installations that are solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should exclude any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked e When using a shielded motor cable the drain wire should be bonded to chassis ground at the motor The recommended motor connection should use a shielded concentric connector This provides 360 shielding A single point connection can be used but is less effective Wiring Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups power control and signal The following recommendations for physical separation between these groups are provided to reduce the coupling effect Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 Grounding e Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray
215. eaker 140M has tripped Determine cause of trip Try to reset the circuit breaker using the disconnect handle If the conditions continue check power wiring or replace based module This cannot be disabled 2 Yes Overload The load has drawn excessive current and based onthe Verify that the load is operating correctly and the trip class that is selected the device has tripped ArmorStart is properly set up The fault cannot be disabled If there is an EM brake on the motor check if the brake current is a significant percentage compare to the FLA Adjust FLA to compensate for the brake current 3 Yes Phase Loss The ArmorStart has detected a missing phase Verify that 3 phase voltage is present at the line side connections This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 4 Reserved Not Used 5 Reserved Not Used Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 217 Chapter9 Diagnostics Table 36 Fault LED Indicators for Bulletin 280E 281E Blink Auto Bulletin 280E 281E Trip Pattern Resettable Status Description Action 6 Yes Control Pwr Loss Switched The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power Check control voltage wiring and proper polarity A1 A2 Power voltage terminal Also check and replace the control voltage fuse if necessary This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 7 Yes Input Fa
216. eath personal injury and or equipment damage gt ATTENTION The controller contains ESD electrostatic discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing the assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures see Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Discharge or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks gt ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage components or reduce product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system gt ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury and or equipment damage gt ATTENTION To prevent electrical shock open the disconnect switch before connecting and disconnecting cables Risk of shock environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles gt WARNING The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to discharge after removal of mains supply Before working on a drive verify isolation of mains supply from line inpu
217. ect LED Status Indication and Reset IP Address Notation Area l i a Control Module 2 Outputs Micro M12 wg Hand Off Auto Keypad Source Brake Connection Motor Connection Ethernet Ports DLR Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 27 Chapter1 Product Overview Notes 28 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Receiving Unpacking Inspecting Storing Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company Check the item s received against the purchase order If any items are damaged it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill If any concealed damage is found during unpacking it is again the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment Remove all packing material wedges or braces from within and around the Armorstart distributed motor controller Remove all packing material from the device s Check the contents of the package Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if any items are missing IMPORTANT _ Before the installation and start up of the drive a general inspection of mechanical inte
218. ed Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Bit 10 15 Reserved Wiring Options Bit 0 Conduit Bit 1 Round Media Bit 2 28xG Gland Bits 3 15 Reserved Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 22 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 57 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 517 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 135 Chapter 7 136 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Starter Enclosure Bit 0 IP67 Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 Sil3 Cat4 Bit3 15 Reserved Starter Options Bit 0 Full Keypad Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 Source Brake Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 15 Reserved Last PR Fault 0 None 1 Hardware Short Circuit 2 Software Short Circuit 3 Motor Overload 4 Reserved 5 Phase Loss 6 12 Reserve
219. eded AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus maximum value overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option 13 No EEprom The checksum read from the board does not match the Set Parameter 141 Reset to Defaults to Option 1 Reset PF Drive Code Reference checksum that is calculated Defaults 100 14 No Hdw Fit PF Drive Codes Failure has been detected in the drive power section or 1 Cycle power Reference 70 and 122 drive control and 1 0 section See Last Protection Fault 2 If Fan RPM fault replace the fan parameter 61 for details 3 Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared 15 Drive Controlled Restart Retries PF Drive Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear Code Reference 33 resume running for the programmed number of Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries 16 Drive Controlled Misc Fault PF Drive Code Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value The Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins Verify that Fault 11 Detail Reference 2 8 29 48 and 80 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 drive was commanded to write default values to Eprom The autotune function was either cancelled by the user or failed If DB1 option is installed see P61 for additional diagnostics ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 C 104 F and mounted pro
220. ee Parameter 61 LastPR Fault for additional details of the last protection fault Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 23 Chapter1 Product Overview Standard Features 24 Inputs The EtherNet IP version includes four 24V DC inputs that are single keyed two inputs per connector and sourced from A3 A2 control power The inputs use two M12 connectors Each input has an LED status indication They are configurable as sinking or sourcing Outputs The EtherNet IP version includes two self protected solid state outputs that are single keyed one per connector sourced from A1 A2 control power Outputs are sourcing type with a maximum current per output point of 0 5 A DC The outputs use one M12 connector per output each having LED status indication For high duty cycle applications consider using an interposing relay to reduce the wear on the internal output Gland Plate Entrance The ArmorStart controller offers three different methods of connecting incoming three phase and control power to the device One method that is offered is the traditional conduit entrance with a 0 75 in and a 1 in conduit hole opening The second method that is offered is daisy chain feed through power reducing the need for additional components such as junction boxes The third method offers connectivity to the ArmorConnect power media Factory installed receptacles are provided for connectivity to both three phase and co
221. een corrupted Single Collisions 92 The number of outgoing packets that encountered only one collision during transmission Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Commissioning Chapter 4 Field Multiple Collisions Specifies The number of outgoing packets that encountered 2 15 collisions during transmission SQE Test Errors A test to detect the collision present circuit between a transceiver and a network interface card NIC IMPORTANT Because most NICs now have an integrated transceiver the SQE test is unnecessary Ignore this media counter Deferred Transmissions The number of outgoing packets whose transmission is deferred because the network is busy when the first attempt is made to send them Late Collisions The number of times two devices transmit data simultaneously Excessive Collisions The number of frames that experience 16 consecutive collisions MAC Transmit Errors Frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Carrier Sense Errors Times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame Frame Too Long The number of incoming packets that exceed the maximum Ethernet packet size MAC Receive Errors Frames for which reception on the Ethernet interface failed due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error Connection Manager Cmd Object Info Web Page
222. elow e Increased system reliability e Fast update times 1 2 ms possible e Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting e Operation independent of PLC or network status e Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions e Critical operations can be safely shut down through local logic 332 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C Device Logix Programming The following example shows how to program a simple logic routine to interface Example the ArmorStart EtherNet I P controller with a remote hard wired startstop p station In this case the I O is wired as shown in Table 54 Table 54 Hardware Bit Assignments and Description for the ArmorStart CO be O y oe Bit Description Bit Description Ind Start Button Run Forward Contactor Coil In Stop Button N A N A In2 N A In3 N A IMPORTANT Before programming logic it is important to decide on the conditions under which the logic will run As defined earlier the conditions can be defined by setting parameter 8 Network Override and parameter 9 Comm Override to the desired value 1 While in the AOP click the DeviceLogix tab Click the Launch Editor button EE Module Properties SLogix_Ethernet 284E FVD1P4 1 1 io0j x General Connection Module Info Parameters DeviceLogi Intenet Protocol Port Configuration Network Logic
223. en a protection trip re User 1 0 Configuration Common secure Goto PrFit Value This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when 40 OutB Pr FitValue a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 OutB Pr FitState is 0 Open User 1 0 Configuration Common set to 0 This parameter along with Parameter 42 OutB Net FitValue 0 41 OutB Net FltState ae how Output B will respond when a network fault Goto I dle Valu E User 1 0 Configuration Common This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes 42 OutB Net FitValue when a network fault occurs and Parameter 41 OutB Net 0 Open User 1 0 Configuration Common FitState is set to 0 This parameter along with Parameter 44 OutB Net IdlValue 0 43 Out Net ldlState defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle Goto PrFit Value User 1 0 Configuration Common This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes 44 OutB Net IdlValue when the network is idle and Parameter 43 OutB Net 0 Open User 1 0 Configuration Common IdIState is set to 0 45 Keypad Mode This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained 0 Maintained Misc Configuration Common or momentary This parameter disables all keypad function except for the 46 Keypad Disable OFF and RESET buttons 0 Not Disabled Misc Configuration Common 47 Set To Defaults Hea if set to will set the device to the factory 0 No Operation Misc Configuration Common 48 Drive Control This parameter pro
224. en the owner controller is actively controlling the 1 0 module New Module Type 1756 IB16 16 Point 10 31 2 DC Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name o OS C Listen Only Input Data Description Listen only connection Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 91 Chapter4 Product Commissioning Ethernet Statistics Web Page Expand Minimize Home Diagnostics Diagnostic Overview Network Settings o Application Connections Bridge Connections Ethernet Statistics Ring Statistics Advanced Diagnostics Browse Chassis The Ethernet Statistics web page of a scanner provides a summary of the status of communication activity on the Ethernet network The most commonly monitored fields are circled in the graphic and described in the table that follows Diagnostic Overview Network Settings Application Connections Bridge Connections Ethernet Ethernet Port 1 Interface State Link Status Speed Duplex Autonegotiate Status Media Counters Port 1 Alignment Errors FCS Errors Single Collisions Multiple Collisions SQE Test Errors Deferred Transmissions Late Collisions Excessive Collisions MAC Transmit Errors Carrier Sense Errors Frame Too Long MAC Receive Errors Interface Counters In Octets In Ucast Packets In NUcast Packets In Discards In Errors In Unknown Protos Out Octets Out Ucast Packets Out NUcast Packets Out D
225. ent SLogix_Ethemet Ethernet Address Name fArmorStart_ therNetIP_284E Private Network 192 168 1 4 Description Z IP Address 192 168 62 6 E2 C Host Name Module Definition Series A Change Revision E Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data You must go online with this module s Parameter page and DeviceLogix page to ensure the controller and ArmorStart configurations are consistent with each other Status Offline Cancel Apply Help In addition to the actual programming DeviceLogix can be configured to operate under specific situations It is important to note that the DeviceLogix program only runs if the logic has been enabled This can be done within the Logic Editor The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the Network Override and Communication Override parameters The following information describes the varying levels of operation e Ifboth overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled the ONLY time DeviceLogix runs is if there is an active I O connection with a master i e the master is in Run mode At all other times DeviceLogix is running the logic but does NOT control the state of the outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 331 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix Ifthe Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled then DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run
226. ent Ref A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 226 Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value Drive rated amps Parameter Number 227 Related Parameters 225 226 228 229 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 0 IMPORTANT Used when motor is uncoupled from the load Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure Applies to rotate tune only ATTENTION Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding If the Autotune routine fails an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 197 Chapter 7 198 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters IR Voltage Drop Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator Flux Current Ref Value of
227. eplace internal fan F12 HW OverCurrent 2 The drive output current has exceeded 1 Check programming Check for excess load improper programming of Parameter 184 the hardware current limit Boost Select DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current F13 Ground Fault 2 A current path to earth ground hasbeen 1 Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded detected at one or more of the drive condition output terminals F33 Auto Rstrt Tries Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reseta 1 Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear fault and resume running for the programmed number of Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries F38 Phase U to Gnd 2 A phase to ground fault has been 1 Check the wiring between the drive and motor F39 Phase V to Gnd detected between the drive and motorin 2 Check motor for grounded phase F40 Phase W to Gnd this phase 3 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F41 Phase UV Short 2 Excessive current has been detected 1 Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition F42 Phase UW Short between these two output terminals 2 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F43 Phase VW Short F48 Params Defaulted 2 The drive was commanded to write 1 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive default values to EEPROM 2 Program the drive parameters as needed F63 SW OverCurrent 2 Programmed Parameter 198 SW Current 1 Check load req
228. epresents maximum capability up to 100 braking torque where possible Application Type 2 represents more than 100 braking torque where possible up to a maximum of 150 Note 3 Dynamic brake modules have an IP20 rating ATTENTION Resistor temperature may exceed 200 C 392 F ATTENTION AC drives do not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors especially in the case of brake IGBT failure A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be protected from over temperature or the protective circuit shown or equivalent must be supplied Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 277 Chapter12 Accessories 278 ArmorStart Bulletin 284 Option DB IP20 Resistor Dimensions Cat No Weight kg Ib AK R2 091P500 AK R2 047P500 AK R2 360P500 1 1 2 5 AK R2 030P1K2 AK R2 120P1K2 2 7 6 Dimensions are in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes Figure 103 Bulletin 284E Dynamic Brake Module Approximate Dimensions Frame A 430 0 70 18 60 0 0 67 Lf 2 36 1 T 2 316 0 335 0 12 44 13 19 E l a y 13 0 N 0 51 AK R2 091P500 AK R2 047P500 AK R2 360P500 Frame B 61 0 ET y f if 32 386 0 405 0
229. equired input produced assembly Instance 52 ODVA Starter Bit 0 Fault 302 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Instance 150 Starter Stat Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E 281E Starters Instance 150 CIP Information Appendix B This is the default input produced assembly for Bulletin 280E 281E starters 0 Reserved AOP Tag name name I Fault 1 Reserved AOP Tag name name I Fault 2 Reserved AOP Tag name name I Fault 3 Reserved AOP Tag name name I Fault 4 Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent 5 DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 Int Ind 6 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut PtOSDeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut PtO3DeviceOut PtO2DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt0ODeviceOut 7 Logic Enable Pt14DeviceOut Pti3DeviceQut Pti2DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut PtO9DeviceOut PtO8DeviceOut 8 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int0ODeviceOut Cfg low byte ProducedWordOParam 9 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int00DeviceOut Cfg high byte ProducedWord0Param 10 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg low byte ProducedWord1Param 11 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg high byte ProducedWord1Param 12 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int02DeviceOu
230. er capabilities that are shown in the table that are not reviewed in this example Figure 115 below shows all available network outputs supported by Bulletin 284 Referring to Table 68 the preset frequencies are defined in parameter 170 171 172 and 173 of Bulletin 284 Also note the truth table that selects each of those frequencies For example if Freq Cntl bit 2 1 1 1 and 0 0 then the controller frequency is based on Parameter 172 Preset Freq 2 Figure 115 Bulletin 284E Produced Network Bits in DeviceLogix Output Name DataType Hardware Boolean Output Network Boolean Output PrOODeviceOut BOOLEAN Pt01DeviceOut BOOLEAN PtO2DeviceOut BOOLEAN Pt0SDeviceOut BOOLEAN Pt04DeviceOut BOOLEAN Pt0SDeviceOut BOOLEAN PLO6DeviceOut BOOLEAN PtO7DeviceOut BOOLEAN PtOSDeviceOut BOOLEAN PtosDeviceOut BOOLEAN PtiODeviceOut BOOLEAN Pti1 DeviceOut BOOLEAN Pti2DeviceOut BOOLEAN PtiSDeviceOut BOOLEAN Pt14DeviceOut BOOLEAN ResetF ault BOOLEAN AccelCtrl_0 BOOLEAN AccelCtri_1 BOOLEAN DecelCtrl_0 BOOLEAN FreqCtrl_1 FreqCtri_2 DisableMotion BOOLEAN DisableKeynad BOOLEAN he aje LU Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Application Examples Appendix F Table 68 See table 22 Parameters 170 177 Preset Freq Options for predefined accel and decel Accel2 Accell Description 0 0 No Command 0 1 Accel 1 Enable 1 0 Accel 2 En
231. er by going to the control module and turning OFF the At Motor disconnect and performing lockout tagout per your company policy 2 Remove motor cable 3 Loosen the four mounting screws 4 Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward Installation of Control Module 5 Install control module 6 Tighten four mounting screws 7 Install motor cable Figure 98 Control Module Replacement Motor Cable Note DeviceNet base module is shown 252 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Fuse Replacement ATTENTION To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices Table 48 Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement Specification Output Fuse Control Power Fuse Cat No 25176 155 03 25172 260 17 Fast acting high interrupting capacity tubular UL Listed Class CC CSA HRC 1 Interupting Description fuse Rejection Feature Current 2 5A 7A Interrupting 1500 A 200 ka Capacity Voltage Rating 250V 600V Maximum Littlefuse PN 021602 5 Cooper Bussman PN KTK R 7 or Manufacturer Littlefuse PN KLKROO7 T Dimension mm 20 0 8 x 5 0 2 38 1 1 5 x 10 2 0 4 in Figure 99 Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement Output Fuse Cat No 25176 155 03 Control Voltage Fuse A a Cat No 25172 260 17 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P
232. erable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique number for each device Product Name Structure of 7 Get String Length USINT Product Code specific ASCII String STRING 8 Get State USINT Returns the value 3 Operational 9 Get aca UINT Module FRS onsistency Value 1020 Get Build Number UDINT Build number of EtherNet IP Module firmware 300 Instance 1 only The following common services are implemented for Instance 1 Service requests to other instances are serviced through the bridge Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_ All 0x05 No Yes Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attributes_Single The Type 0 and 1 reset service types reset the Control Module The EtherNet IP module performs the Type 0 or 1 reset on itself Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004 The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object The following static Assembly instance attributes are supported for each Assembly instance Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT Member List Array of STRUCT Array of CIP paths Member Data Description UINT Size of Member Data in bits 2 Get Member Path Size UINT Size of Member EPATA in bytes Member Path aaa Logically encoded member name 3 Conditional Data Array of B
233. ernal web server For most cases the Host Name and Module Definition section of this tab do not require any adjustment Changes to either of these should only be made if you are familiar with the functionality of each of these sections Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 99 Chapter5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Connection Tab Click the Connection tab to display the following General Connection Module Info Parameters Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Requested Packet Interval RPI boo S ms 2 0 1280 0 C Inhibit Module C Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP Module Fault Status Creating Help The Request Packet Interval RPI indicates the maximum frequency at which data is received It is possible that data could come more quickly than the time interval assigned in the RPI In most cases the default 20 ms should be the optimal setting If you check the Inhibit Module option connection to controller tags will be broken The Major Fault on Controller if Connection Fails While in Run Mode option should be checked to ensure that the controller processes the connection fault with the ArmorStart The Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP is checked to use the Unicast mode instead of the EtherNet IP mode This appears only for modules using RS Logix 5000 software version 18 or
234. est as this could leave exposed conductive parts in an energized state shock hazard Another criterion is that the cotton must not ignite as this indicates the expulsion from the controller of hot gases or molten metal fragments fire hazard Referring to the controller on the left UL 508C permits the individual motor testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect an individual motor branch circuit According to both NFPA 70 and NFPA 79 this is 400 percent of the full load current rating of the largest motor that the controller can supply In UL 508C this is taken to be 400 percent of the rated output current of the controller or 6 A Referring to the controller on the right UL 508C permits the group installation testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect a multiple motor branch circuit According to both NFPA 70 430 53 C and NFPA 79 7 2 10 4 3 this is 250 amperes This value derived from the installation requirements of 430 53 C and 430 53 D of NFPA 70 is determined by the largest size of power conductor that the ArmorStart LT controller can accept 10 AWG Because the UL 508C test covers all possibilities in NFPA 70 and NFPA 79 it permits the maximum value of 250 amperes This covers 7 2 10 4 2 which permits only 100 amperes However in this case the manufacturer Rockwell Automation chose to test and mark with the lower value of 45 A This value w
235. esult VED input switching e Reduce the RMS input current that is associated with peak changes in current that results from VFD input switching allowing the use of smaller input conductors and transformers e Mitigate the impact of power system transients on the drive Repeated line disturbances in current and voltage can lead to premature input power structure failure for AC drives One way to mitigate these types of issues is to add impedance to the incoming power line to the drive Impedance comes in the form of transformers line reactors and conductors When a large power distribution system gt 100 kVA is feeding many small VFDs the associated input impedance can be lower than 1 This low impedance can result in voltage and current disturbances that negatively impact performance and the overall life of an AC drive A line reactor is one possible solution to absorb these power line disturbances This does not mean that a reactor must be used in every situation Conductors add impedance On Machine solutions are generally further away from the power distribution panel therefore the length of cable adds impedance Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 347 AppendixE System Design Considerations When Using a Line Reactor ArmorStart Design The ArmorStart design incorporates features and additional components that allow for better heat transfer keeping the internal components cooler This cooler design assu
236. eve information on all four faults the instance value must be indexed from 1 2 3 and 4 where 1 is the most recent fault information If more detailed information is needed change the attribute to 0 Configuration Commuricaton Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Get Attribute Single Scurce Element ee Code sO Hea Cire 97 Hex Destination Explicit Data Type j urce Instance 4 Attribute 1 Hex New Ta D Enable Enable Wating Start Done Done Length 0 Eror Code Extended Eror Code Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text Lick coe ery Hoe How to Report an IP Address Conflict Detection Refer CIP Class 0x00F5 address conflict detection This is stored in non volatile memory and can be accessed through the TCP IP Interface Object instance 1 attribute 11 LastConflictDetected via Message instruction Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 365 AppendixF Application Examples Demand Torque Off Considerations Keypad Disable with DeviceLogix Motion Disable 366 ArmorStart EtherNet IP does not support safety torque off internally therefore this capability must be implemented external to the ArmorStart controller within the safety circuit To achieve a required safety performance without damage to the ArmorStart 284 its required to have some coordination between the safety safety circuit and the VFD enable When there is a demand
237. evice The word circuit means the branch circuit The conductors of the branch circuit start at the load side of the fuses and end at the input to the motor including the conductors between the motor controllers and the motor The smallest conductor in the circuit is any one of the 14 AWG conductors that supply each controller and motor The note at b indicates the conductor protection is based on the smallest conductor 14 AWG Referring to Table 51 a 14 AWG conductor may be used in a circuit that is protected by a fuse of any class having a rating of 60 amperes or less c Therefore selecting a fuse of any class with a maximum rating of 60 amperes satisfies the conductor protection requirement of 7 2 10 4 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 291 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Supplementary Note 1 The value that is specified in Table 51 is the maximum rating of fuse that 7 2 10 4 2 permits to protect that size of conductor The rating of the fuse may be set to the maximum value given by Table 51 for the smallest conductor without further justification However if any controller or other component has a maximum rating of fuse that is less than the Table 51 value the maximum rating of the fuse protecting the branch circuit must be reduced to the lower value so that all components are applied according to their ratings For ex
238. eviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt08DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt08DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt09DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt09DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt10DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt10DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt11DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt11DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt12DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt12DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt13DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt13DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Pt14DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Pt14DeviceOut AS_ DEMO LogicEnabled AS_DEMO I LogicEnabled AS_ DEMO Int0ODeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Int0ODeviceOut AS_ DEMO Int01DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Int01DeviceOut AS_ DEMO IntO2DeviceOut AS_DEMO 1 Int02DeviceOut AS_ DEMO Int03DeviceOut AS_DEMO I Int03DeviceOut Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 113 Chapter5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Table 13 Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation Controller Output Command Tags Tag Description Use RunForward Command VFD forward RunReverse Command VFD reverse ResetFault Fault reset JogForward Command Jog forward per internal frequency JogReverse Command Jog reverse per internal frequency OutA Output A OutB Output B AccelCtrl_0 VFD acceleration ramp 1 AccelCtrl_1 VFD acceleration ramp 2 DecelCtrl_0 VFD deceleration ramp 1 DecelCtrl_1 VFD deceleration ramp 2 Drivelnput1 VFD Digit Input 1 Drivelnput2 VFD Digit Input 2 Drivelnput3 VFD Digit Input 3 Drivelnput4 VFD Digit Input 4 FreqCommand Logix com
239. exists mismatch exists refer to parameter 61 for additional fault detail The ArmorStart may need to be replaced if the fault persists Hdw Fit is the factory enabled default setting This fault cannot be disabled 15 Reserved Not Used 16 Reserved Not Used Table 37 Fault LED Indicators for 284E Bit Blink Auto Pattern Resettable 284E Trip Status Description Action 1 No Short Circuit The circuit breaker 140M has tripped Determine cause of trip Try to reset the circuit breaker using the disconnect handle If the conditions continue check power wiring or replace based module This cannot be disabled 2 Drive Controlled Overload An excessive motor load exists 1 Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed Drive Codes 7 and 64 the current set by Parameter 133 Motor OL Current 2 Verify Parameter 184 Boost Select setting 3 Drive rating of 150 for 1 minute 4 Reduce load or extend Accel Time two hundred percent or when 3 seconds has been exceeded 3 Drive Controlled Phase Short 1 Phase U V or W to Gnd A phase to ground faulthas Check the wiring between the drive and motor Check Drive Codes 38 43 been detected between the drive and motor in this motor for grounded phase Check the motor and drive phase output terminal wiring for a shorted condition Replace 2 Phase UV UW or VW Short Excessive current has been drive if fault cannot be cleared detected between these two output terminal
240. fied maximum branch circuit protection e 2 The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 7 2 10 4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit Summarizing the requirements relevant to Figure 106 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 permit two or more ArmorStart LT motor controllers to be installed in a single branch circuit provided 1 all motor controllers are listed for group installation 2 the fuse does not exceed the maximum rating that Table 51 permits to protect the smallest conductor and 3 the fuse complies with the maximum fuse ratings of all controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A Explanatory Example Figure 108 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does lt a fi not exceed the values in Table 7 2 10 4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit ennai te i Branch circuit shown as dottedlinej all of the conductors on the load side C shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit of the single set of fuses is OOo OS eee ce ecce gece cccepeccoceegecococegesococcyg Suitable for Motor Group Installation Each motor controller
241. for an ArmorStart selection 8 4 Alias For ASEIP_DEMO ASEIP_DEMO 0 CommandData ASEIP_DEMO 0 RunForward ASEIP_DEMO 0 ResetF ault ASEIP_DEMO 0 0ut4 ASEIP_DEMO 0 0utB ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt00Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt01Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt02Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt03Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt04Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt05Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt06Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt07Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt08Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt09Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt1 O0Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt11Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 PH 2Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 PH 3Deyviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 PH 4Deviceln ASEIP_DEMO 0 Pt15Deviceln The following tables provide more clarification regarding the Produce and Consume assemblies and how they correlate with the auto generated names Using an AOP the data in the Consumed and Produced Assemblies are automatically created as descriptive tag names To drive this point home we ve highlighted a few of the commands to demonstrate the AOP tag alignment to the Consumed and Produced Assemblies in the following tables Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Table 9 Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 284E Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Out B Out A JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForw
242. generation condition and the bus regulator tries to compensate Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 This could also cause DC bus voltage faults if an external resistor is not attached 239 Chapter10 Troubleshooting Table 42 Motor and or Drive Does Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed Cause s Indication Corrective Action Acceleration time is excessive None Reprogram Parameter 139 Accel Time 1 or Parameter 167 Accel Time 2 e Try changing parameter 184 Boost selection to a value of 5 to 14 starting with 5 Excess load or short acceleration None e Compare Parameter 103 Output Current with Parameter 189 Current Limit times force the drive into current e Remove excess load or reprogram Parameter 139 Accel Time 1 or Parameter 167 Accel limit slowing or stopping Time 2 acceleration e Check for improper setting of Parameter 184 Boost Select Speed command source or value None Verify Parameter 102 Commanded Freq is not as expected e Check Parameter 112 Control Source for the proper Speed Command Programming is preventing the None Check Parameter 135 Maximum Freq to insure that speed is not limited by programming drive output from exceeding limiting values Torque performance does not None e Set motor nameplate full load amps in Parameter 226 Motor NP FLA match motor characteristics e Use Parameter 227 Autotune to perform Static Tune or Rotate Tune pro
243. gged SBO SB1 SB2 etc Outputs such as Run Reverse are tagged DOPO DOP etc Produced Network Bits such as Fault Reset are tagged PNBO PNBI etc This document helps users interpret the naming conventions ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits The screen capture below shows how to choose status bits in the ladder editor DIP INT 9 CNB INT L FB INT _ gt an HE Latch 1268 4 fs ff E Counter a jg hohihzhahaehs A Timer 16 17 18 19 20 21 122 23 The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 280D and 281D units Status Bit Declaration 0 Tripped 1 Running Fwd 2 Running Rev 3 Ready 4 Net Ctl Status 5 At Reference 6 Keypad Hand 7 HOA Status 8 140M On 9 Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists 10 IO Cnxn Exists 11 Explicit Cnxn Fault 12 IO Cnxn Fault 13 IO Cnxn Idle 14 Current Flowing 15 Keypad Hand Direction 358 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Application Examples Appendix F Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits The screen capture below shows how to choose fault bits in the ladder editor 8 DIP INT L S CNB INT gt E Lo SB INT HA Latch E Counter magdagdag A Timer 8 a hohihzhahals The following table contains the fault bit definitions for Bulletin 280D and 281D ArmorStart units Fault Bit Declaration 0 Short Ci
244. gic cast e Control Bi Be Power Source Brake L l 560 Q Sense Option T a oR OB Fan L Dynamic Brake Connector Option gt i Current supplied by pi control power due to the power supply voltage being greater than A3 voltage Source Brake Option Reversed bias under normal operation Current supplied by A3 when A1 control power is lost Ethernet 7 Circuits Note This switch is controlled by the Control Power Logic sense If control power is present switch is closed Prevents drive from running when there is no power for the 40M Trip H Input 10mA 24V DC MOM Status H Input 10mA 24V DC Brake CNTR Status H Input 10mA 24V DC Output CNTR Status Input 10mA 24V DC 24V DC Status 1 Output CNTR Status not available when SM option specified AS Logic Logic Short Detect Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 43 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Recommended Cord Grips Figure 22 Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating 0 75 in Lock Nut gt c lt 1 in Lock Nut A Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Cat No 2931NM Cat No 2940NM 0 75 in Stain Relief Cord Connector 1 in Stain Relief Cord Connector Cable Range 0 31 0 56 in gt t Cable Range 0
245. grity i e loose parts wires connections packing materials etc must be made After unpacking check the item s nameplate catalog number s against the purchase order See Chapter 1 for an explanation of the catalog numbering system that aids in nameplate interpretation The controller should remain in its shipping container before installation If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time it must be stored according to the following instructions to maintain warranty coverage e Store in a clean dry location e Store within an ambient temperature range of 25 85 C 13 185 F e Store within a relative humidity range of 0 95 noncondensing e Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere e Do not store equipment in a construction area Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 29 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance General Precautions Precautions for Bulletin 284E Applications In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual the following statements that are general to the system must be read and understood SHOCK HAZARD Risk of electrical shock Do not disconnect or connect power cables under load gt ATTENTION Total circuit impedance must be low enough to ensure any short circuit or ground fault current is large enough to operate the fuse or circuit breaker Failure to comply can result in d
246. guration m He adika mail Notification Product Commissioning Chapter 4 Figure 70 Overload Class Settings Z Rockwell Automation Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 x File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help amp a7 ee Lea a a CA 7 OC Qx Q7 x B PN search Sie Favorites Kz Address http 192 168 1 11 Allen Bradley WING ca PA AVN Basic Status X Network Config X Starter Protect N User 1 0 Config N Misc Config NU Starter Display Y Starter Setup z Eco in Rockwell Automation P Home P z EA arameter Name Data Type Value Unit D Basic status 106 FLA Setting mT s Amps D network Config 107 Overload Class USINT 15 E starter Protect D user 1 0 Config 108 Ol Reset Level USINT 75 P mise config Parameter editable E Starter Display E starter setup Eat cancel Maaa X i Diagnostics Ej Administrative Settings Seconds between refresh 15 Disable Refresh with 0 Devs File Parameters saved Copyright 2010 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reser The above screen shows an example of changing the Overload Class setting to 15 Once all changes are made select Apply E mail Notification Configuration ArmorStart Ethernet IP internal web server supports the e mailing of warning and trip messages via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP The configuration parameters f
247. gure 33 Stop Circuit for EtherNet IP Version Stop Circuit for EtherNet IP Version ArmorConnect Control Power Connection Example Pin 1 RED Pin 2 Black Pin 3 Green Pin 4 Blank Pin 5 Blue Pin 6 White i Plastic 24V 2wa DC Mini Receptacle Metric Twist to Release 1N C 1 N 0 Metal 24V E Cat No 800F 1YMQ4 800F 1MYMQ4 Stop Station i 898N 653ST NKF 898N 653ES NKF 898N 653ES NKF Customer Supplied 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 898N 653ES NKF 889A M65SP61 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 Control Power using 4 Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter As an alternative to the unique 6 5 pin control cable the auxiliary power cabling can be used Auxiliary Power is based on a 4 pin connector system and is used to provide 24V DC power to I O modules and other devices separately from network power Running separate power to these devices is typically used for I O devices with output connections to prevent power supply interruption due to switching of outputs Figure 34 Control Power Overview using 4 Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter Motor Branch Power Supply Circuit 24VDC Protection Bul 1606 280E or 281E Ethernet 4 Pin Aux Pwr 1738 I O A HEE aiii m mu Bulkhead pass thru connectors are passive male to female 4 pin mini connectors within a threaded metal housing that is used for Auxiliary Power Cat No
248. gure 54 Network Media Ethernet M12 D Code Media Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 73 Chapter3 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology EtherNet IP General Wiring Guideline Requested Packet Interval 74 Ethernet is found in automation equipment panels and components There are a few guidelines that if followed will reduce the number of issues an EtherNet IP application may experience e Many EtherNet IP applications share the same space with power conductors If the Ethernet media must cross power conductors do so at right angles This reduces the coupling effect and reduce the potential for communication noise e Where possible route the Ethernet IP media five feet or more from high voltage sources for example lights ballasts motors or sources of radio frequency such as variable frequency drives e Ensure that the application or equipment follows industry acceptable grounding practices e Maintain media lengths between nodes to less than 100 m 328 ft In today s environment it may be challenging to maintain these guidelines however these reduce potential application issues The Requested Packet Interval RPI is the update rate that is specified for a particular piece of data on the network This value specifies how often to produce the data for that device For example if you specify an RPI of 50 ms it means that every 50 ms the device should send
249. h Amps 0 92 0 30 1 09 0 125 0 295 Module Steady Amps 0 06 0 30 0 23 0 125 0 295 Total Control Power Pick Up Watts 22 08 7 20 26 16 3 00 7 08 Total Control Power Running Watts 1 44 7 20 5 52 3 00 7 08 Add power requirements for outputs 1 A max to A1 A2 Add power requirements for inputs 200 mA max to A3 A2 If A1 power is disconnected Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms which can exceed 20 A The power supply must be capable of supporting this amount of instant power demand when multiple units are turned ON simultaneously If supplies are weaker it is recommended to apply unswitched power A3 A2 first and after a 2 4 second delay apply switched power UL NEMA IEC Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC Input On State Voltage Range 10 26V DC 3 0 mA 10V DC Input On State Current 7 2 mA 24V DC Input Off State Voltage Range 0 5VDC Input Off State Current lt 1 5mA 200 Hz Input Ratings Sourced from Control Circuit Maximum Input Frequency Response DeviceLogix response is greater than 200 Hz Network response depends on control system network performance A3 A2 Input Filter Software Selectable Off to On Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments On to Off Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments Input Compatibility N A IEC 1133 Type 1 Number of Inputs 4 Sensor Source Voltage Status Only 11 26 4V DC from unswitched power A3 A2 Cu
250. h Firmware 66 21 of 284 The Fan Fault handler was modified in firmware 66 21 of the 284 Operation Ifthe RPM of the internal fan drops below the minimum threshold a Warning bit in Stater Status Parameter 5 will be set and the Warning Status Parameter 62 Bit 13 hardware warning will be set A 24 hour count down timer begins If the warning flag is set continuously for the 24 hr period and time expires a F14 LED Flashes 14 times Hardware fault occurs Also Last Pr Fault Parameter 61 shows Fan RPM fault If within the 24 hr period the fan rpm climbs above the minimum threshold the warning flags will be removed and timer reset and turned off Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 235 Chapter 10 236 Troubleshooting Starter Status Warning Bit 5 When set to 1 indicates a Warning if a Fan RPM issue occurs The warning bit can also be triggered by other warning type faults that are found in parameter 62 Warning Status Parameter 62 Bit 13 turns to a 1 indicating a Hardware warning Hardware warning is an OR of two warnings Annunciation using PLC Logic To determine when only a Fan RPM warning occurs logic must be written that triggers a CIP message The DPI Alarm Object Class Code 0x0098 provides a structure of data that includes the fault code of Fan RPM 31 Create a program that monitors the Starter Status Warning bit and Warning Status Hardware bit When they are both set to 1 the PLC
251. hase Power for 10 A Short Circuit Protection M22 O O 98 Pin 1 L1 black Pin 2 L2 white Pin 3 L3 red Pin 4 Ground green yellow Figure 45 Incoming Three Phase Power for 25 A Short Circuit Protection M35 O OQO O Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Pin 1 L1 black Pin 2 Ground green yellow Pin 3 L3 red Pin 4 L2 white Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 Optional Locking Clip The clam shell design clips over the ArmorStart motor connector and motor cable to limit customer access from disconnecting the motor cable on the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller The locking clip is an optional device that can be used if desired A locking clip is not available for the M25 Source Brake connection Figure 46 Bulletin 280E 281E Installation of Locking Clip Figure 47 Bulletin 284E Installation of Locking Clip SEE DETAIL A Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 63 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Maintenance 64 The ArmorStart controller does not require much regular maintenance There are a few checks that are needed to verify continued proper operation When using ArmorConnect media or conductors verify that the connections remain tight where exposed to shock and vibration Check that the heatsink allows good air flow Bulletin 284 includes an internal circulating fan to supp
252. he program but has not been downloaded in the product Se Accept Edits to save the DeviceLogix program to the project Set to Now Draft of example DeviceLogix program 16 The last step is to enable the logic via the pull down menu EN Module Properties SLogix_Ethernet 284E FVD1P4 1 1 General Connection Module Info Parameters DeviceLoaix Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Logic 2EM lt Author Temp Launch Editor Description Example 17 Click OK To download the DeviceLogix program you must go on line with the PLC and allow the download Ensure that the PLC is in the Program position If in any other position the download will not occur and an error will be generated 18 The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active 338 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C Import and Export The ArmorStart EtherNet IP AOP provides users an import or export function The export function allows the DeviceLogix program to be saved to a file This file can then be imported into a similar product of same function regardless of horsepower Importing of DeviceLogix between unlike products is not allowed for example Bulletin 284E and Bulletin 280E Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 339 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix Notes 340 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P Se
253. he drive will remain at Related Parameters 134 137 minimum frequency before stopping and Access Rule GET SET de energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to Data Type UNIT Option 8 or 9 Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 01 sec Minimum Value 0 01 sec Maximum Value 10 00 sec Default Value 0 0 sec MOP Reset Sel Parameter Number 262 Sets the drive to save the current MOP Related Parameters 169 Reference command 0 Zero MOP Ref Access Rule Get Set This option clamps Parameter 169 Data Type UINT Internal Freq at 0 0 Hz when drive is not running Group Drive Advanced Setup 1 Save MOP Ref Default Reference is saved in Parameter 169 Units on Internal Freq Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 DB Threshold Parameter Number 263 Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Access Rule GET SET Dynamic Brake operation If the DC bus Data T UINT voltage falls below the value set in this igus Lag parameter the Dynamic Brake will not Group Drive Advanced Setup turn on Lower values will make the Dynamic Braking function more Units responsive but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 110 0 Default Value 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 199 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters 200 ATTENTION Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set to a value that causes the dynamic braking
254. heir automation systems e Automation architecture must allow for collection of data EtherNet TIP provides installation flexibility and leverages commercially available industrial infrastructure products It is also compatible with other communication standards such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP Simple Networks Management Protocol SNMP and Dynamic Host Configuration DHCP EtherNet IP is a CIP adaptation of TCP IP that fully uses the IEEE standard The relationship between the TCP IP and CIP to form EtherNet IP is shown in the ISO OSI 7 layer model is shown in Figure 49 The OSI model is an ISO standard for network communications that define all functions from a physical layer to the protocol Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 67 Chapter3 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology 68 This diagram shows how Rockwell Automation EtherNet IP communication modules fit into a control system Figure 48 EtherNet IP Communication Modules in a Control System Distributed I O dae ES ii N ae 1769 L23Ex Y x Se wie 1768 L4x H 1768 ENBT 1756 EN2 a 1756 I O Modules 1769 L3xE E 1794 AENT z 1794 1 Modules zai a 1734 AENT gt 1734440 Modules PowerFlex Drive Workstation 1783 ETAP Workstation 1783
255. her DB resistors The ArmorStart controller includes specialized function that protects the DB from current faults Brake Diagnostic DB1 P P This capability is found on an optional monitoring board that is located in the control module of the 284 that is included when the DB1 option is selection A DBI fault is not annunciated until the DB switch in the drive is activated and conducting current The following conditions are monitored e DB Overcurrent resistor value too small current is too high e DB Undercurrent resistor value is too high current is too low e DB Open drive bus voltage is above DB level but no resistor current was measured The following conditions cause a fault anytime the DB1 active DB Shorted Switch detected current when Drive bus voltage is below the DB threshold e DB Overtemp DB resistor is too hot e DB Bus Voltage Link Open Bus voltage from the drive is not measured for two seconds Occurs if the internal connection between the main control and the DB1 module has an issue Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 231 Chapter10 Troubleshooting DB1 Faults 232 Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 Dynamic Brake Eight types of DB1 faults are detected and reported in Parameter 61 as either a DBI Flt DB1 Comm Fault or DB1 Switch Short DB faults are also reported in Attribute 158 DB1 Fault of the Control Supervisor Object Class Code
256. hing green Steady Green Connected If the device has at least one established connection even to the Message Router the network status indicator shall be steady green Flashing Red Connection timeout If one or more of the connections in which this device is the target has timed out the network status indicator shall be flashing red This shall be left if only all timed out connections are re established or if the device is reset Steady Red Duplicate IP If the device has detected that the IP address is already in use the network status indicator shall be steady red Flashing Red Green Self test While the device is performing its power up testing the network status indicator shall be flashing green red Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Control Module LED Status and Reset Figure 89 LED Status Indication and Reset POWER RUN ws RESET FAULT Control Module Fault LED Indications The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs and a Reset button The following is a brief explanation of the operation of each LED found on the Control Module Table 35 Control Module LED Status Indication LED Definition Recommended Action Power This LED is illuminated solid green when switched Verify 24V DC is present on A1 and A2 Check if the control power is present and with the proper local disconnect is in the OFF posit
257. his should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart selection Click OK Note See Configuring EtherNet IP Address in Chapter 4 to set an IP address on the device B E Controller ArmorSatrt_QuickStart E Unscheduled Programs Phases Motion Groups oe Strings Gg Add On Defined Predefined IO Configuration Backplane CompactLogix System 1769 L35E ArmorSatrt_QuickStart 1769 L35E Ethernet Port LocalENB Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 97 Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Connect and Configure ArmorStart with Add On Profile AOP This section shows the AOP tabs and how they can be used to connect obtain status and configure the ArmorStart selection Before the walkthrough is started the RSLogix 5000 software should be open and an AOP displayed as shown below E RSLogix 500Q ArmorStart_Ped in ArmorStart_Ped_BAK008 acd 1756 L63S Module Properties ENBT 284E FVD1P4 1 1 Z Fie Edt view Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsa a xele e asla e Kg ael 2 Offline 1 E RUN Path AB_ETH 1 192 168 1 9 Backplane O Eal No Forces A ae No Edits a Kil to test fede ea ka bea 2 Evo Safety Unlocked 9 T LA K K KELK 3 SafetyTask a General Connection Module Info Parameters Intemet Protocol Port Configuration
258. ication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 341 AppendixD Renewal Parts Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection Figure 112 Bulletin 280E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 280 E F N 10 C To Bulletin Number 280 Base Module Communications E EtherNet IP Enclosure Type F Type 4 12 IP67 Control Module N Control Module Only Motor Connection c Conduit Entrance R ArmorConnect Power Media Short Circuit Protection Bulletin 140M 10 10 A Rated Device 25 25 A Rated Device Table 57 Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters IP67 NEMA Type 4 with Conduit Entrance kW Hp Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC A 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz Cat No 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 280E FN 10 C 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 280E FN 10 C 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 280E FN 10 C 3 2 16 4 7 5 3 5 10 280E FN 25 C Table 58 Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters IP67 NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect Connectivity kW Hp Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC A 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz Cat No 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 280E FN 10 R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 280E FN 10 R 1 1 5 5 1 1 22 1 1 3 280E FN 10 R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 280E FN 25 R 342 Table 59 Motor and Brake Cables See Motor and Brake Cables
259. iceQut PtOODeviceOut 9 LogicEnable Ptl4DeviceOut Pti4DeviceOut Pti3DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut P10DeviceOut PtO9DeviceOut PtO8DeviceOut 10 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0 low byte IntOODeviceOut 11 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0 high byte IntOODeviceOut 12 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1 low byte IntO1DeviceOut 13 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1 high byte Int01DeviceQut 14 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2 low byte IntO2DeviceOut 15 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2 high byte IntO2DeviceOut 16 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3 low byte IntO3DeviceOut 17 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3 high byte IntO3DeviceOut 304 Note Byte 0 3 refers to PLC communication status All 1s bit high indicates a connection fault communication fault exists or all 0s bit low connection is normal Contactor Contactor 1 Reference Source Brake Contactor status Contactor 2 Output Contactor status Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Instance 162 This is the standard output consumed assembly with Netwo
260. iceln DEMO_REV Pt10Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt10Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt11Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt11Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt12Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt12Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt13Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt13Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt14Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt14Deviceln DEMO_REV Pt15Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt15Deviceln 116 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Table 17 Instance 150 Starter Stat Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E 281E Starters Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Reserved name Fault 1 Reserved name Fault 2 Reserved name Fault 3 Reserved name Fault Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit0 Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit0 4 Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent 5 DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In Ind 6 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt0ODeviceOut 7 LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut 8 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0 low byte ProducedWordOParam 9 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0 high byte ProducedWordOParam 10 Value of the parameter pointed t
261. igured to function as a supervisor node is functioning as the active ring supervisor or a backup supervisor node Ring Fault Location Last Active Node on Port 1 The IP or MAC ID address of the last active node between port 1 on the module and the faulted part of the network Last Active Node on Port 2 The IP or MAC ID address of the last active node between port 2 on the module and the faulted part of the network Active Ring Supervisor Address The IP or MAC ID address of the active ring supervisor Precedence The precedence value of the module If the active supervisor node s operation is interrupted the backup supervisor with the next highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor node 94 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Setup This section shows you how to add an ArmorStart AOP to RSLogix 5000 software It is assumed that you have downloaded and installed the AOP so that the RSLogix 5000 software can fully support the ArmorStart EtherNet IP The AOP can be downloaded from http support rockwellautomation com controlflash LogixProfiler asp 1 Open RSLogix 5000 software by double clicking the icon on your desktop Eola SA Enterperss tH cae LoS New Component mpost Component P ae g a a Page Setup Generate Report Print s Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 95
262. imum length of the smaller conductor see for example 7 2 8 2 When applying 7 2 10 4 2 such a tap rule is neither applicable nor necessary In Figure 109 the smaller 14 AWG conductors may be connected to combined load conductors of any size because 7 2 10 4 does not indirectly protect the smaller conductor by limiting the ratio of the larger to smaller conductor ampacities and the conductor length Instead Table 51 protects the smallest conductor directly by specifying the maximum rating of fuse that may protect a branch circuit that contains a conductor of that size 3 Requirement Three Controller Short Circuit and Ground Fault Protection Each motor controller must be protected according to its own ratings that is applied in accordance with its listing Text 1 Each motor controller and overload device is listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection Analysis See d in Figure 109 The characteristics of the fuse s permitted to protect the conductors see Requirement 2 must now be compared to those in the controller s ratings To comply with the listing of each motor controller and overload relay the fuse s must comply with the maximum branch circuit protection specified in the controller markings Therefore the fuse s must be of a class marked on all controllers and the rating of the fuse s must not exceed 292 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015
263. ing VLAN can control multicast traffic However unlike IGMP snooping VLAN can also control and block this traffic e Unicast traffic Broadcast traffic Figure 97 Virtual Local Area Networks VLAN Controller A Workstation Controller B Switch 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Port Mirroring Select a managed switch that supports port mirroring With port mirroring frames being transmitted on one port to another port can be directed for analysis by a traffic analyzer Besides monitoring the ethernet media counters port mirroring allows anomalies in traffic flow to be spotted immediately A traffic analyzer can monitor the traffic on a given port and troubleshoot a problem Without port mirroring frames on other ports cannot be seen The effective support and maintenance of ethernet networks often depends on reliable traffic analysis These are some benefits of port mirroring e Monitoring explicit messages between controllers e Monitoring implicit or I O traffic Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 251 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Control Module Removal and Removal of Control Module Installation ATTENTION To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Disconnect pow
264. ing 99 DO NOT CHANGE Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Commissioning Chapter 4 Use the Rockwell Automation The Rockwell Automation BootP DHCP utility is a stand alone program that or incorporates the functionality of standard BootP DHCP software with a user BootP DHCP Utility friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNet IP adapter must have DHCP enabled factory default to use the utility IMPORTANT ArmorStart EtherNet IP does not support BootP To configure your adapter using the BootP DHCP utility perform the following steps 1 Run the BootP DHCP software In the BootP DHCP Request History panel the hardware addresses of the devices issuing BootP DHCP requests are shown Figure 59 BootP DHCP Request History Panel fq BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 iol xj File Tools Help Request History Clear Hislory dd to Relation List hrmin sec Type Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname 8 09 34 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 8 09 26 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 8 09 22 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 8 09 13 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 8 08 57 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 Relation List Disable BOOTP DHCP Enable DHEP New Delete Enable BOOTP Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Description Status Entries Unable to service DHCP request from 00 00 BC 21 20 1
265. ion polarity Run This LED is illuminated solid green when a start Verify 24V DC is present on A1 and A3 Check if the command and control power is present user is properly commanding to RUN via Instance 162 or 166 Network This bicolor LED is used to indicate the status of the See Table 34 Network Status Indicator table above internal network connection for additional information Fault This LED is used to indicate the fault status of the See Table 36 and Table 37 below for additional ArmorStart When the unit is faulted the unit information responds with a specific blink pattern to identify the fault The Reset Button is a local trip reset The PrFlt Reset Mode Parameter 23 determines how a fault is reset When this parameter is set to the value 0 manual mode a local or remote fault reset is needed to reset the fault When this parameter is set to the value 1 auto reset faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away Referring to Table 37 for the 284 in addition to the Pr FltReset Mode the Auto Rstrt Tries Parameter 192 must be set greater than 0 NOTE The Pr FltReset Mode parameter takes precedence Therefore if P23 is set to manual changing P192 to a value greater than 0 has no effect Table 36 Fault LED Indicators for Bulletin 280E 281E Blink Auto Bulletin 280E 281E Trip Pattern Resettable Status Description Action 1 No Short Circuit The circuit br
266. ional configurations of these parameters can be found in Chapter B 210 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Overview Fault Display Clear Fault Chapter 9 Diagnostics This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur Protection Programming Many of the protective features available with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller can be enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters provided For further details on programming see Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller comes equipped with a built in LED status indication that provides four status LEDs and a Reset button Figure 87 LED Status Indication and Reset POWER RUN T g RESET NETWORK FAULT You may clear a fault using the following methods e Remotely via network communications A remote reset is attempted upon detection of a rising edge 0 to 1 transition of the Fault Reset bit in the various I O assemblies A remote reset is also attempted upon detection of the rising edge of the Fault Reset parameter e Locally via the Reset button on the LED Status indication keypad Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 211 Chapter9 Diagnostics Fault Codes Fault Definitions 212 Table 30 provides a referenc
267. iscards Out Errors Enabled Active 100 Mbps Full Duplex Autonegotiate Speed and Juplex Ethernet Port 2 Interface State Link Status Speed Duplex Autonegotiste Status Media Counters Port 2 Alignment Errors FCS Errors Single Collisions Multiple Collisions SQE Test Errors Deferred Transmissions Late Collisions MAC Transmit Errors Carrier Sense Errors Frame Too Long MAC Receive Errors Rockwell Automation Statistics Enabled Active 100 Mbps Full Duplex Autonegotiate Speed and Duplex This table describes the field that is most commonly used on the Ethernet Statistics web page Table 7 Ethernet Statistics Web Page Field Specifies Ethernet Port 1 These definitions apply to the same fields in the Ethernet Port 2 section Interface State Whether the port is turned off or on Active or inactive indicates whether there is a cable that is connected Link Status Whether the port is blocked for DLR protocol frames Speed Whether the Ethernet port is operating at 10 or 100 MBps Duplex Whether the Ethernet port is operating at half duplex or full duplex Autonegotiate Status Whether the port speed and Duplex mode were determined via autonegotiation or whether they were manually configured Media Counters Port 1 Alignment Errors A frame containing bits that do not total an integral multiple of eight FCS Errors A frame containing eight bits at least one of which has b
268. itState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close This parameter along with Parameter 44 OutB Net IdIValue defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle 0 Goto PrFit Value 1 Ignore PrFit When set to 0 Output B opens or closes as determined by the setting in Parameter 44 This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43 OutB Net IdIState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Miscellaneous Configuration Group This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault 0 Disable 1 Enable Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Parameter Number 42 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OwtBNetidiState Parameternumber tl Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 O OutBNetidWale Parameternumber wo ooo Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Comm Override This parameter allows for local logic to override the absence of an 1 0 connection 0 Disa
269. itch Fault The Instruction Literature provides information on how to connect the input contactor and how to implement the logic Troubleshooting Attempt to reset the fault by removing all power to the unit and restarting If the fault persists replace control module DB1 Open Fault Control Supervisor Object DB1 Fault Attribute Bit 4 A DBI Open fault is issued when Bus Voltage is greater than the DB1 Voltage Level and no DB1 resistor current has been detected If 5 consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage greater than the DB1 Level is detected along with no DB1 resistor current flow then an open DB1 fault is recorded This fault is intended to notify the customer of an open DBI resistor or open wire The fault is disabled when the DB1 Resistor Sel Parameter 182 is Disabled Troubleshooting DB1 monitor expected to see current flow and measured none Likely cause is an open DBI resistor loose DB1 resistor connector or open wire in DB1 cable Check DB1 cable connector for tightness If problem persists remove DBI resistor cable connector from unit and check DB1 resistance If DBI resistor is open replace DB1 resistor Otherwise replace control module DB1 VBus Link Fault Control Supervisor Object DB1 Fault Attribute Bit 6 For proper operation the DB1 monitors parameters from the Drive internally inside the ArmorStart If the internal communications to the drive is lost then this fault is issued Since
270. itional voltage unless Option 5 is selected Group Drive Advanced Setup See Table 27 for details Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 14 Default Value 8 Table 27 Boost Select Options Options Description 0 Custom V Hz 1 30 0 VT 2 35 0 VT Variable Torque Typical fan pump curves 3 40 0 VT 4 45 0 VT 5 0 0 no IR 6 0 0 7 2 5 CT default for 5 Hp 4 0 kW Drive 8 5 0 CT default 9 7 5 CT Constant Torque 10 10 0 CT 11 12 5 CT 12 15 0 CT 13 17 5 CT 14 20 0 CT To activate 170 Preset Freq 0 set 138 Speed Reference to 4 Preset Freq When a Digital Input is set to Accel 2 amp Decel 2 and the input is active that input overrides the settings in this table Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 185 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Figure 77 Boost Select 100 1 2 Motor NP Volts 2 50 F L 4 a3 x ii a aol v i Tere Settings 5 14 t 50 100 P132 Motor NP Hertz Start Boost Parameter Number 185 Sets the boost voltage of Parameter Related Parameters A pa A 84 131 Motor NP Volts and redefines the et Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 Access Rul GET SET Boost Select 0 Custom V Hz and ARIS Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode 0 V Data Type UINT Hz Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 1 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 25 0 Default Value 2 5
271. k Identification Status Vendor Allen Bradley Major Fault Recoverable Product Type Motor Starter Minor Fault None Product Code 284E FYD1P4 Internal State Major fault Revision VW Serial Number A0120B9D Configured Configured Product Name ArmorStart 284E PF40 Owned Owned 480 0 5HP Module Identity Match Reset Module Status Running OK Cancel Help This tab displays general identification information as well as status information about the ArmorStart device It is important to note that the information that is displayed in this tab is not constantly updated After you click the Module Info tab the AOP queries the ArmorStart device once for the information displayed in this tab and does not query the ArmorStart for the values again If after the initial query the status of the ArmorStart device changes for example a fault occurs the change in the status will not be automatically updated The Refresh button must be pressed to request the AOP for another ArmorStart query Note A connection status offline online downloading or uploading is provided at the bottom left of the tab window The connection status appears in all tabs 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5 Internet Protocol Tab Click the Internet Protocol tab to display the following Module Properties ENBT 284E FVD1P4 1 1 BAX
272. k configuration P1 P2 set to auto negotiate to minimize network issues But if this is not acceptable you must verify that all devices on the network are set to the same setting or network issues may result Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 87 Chapter 4 88 Product Commissioning Parameter Configuration ArmorsStart Ethernet IP embedded web server provides the user the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having to access RSLogix 5000 To view the device configuration from the web server select the Parameters folder For the parameter configuration the user logs in through the Administrative Settings or when prompted Figure 68 Starter Setup Z Rockwell Automation Microsoft Internet Explorer E loj x File Edit view Favorites Tools Help a O x B PN search She Favorites gt tee A ia Address http 192 168 1 11 x Eco Links Allen Bradley WING Nelgsie 1gav Ach oll EY WW BIO Basic Status Network Config Starter Protect User I O Config Rockwell Automation Misc Config Starter Display Y Starter Setup Home Ga Parameters Basic status 106 E network Config E starter Protect user 1 0 Config 108 P misc config F Starter Display P Starter Setup Edit Cancel Ci Diagnostics 2 Administrative Settings eps File Parameter Name Data Type Value FLA Setting INT 5 107 Overload Class USINT 15 Ol Reset
273. k that the local disconnect is in the ON position Check for a power quality issue take appropriate corrective actions Check that 3 phase power is present Press the local reset or send the unit anetwork reset 23 Drive Comm Loss PF Fault Code 81 The PowerFlex VFD lost communications with the MCB This is most likely due to a loss of control power or network power Check that control power and the network power are both present Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset 28 Base EEPROM The MCB can t read the base module s EEPROM or isn t communicating correctly with the base module In the EtherNet IP units Parameter 63 Base Trip provides more detail as to why the base module may not be communicating properly with the control module Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit Verify that the control module is seated correctly in the base module Check the connector on the control module for bent or broken pins 41 DB1 Comm 220 The MCB has lost communications with the Dynamic Brake DB1 board or the EEPROM on the DB1 board may be corrupt Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Resetting Device to Factory Defaults Diagnostics Chapter 9 To factory reset the base and control module see parameter 47 Set to Defaults To reset only the VFD in the control module for Bul
274. kwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation about us sustainability ethics product environmental compliance page Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 3
275. l interrupt connection s to this module and to any modules connected through this module 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Chapter 9 c You should see the yellow inhibit symbol next to the ArmorStart in the I O Configuration tree showing that the module is inhibited fi Backplane CompactLogix System ff 1769 L35E Fault_Reset 1769 L35E Ethernet Port LocalENB E s Ethernet 1769 L35E Ethernet Port LocalENB a 280E F122 104 4 ArmorStart A A ComnartRis Inra 10 Execute the instruction by toggling the Reset input that was created earlier a To energize the bit left mouse click the input and press CTRL T To de energize the bit press CTRL T again b You should see the status LEDs on the ArmorStart display the Reset and Power Cycle sequence You should also see the Done DN bit of the message turn green indicating that the reset was successful SG Message Message Control AS_Reset miai 11 Check ifthe reset works by bringing the ArmorStart s web browser back up and checking that the User Name is Administrator and that there is no set password 12 Uninhibit the ArmorStart module through the AOP and plug any I O connections back into the ArmorStart Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 227 Chapter9 Diagnostics Notes 228 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Chapter 10
276. l sizes don t match an Invalid connection size general status 0x01 extended status 0x0109 error code will be returned Exclusive Owner Connection This connection type is used for controlling the outputs of the module and shall not be dependent on any other condition Only one exclusive owner connection can be opened against the module If an exclusive owner connection is already opened Connection in use general status 0x01 extend status 0x0100 shall be returned an error code e Connection point O gt T shall be Assembly object Instance 3 162 or 166 162 for product codes lt 0x100 only 166 for product codes gt 0x100 only e Connection point T gt O shall be Assembly object Instance 52 150 or 151 150 for product codes lt 0x100 only 151 for product codes gt 0x100 only Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 307 Appendix B 308 CIP Information Listen Only Connection This connection is dependent on another connection to exist If that connection exclusive owner or input only is closed the listen only connection shall be closed as well It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the Forward_Open be zero e Number of supported listen only connections equals two shared with exclusive owner and listen only connection e Connection point O gt T shall be Assembly object Instance 192 Listen only heartbeat e Connection poin
277. lCtrl_0 2 FreqCommand Low xxx x Hz 3 FreqCommand High xxx x Hz 4 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln PtO5Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 5 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt9Deviceln Pt8Deviceln Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 351 AppendixF Application Examples Bulletin 284 VFD Preset Speed Example 352 DeviceLogix can be used to select one of multiple preset frequencies cooperatively with the PLC or independently based on user input This can be done using the four digit inputs or the frequency control bits in DeviceLogix The digital inputs provide the user the most flexibility but can be more complex to configure If a preset speed is needed the simpler approach is to use frequency control that is found in the produced network bits of DeviceLogix If you prefer not to apply DeviceLogix for preset speeds then implement the digit inputs to select preset speed via Instance 166 found in Chapter 5 The following example demonstrates the use of frequency control bits in DeviceLogix Frequency control Freq Cntl bits allow a maximum of 4 Preset Speeds each preset has a predefined accel or decel reference If more are required then digital inputs must be configured and properly used The example focuses on Frequency Control 2 1 0 in the Produced Network Bit Table 68 Note that there are oth
278. le 3 99 x Duty Cycle Limited 3 99 of Duty Cycle S Curve Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp as S Curve Time is added half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp Parameter Number 182 Related Parameters 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 99 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 183 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 disabled 184 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Figure 76 S Curve Example Accel Time 10 Seconds S Curve Setting 50 S Curve Time 10 x 0 5 5 Seconds Total Time 10 5 15 Seconds Target 2 Target ld 1 2SCurveTime Accel Time id bs Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 50 S Curve l a 1 25 Curve Time gt 2 5 Seconds d 10 Seconds 2 5 Seconds 4 Total Time to Accelerate Accel Time S Curve Time gt i Boost Select Parameter Number 184 Sets the boost voltage of Parameter Related Parameters 104 131 132 185 187 225 131 Motor NP Volts and redefines the Access Rule GET SET Volts per Hz curve Active when Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode 0 V Hz Drive Data Type UINT may add add
279. ler overload relay directly protects the conductors that are connected to the input and output of that controller and the motor that the controller supplies The combined load conductor is protected by the tripping of one or more of the controller overload relays that remove s the overloaded motor s before the combined load conductor overheats 5 Requirement Conductor Ampacity The minimum ampacity of conductors Text 12 5 3 Motor circuit conductors supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the motor full load current rating 12 5 4 Combined load conductors shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the full load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full load current ratings of all other connected motors Analysis Referring to Figure 110 a b and c explain the method for calculating the minimum required conductor ampacity for each of these conductors input and output conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers a input and output conductors of Bulletin 294E controllers b and combined load conductors that supply Bulletin 290E 291E and 294E controllers c The currents I1 through I5 are the input currents to the controllers For the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers these are the same as the output motor currents For the Bulletin 294E controllers these currents are the rated input currents The example does not address conditi
280. letin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Bit Function 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2 Short Circuit Overload X Phase Loss X Reserved X Reserved X Control Power 1 0 Fault X Over Temperature X Phase Imbalance X A3 Power Loss X Reserved X Reserved X EEprom X HW Fault Cannot be disabled Pr Fault Reset Parameter Number 25 This parameter resets the Protection Fault Access Rule GET SET ona transition of 0 gt 1 Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Str Net FitState Parameter Number 26 This parameter along with Parameter 27 Access Rule GET SET Str Net FitValue defines how the starter Data Type BOOL responds when a fault occurs as determined by Parameter 27 Allows Group Starter Protection Starter to hold last state or go to FitValue on NetFaults Units 0 Goto Fault Value 1 Hold Last State Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Str Net FitValue This parameter determines how the starter is commanded in the event of a fault State the Starter goes to on a Net Fit if Parameter 26 Str Net FitState 0 Goto Fault Value 0 OFF 1 0N Str Net IdIState This parameter a
281. letin 284 see Parameter 141 Reset To Defaults Both these resets are limited and do not put the product completely in the out of box configuration The Type 1 Reset performs a full product reset to the out of box status SERVICE CODE 0X05 Class Code 0x0001 INSTANCE 1 Data USINT 1 You need to perform a Type 1 Reset if the login and password for the product is lost and forgotten WARNING A Type 1 Reset causes all parameters and web page login to revert to their factory defaults No user date is saved WARNING A Type 1 Reset should only be executed when necessary or when the login and password must be cleared and set to the factory default setting In the following example Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 PLC programming software is used to create a Type 1 Reset Other tools can be used provided the class instance and attribute values can be sent to the product s identify object 1 Within RSLogix 5000 from the File menu choose New to create a new project Make sure that the project is offline 2 Ifan Add On Profile AOP window is open click Cancel to close it at the bottom of the AOP screen 3 Close any internet browser windows including Internet Explorer that are being used to view the ArmorStart web browser IMPORTANT _ Forthose using an Internet Browser with multiple tabs open you need to close the entire browser window not just the tab within the ArmorStart browser 4 Unplug any inputs
282. lication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Class 1 Connections Class 1 connections are used to transfer I O data and can be established to the assembly object instances Each Class 1 connection establishes two data transports one consuming and one producing The heartbeat instances are used for connections that shall access only inputs Class 1 uses UDP transport Total numbers of supported Class 1 connections equals 2 total for exclusive owner input only listen only Supported Actual Packet Interval API 2 3200 ms Note that the minimum API can be higher if processor resources become a problem e T gt O Target to Originator Connection type point to point multicast e O gt T Originator to Target Connection type point to point e Supported trigger type cyclic change of state The producing instance can be assigned to multiple transports using any combination of multicast and point to point connection types Only one Exclusive owner connection are supported at each time If there is already an Exclusive owner connection that is established and an originator tries to establish a new Exclusive owner connection an Ownership conflict general status 0x01 extended status 0x0106 error code is returned For a connection to be established the requested data sizes must be an exact match of the connections points that the connection tries to connect to If the requested and actua
283. lication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 363 AppendixF Application Examples Reporting Examples 364 How to Report the RPM of the 284 Internal Fan To get the fan RPM of the fan an explicit get single message instruction is needed using a service of OxO00E The fan RPM can be read using the following CIA Class 0x00B4 Instance 1 and Attribute 103 The nominal fan rpm value is 2800 3000 RPM The ArmorStart trips once the fan speed falls below 62 1736 There is no FAN FAULT warning The user needs to develop their own warning PLC code using the CIA message referred above for critical applications How to report the Heat Sink Temperature of the 284 To get the heat sink temperature of the 284 an explicit get single message instruction is needed The heat sink temperature can be read using the following CIA Class 0x000F Instance 124 and Attribute 1 Service e hex Class f hex Instance 124 Attribute 1 hex Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Application Examples Appendix F How to Report the Last Four Faults By default the ArmorStart controller provides only the last fault as a parameter To retrieve the last four faults a PLC message instruction is required Class 0x0097 DPI Fault Object is used to extract a structure of information that is related to the last four faults The following example shows how to configure an explicit message to get all four fault logs To retri
284. ll Automation product EDS files are also available on the internet at http www ab com networks eds Fault diagnostics capabilities that are built in the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick restarting Protection Faults Protection Faults are generated when potentially dangerous or damaging conditions are detected Protection Faults are also known as Trips Table 1 Protection Faults Bulletin 280E 281E Trip Status Bulletin 284E Trip Status PowerFlex 40 Fault Codes Short Circuit Short Circuit Overload Overload Drive Codes 7 and 64 Phase Loss Phase Short Drive Codes 38 43 Reserved Ground Fault Drive Code 13 Reserved Stall Drive Code 6 Control Pwr Loss Control Pwr Loss Input Fault Input Fault Over Temperature Over Temperature Phase Imbalance Over Current Drive Codes 12 and 63 A3 Unswitched Power Loss A3 Unswitched Power Loss Reserved Internal Comm Drive Code 81 Reserved DC Bus Fault Drive Codes 3 4and 5 EEprom EEprom Drive Code 100 Hdw Flt Hdw Flt Drive Codes 70 and 122 Reserved Restart Retries Drive Code 33 Reserved Misc Fault Drive Codes 2 8 29 48 and 80 Included is DB1 monitoring or resistor issue Parameter Group Start Protection Parameter 24 PrFault Enable is used to enable and disable the above protection faults S
285. long with Parameter 29 Str Net IdlValue defines how the starter will respond when a network is idle as determined by Parameter 29 0 Goto Idle Value 1 Hold Last State Str Net IdlValue This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 Str Net IdlState is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N User 1 0 Configuration Group Anti bounce On Delay This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported ON Anti bounce Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 27 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 28 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 29 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 30 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Config Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 141 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Anti bounce OFF Delay Parameter Number 31 This parameter allows the installer to Ac
286. lticast group and only forward the multicast packets to the ports that are part of the multicast group IMPORTANT __ Notall switches support the IGMP snooping querier function that is snooping Those that do not support IGMP snooping querier require a router For switches that do support IGMP snooping you can configure them to conduct the polling IGMP snooping cannot control unicast or broadcast traffic To learn how to control unicast or broadcast traffic see Virtual Local Area Networks on page 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 249 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting This example assumes that the switch does not support IGMP snooping querier function so a router is required Figure 96 IGMP Snooping Example Plant Network Router sends out IGMP polls to determine members of a multicast group Switch listens to the polls and responses and Controller identifies members of each multicast group Consumer in TS 1 0 1 0 1 0 Multicast Producer Multicast Producer Multicast Producer Virtual Local Area Networks With a managed switch virtual local area networks VLAN can be established to segregate various kinds of network traffic and also increase security between the networks Multiple isolated networks could be created so that the traffic from one network does not burden the other network As with IGMP snoop
287. lue 0 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value 0 00 Parameter Number 216 Related Parameters 110 135 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value 0 00 BusRegMode ParameterNumber x ooo Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 218 Related Parameters 133 151 154 189 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 0A Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 1 8 Default Value Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Drive rated amps x 1 5 Skip Frequency Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate Skip Freq Band Determines the band width around Parameter 219 Skip Frequency Parameter 220 Skip Freq Band is split applying 1 2 above and 1 2 below the actual skip frequency A setting of 0 0 disables this parameter Figure 81 Skip Frequency Band Command Frequenc lt quency Frequency Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Drive Output pf requency Parameter Number 219 Related Parameters 220 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value 0 0 Hz Pa
288. manded frequency Pt0ODeviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt01Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt02Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt03Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt04Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt05Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt06Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt07Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt08Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt09Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt10Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt11Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt12Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt13Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt14Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt15Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine 114 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Table 14 Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Controller Input Status Tags Tag Description Use Chapter 5 Fault Communication Fault between PLC and Device all 1 s Fault all 0 s Normal TripPresent Fault exists with unit WarningPresent Warning of potential fault RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse Ready Control Power and 3 phase present NetworkControlStatus Start and Stop command comes from ne
289. marked Open Wiring Cable so marked is equivalent to the present Type TC ER and can be used While the ArmorStart controller is intended for installation in factory floor environments of industrial establishments the following must be considered when locating the ArmorStart controller in the application e Cables including those for control voltage including 24V DC and communications are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic on a continuous basis e Location of the ArmorStart controller to minimize exposure to continual traffic is recommended If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be considered e Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent exposure and or damage e Additionally if conduit or other raceways are not used it is recommended that strain relief fittings be used when installing the cables for the control and power wiring through the conduit openings The working space around the ArmorStart controller may be minimized as the ArmorStart does not require examination adjustment servicing or maintenance while energized In lieu of this service the ArmorStart controller is meant to be unplugged and replaced after proper lockout tag out procedures have been employed The Hand Off Auto HOA is a factory installed option that the user may select The HOA keypad may require the ArmorStart controlle
290. mat Rejects O D r P Fault emails o Connection Close Other Rejects o A Fault recovered emails o Connection Timeouts o E Email send failures o Latest SMTP error No error Seconds Between Refresh Disable Refresh with 0 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Commissioning Chapter 4 Network Configuration To access the network configuration log in to the Administrative Setting The factory default login is Administrator The factory default password is not used The user should change the password to ensure unauthorized personnel do not access and modify the device configuration Figure 67 Network Configurations ArmorStart 284E PF40 480V 0 5HP Pa Network Configuration Values marked with will be used after next restart Ethernet Interface Configuration Dynamic DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gstevey Primary Name Server 10 10 10 101 H 255 255 255 0 10 10 10 1 e 10 10 10 1 Secondary Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Domain Name Host Name Ethernet Link Configuration P1 Autonegotiate Ethernet Link Configuration P2 10 HDX 10 FOX Apply Changes 100 HDX 100 FOX From this screen you can change the Ethernet Configuration For example in the above image the default IP address was changed from 192 168 1 1 to 10 10 10 101 To access the webpage after a power cycle the new address must be used It is also important to leave the Ethernet lin
291. mation Appendix B Interface Object CLASS CODE 0x00B4 The following class attribute are supported 1 Get Revision UINT 1 or DOL 2 for Inverters A single instance Instance 1 of the Interface Object is supported with the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Min Max Default Description USINT rev 1 7 Get Set Prod Assy Word 0 UINT rev 2 1 Defines Word 0 of Assy 120 USINT rev 1 8 Get Set Prod Assy Word 1 UINT rev 2 5 Defines Word 1 of Assy 120 USINT rev 1 9 Get Set Prod Assy Word 2 UINT rev 2 6 Defines Word 2 of Assy 120 USINT rev 1 10 Get Set Prod Assy Word 3 UINT rev 2 7 Defines Word 3 of Assy 120 13 Get Set Starter COS Mask WORD 0 OXFFFF OxFFFF Change of state mask for starter bits 15 Get Set Autobaud Enable BOOL 0 1 1 1 enabled 0 disabled 16 Get Set Consumed Assy USINT 0 to 185 162 VFD 166 3 162 also for drives 166 191 and 192 17 Get Set Produced Assy USINT 100 to 187 150 VFD 151 52 150 161 also for drive 151 19 Get Set Set To Defaults BOOL Otol 0 0 No action 1 Reset 23 Get 1 0 Produced Size 0 t020 24 Get 1 0 Consumed Size USINT 0 to 16 30 Get DNet Voltage UINT DeviceNet Voltage 50 Get Set PNB COS Mask WORD 0 to 0x00FF 0 Change of state mask for PNBs 4 a Multiple Identity Object instances are unlocked when 64 Get Set Unlock Identity USINT 0 this attribute is set to the value 0x99
292. meter Number 206 Related Parameters 115 205 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 sec Maximum Value 60 0 sec Default Value 15 0 sec Parameter Number 214 Related Parameters 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 10 0 Hz Default Value 2 0 Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 193 Chapter 7 194 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Process Time Lo Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134 Minimum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 Process Display indicates the duration of the process Process Time Hi Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135 Maximum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 Process Display indicates the duration of the process Bus Reg Mode Enables the bus regulator 0 Disable 1 Enabled Current Limit 2 Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs This parameter is only active if Parameters 151 154 Digital In x Sel is set to Option 25 Current Lmt2 and is active Parameter Number 215 Related Parameters 110 134 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Hz Minimum Va
293. mmunication and network overrides are disabled as shown below Figure 117 shows the DeviceLogix program This allows the user to select one of three predefined frequencies that are based on two network bits Figure 117 DeviceLogix Program Rabbani Po ae BOR Boolean Or When FreaCtrol 1 and2 on Preset Freqency 3 ____ eee Preset Frequency 2 Once you exit the DeviceLogix editor verify that the logic is Enabled otherwise the preset frequency control does not operate See Figure 118 Figure 118 Logic enabled v e t Author preset freq example Launch Editor 354 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Application Examples Appendix F This simple PLC program is used to select one of three preset speeds speed 1 2 or 3 For the purpose of this example speed 1 2 amp 3 are BOOL bits but they can be any valid input Notice that there is an interlock for speed 1 and speed 2 to ensure that they do not trigger simultaneously This would accidentally cause speed 3 to run REE Download the finished program file to the PLC In order for the parameters and DeviceLogix program to update in the device verify the PLC is in program mode and open the AOP for the Bulletin 284E Program 2 Program Mode E T Batek 3 F Battery OK No Edits a Bane Select the Parameters and DeviceLogic tab This forces a correlation between the program file and
294. module The Ring Statistics web page of a scanner provides a summary of the module s operating state in a DLR application The most commonly monitored fields are circled in the graphic and described in the table that follows Aten Bradtey pata PALE P eia D tome Diagnostics Network Bl Advanced Diagnostics 5 Browse Chassis a Diagnostic Overview Network Settings Application Connections Bridge Connections Ethernet Statistics Y Ring Statistics Diagnostic Overview Network Topology Linear Star Network Settings Application Connections Bridge Connections Ring Supervisor Ethernet Statistics Ring Supervisor Mode Pst Active Node on Port 1 Pst Active Node on Port 2 0 0 0 0 000000000000 Ring Statistics Ring Protocol Participants Gl TcP 1P Network come Honoa Ring Faults Detected System Data 5 zi Ring Advanced Config asi Event Log Beacon Interval 400 ven Assert Log Beacon Timeout 1960 Heap CIP Statistics Supervisor Precedence 0 General Memory Statis Protocol VLAN ID Seconds Between Refresh 15 Disable Refresh with 0 This table describes the field that is most commonly used on the Ring Statistics web page Table 8 Ring Statistics Web Page Field Specifies Ring Supervisor Ring Supervisor Mode Whether a module is configured to function as supervisor node or a ring node Ring Supervisor Status Whether a module that is conf
295. morStart RS485 DSI Drive Setup 284E a 9 4 37 Stop Mode Sets the Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Ramp EM Brk Drive Setup 284E 138 Speed Reference Sets the Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284E 5 tom Port Drive Setup 284E ArmorStart 139 Accel Time 1 Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases 10 0 Secs Drive Setup 284E 140 Decel Time 1 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases 10 0 Secs Drive Setup 284E 141 Reset To Defaults Used to reset drive to factory default settings 0 Ready Idle Drive Setup 284E 143 Motor OL Ret Enables Disables the Motor Overload Retention function 0 Disabled Drive Setup 284E Table 29 Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions Parameter igs Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Digital In 1 Sel Digital In 2 Sel n alake 3 151 154 Ke Selects the function for the digital inputs See Table 24 Drive Advanced Setup Digital In 3 Sel Digital In 4 Sel 155 Relay Out Sel Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts T pees Drive Advanced Setup Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 156 Relay Out Level 155 Relay Out Sel is 6 7 8 10 16 17 18 or 20 0 0 Drive Advanced Setup Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 Speed 169 Internal Freq Reference is set to 1 Internal Freq 60 0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup Preset Freq 0 Preset Freq 1 Preset Freq 2 P
296. motor group installation e Therefore the terms factory assembly and separate assemblies do not change the listing requirements All drives and contactor based motor controllers that are listed for 430 53 C installation are marked Suitable for motor group installation In the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79 motor controllers that are listed for group installation may be installed in multiple motor branch circuits according to either of two alternative sets of requirements The first is found in 7 2 10 4 2 the second in 7 2 10 4 3 The requirements of 7 2 10 4 3 are similar to those in 430 53 C of NFPA 70 while the requirements of 7 2 10 4 2 are found only in NFPA 79 This appendix explains the requirements of 7 2 10 4 2 rather than those of 7 2 10 4 3 because this is the simpler method to use when applying the ArmorStart family of motor controllers The user must determine the requirements NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 to use for the application When making this determination it is necessary to understand the ArmorStart product characteristics and useful to understand the definition of industrial machinery The section of this appendix ArmorStart Product Family specifies whether a motor controller is suitable for installation according to NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 or both The definition of industrial machinery is found in 3 3 56 of NFPA 79 and 670 2 of Article 670 Industrial Machinery in NFPA 70 These conventio
297. munications Cables 10V rms PE 150 kHz 80 MHz Radiated Emissions Class A Group 1 Equivalent to C2 emissions EMC Immunity Levels Electrostatic Discharge 4 KV contact and 8 kV Air Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10V m 80 MHz 1 GHz 3V m 1 4 GHz 2 GHz 1V m 2 0 GHz 2 7 GHz Other Rating 2 kV Power Fast Transient 2 kV PE 1 kV Communications and Control Surge Transient TkV 12 L L 2 kV 2 L N Earth 280_ __ 10A 0 24 1 2A 280_ ___ 10B 0 5 2 5A Overload Current Range 280_ ___ 10 1 1 5 5A 280_ ___ 25D 3 2 16A Trip Classes 10 15 20 Trip Rating 120 of Full Load current FLC Setting Number of poles 3 Refer to Altitude Derating on page 269 for derating guide Refer to Motor Overload Trip Curves on page 259 256 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Chapter 11 UL NEMA IEC UL 508 CSA 22 2 No 14 EN IEC 60947 4 7 EN IEC 60947 4 1 Standards Compliance CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006 95 EC EMC Directive 2004 108 EC ccc ODVA for EtherNet IP Certifications cULus File No E3125 Guides NLDX NLDX7 EtherNet IP Version Control and 1 0 Power Requirements A1 A20 A3 A2 A1 A20 A3 A2 A3 A2 Units W 0 HOA W HOA Control Voltage Volts 24V DC Module Inrus
298. n Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 DeviceOut Data Parameter Number 3 This parameter provides status of network Access Rule GET device outputs Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 6 5 4 3 0 X Pt0ODeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut X Pt03DeviceOut X Pt04DeviceOut X Pt05DeviceQut X Pt06DeviceOut Pt07DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut X Pt10DeviceOut X Pt11DeviceQut X Pt12DeviceOut X Pt13DeviceOut X Pt14DeviceOut X Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 151 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Trip Status Parameter Number 4 This parameter provides trip identification Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1J0 X Short Circuit X Overload X Phase Short X Ground Fault X Stall X Control Power X 1 0 Fault X Over Temperature X Over Current X A3 Power Loss X Internal Comm X DC Bus Fault X EEprom X HW
299. n UINT 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT 3 Get Number of Instances UINT 4 Get Optional Attribute List Array of UINT 6 Get Max Number Class Attribs UINT Two Class 1 connections for I O transfer are supported Six Class 3 explicit connections are supported The following instance attributes are supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Open Requests UINT Number of Forward Open service requests received 2 Get Set Open Format Rejects VINT na uy on Open service requests that were rejected 3 Get Set Open Resource Rejects UINT allah 1 ja t service requests that were rejected Number of Forward Open service requests that were rejected a Get Set Open Other Rejects OMT for reasons other than bad format or lack of resources 5 Get Set Close Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests received 6 Get Set Close Format Requests UINT Mallar Tor Hl Close service requests that were rejected 7 Get Set Close Other Requests UNT A IRE sc a el pete 3 Get Set Connection Timeouts UINT Total number of connection timeouts that have occurred in connections that are controlled by this Connection Manager The following services are implemented for the Connection Manager Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name OE hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 4E hex No Yes Forward_Close 54 hex No Yes Forward_Open 306 Rockwell Automation Pub
300. n a circuit capable of delivering not more than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480Y 277V AC maximum when protected by Cat No 140U D6D3 C30 circuit breaker not rated more than 480V 30 A having an interrupting rating not more than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes WARNING The total circuit impedance including each cable assembly s own impedance must be low enough to ensure any short circuit or ground fault current that can flow through any assembly is large enough to operate the magnetic trip of the Cat No 140U D63 C circuit breaker See your local electrical code for acceptable practices for this evaluation Fusing Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes SCCR at 600V AC maximum when protected by CC J and T class fuses rated 40 A non time delay or 20 A time delay Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 59 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Ethernet and 1 0 Connections ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller uses a sealed D coded M12 micro style ethernet connector Figure 36 EtherNet IP Connector M12 Female Ethernet Connector view into connector Pin 1 White Orange TxData Pin 2 White Green RecV Data Pin 3 Orange TxData Pin 4 Green RecV Data Figure 37 1 0 Receptacle Input Pinout M12 Pin 1 24V A3 pwr Pin 2 Input 1 Pin 3 Common Pin 4 Input 2 Pin 5 NC no connection
301. nable Waiting O Stat O Done Dor E Locat1 0lPescription ABA763 Run BOOL Eror Code Extended Error Code Error Path Error Text OK Cancel v Program h Type 5 for the Service Code 1 for the Class and 1 for the Instance Leave the Attribute value at 0 Once you have added these values the Service Type should automatically change to Device Reset Message Configuration AS_Reset x Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic z Sais Device Reset gt Source Element ype Source Length 1 Bytes Servi a zam el Instance if Attribute 0 Hex KEE O Enable Enable Waiting Start O Done Done Lenath 0 Eror Code Extended Error Code T Timed Out Error Path Error Text 0K Cancel Apply Help i Click Communication at the top of the window Click Browse select the ArmorStart that is in your project and click OK This selects the ArmorStart as the device you are going to send the reset message to Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 225 Chapter9 Diagnostics Message Configuration AS_Reset Configuration Communication Tag eren SCS som Broadcast z Communication Method eor pH C a foarann E cet abi Source Link fO E Destination Node O H Octa I Connected R Cache Connections e O Enable Enable Waiting Start O Done Done Length 0 Eror Code
302. nce meets application requirement Length is user selectable based on a suffix added to the catalog number For a length of 500 10 mm add M05 to the end of the catalog number For a length of 1000 10 mm add M1 to the end of the catalog number Note Duty Cycle that is listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration For constant regen at full speed duty cycle capability is half of what is listed Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100 braking torque where possible Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 279 Chapter12 Accessories Application Type 2 represents more than 100 braking torque where possible up to a maximum of 150 Figure 105 Bulletin 284 Dynamic Brake Resistor Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes 5 3 4 AB NS y ll WD ij EEA GROUND resi ng i m A B d D E F G H J Cat No mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mmi in mm in mm in mm in 284R 091P500 21545 23545 284R 120P1K2 89 3 8 46 0 2 M05 0 5 m 9 25 0 2 60 2 127 12 54 6042 50415 TRE 3 5 0 12 42045 Mi 1m0 44045 2 36 0 08 5 0 49
303. nch Circuit on Industrial Machinery CIP Information Table of Contents Three Phase Power Field Installed Receptacles 04 275 S ling Capstone on ea ee hea Rava een E E EE E aaa 276 Handle and Cord Accessories ie ve nn nnunnnnnn nener eb eee wey 276 Dynamic Braking Resistors lt scivica sts atowiwiobee bein oace nae 277 Sensorless Vector Control SVC Minimum Resistance and Recommended Modules for Option DB 277 Bulletin 284E Option DB IP20 Resistor 44 278 Sensorless Vector Control SVC Recommended Dynamic Brake Modules for Option DB1 IP67 Resistor 279 Appendix A Introductions s as cli aloe nate ce eee a ahr aerate 281 ArmorStart Product Family owastcc crs ian doeseehiesteeacdaecauels 284 Multiple Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group Installation Generals vee net poet tthe eit ce aiuwaas 285 Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7 2 10 4 1 and TONGA ON cases ne MAGNE OL ek ane nalts 287 Complete ext hci avin pen aae AE eels ecards 287 Explanatory Example n tect os sda cee We lade eisaas 289 Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E Controllers aise ey ots eel oh bss seks hound ool 295 Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers b 295 Combined Load Conductors c udteae c sarrn ag eo uaunteseg wk Lacearns 295 Appendix B High Level Product Description xcs cane sve ihe ivnat sees 297 Product
304. nded operation the adapter must be assigned a fixed IP your adapter Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control The embedded web server allows the user to view information and configure the ArmorStart controller via a web browser The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default IMPORTANT The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel If the Login and password are lost you will need to reset the device to factory defaults via the Programmable Logic Controller PLC Note The configuration will be lost Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 21 Chapter1 Product Overview E mail Notification Configuration The embedded web server supports configuration of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Once properly configured the motor controller e mails the user with specific fault trip messages EtherNet IP LED Status Indication EtherNet IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs Figure 6 EtherNet IP LED 2 2 Ss a Control Module LED Status and Reset Link Activity Status LEDS Ethernet Link Activity Status Port 1 LED Color Bicolor Green Yellow Ethernet Link2 Activity Status Port 2 LED Color Bicolor Green Yellow MOD LED Bicolor Red Green represents the ethernet module status NET LED Bicolor Red
305. ng of the fuses do not occur Supplementary Note 2 In this appendix a fuse having a rating of any class means a fuse having the let through characteristics of an Class RK 5 fuse Class RK 5 fuses are assumed to have the maximum let through of any class of fuse For this reason the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are marked for use with fuses without a restriction to a particular class have been tested with and are intended to be used with fuses having a class of RK 5 Of course fuses of a class that have lower let throughs than Class RK 5 such as Class CC J or T are also acceptable A fuse having a rating of any class also restricts the fuse to those that have been evaluated for use as branch circuit protection devices This means that semiconductor fuses used to protect power electronic equipment or supplemental fuses cannot be used to protect the multiple motor branch circuit Supplementary Note 3 There are four complementary ratings relevant to the specified maximum branch circuit protection of 7 2 10 4 1 They are the fuse class the maximum fuse rating the voltage rating and connection of the source 480Y 277 V and the available fault current of the source Applying the controllers according to these four ratings means that a fault on the output of all controllers and internal faults for Bulletin 294 controllers will not result in a shock or fire hazard Supplementary Note 4 In this example the assumption is made
306. nits e Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Str Net IdlValue Parameter Number 29 This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET starter assumes when the network is idle Data T BOOL and Parameter 28 Str Net IdIState is set Sa pS to 0 Group Starter Protection 0 0FF 1 0N Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 162 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 User 1 0 Configuration Group Anti bounce On Delay This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported ON Anti bouce Anti bounce OFF Delay This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported OFF Anti bouce In Sink Source This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source 0 Sink 1 Source OutA Pr FitState This parameter along with Parameter 34 OutA Pr FitValue defines how Output A will respond when a trip occurs 0 Goto PrFit Value 1 Ignore PrFlt When set to 1 Output A continues to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output A opens or closes as determined by the setting in Parameter 34 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Parameter Number 30 Access Rule GET SE
307. nk Status Speed Duplex Autonegotiate Status Enabled Active 100 Mbps 4 Full Duplex 4 Autonegotiate Speed and Duplex lt _ _ __ If And you Then Link Status is Active Do not want to change the status No action is required Inactive Want to establish communication on the network Reconfigure the module or port that is inactive Speed is 100 or 1000 Mbps Do not want to change your port speed No action is required Important 100 Mbps is the default port speed Want to reduce your port speed to 10 Mbps You must manually configure your module and reset your module 10 Mbps Want to increase your port speed to 100 Mbps Reset your module Do not want to change your port speed No action is required Duplex is Full Are sending large amounts of data No action is required Important Full Duplex is the default port setting Full duplex ports eliminate collisions because each device has separate channels for the transmission and receipt of large amounts of data Half Are not sending large amounts of data No action is required Important Delays due to collisions or switch traffic are usually negligible but can become a problem if you need to send much data Are sending large amounts of data Change your module s Duplex setting to Full Autonegotiate Status Speed and or Are using a fiber converter Change your module s Autonegotiate status to None Is Duplex Important Fiber links do not support a
308. nless a motor controller is listed for group installation its listing covers only individual motor circuit installation and installing it in a general multiple motor circuit violates the NEC and NFPA 79 e This listing is physically important because it ensures the controller s short circuit current rating is valid with the larger fuses and circuit breakers necessary to operate the multiple motor circuit e Ifa motor controller is not listed for group installation the installer must add fuses or a circuit breaker in each motor controller s input circuit e So the group installation listing is important because it ensures the controller s short circuit current rating applies to the multiple motor branch circuit and eliminates the requirement for the additional input circuit protective device s From the perspective of the ArmorStart product family being listed for group installation means one set of fuses or one circuit breaker may protect a branch circuit that has two or more of these motor controllers that are connected to it This appendix refers to this type of branch circuit as a multiple motor branch circuit The circuit topology that is shown in Figure 106 is one configuration but not the only possible configuration of a multiple motor branch circuit In these circuits a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker protects multiple motors their controllers and the circuit conductors The motors may be any mixture of power ra
309. ns are used throughout this appendix First although all equipment is connected to a three phase electrical supply all figures are shown as one line diagrams Second although all ArmorStart motor controllers are listed for group installation with both fuses and a specific family of inverse time circuit breakers this appendix considers only fuses This is done to avoid repetitive explanations with minor but necessary qualifications for circuit breakers Generally the principles for selecting the fuses also apply to selecting inverse time circuit breakers Third all references unless indicated otherwise are to NFPA 79 2012 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 283 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery ArmorStart Product Family 284 Note The following example uses an ArmorStart LT circuit This provides a more comprehensive example Figure 106 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit Electrical Supply Disconnecting Means Final Overcurrent gt lt Single Set of Fuses Device NFPA 79 3 3 10 Branch Circuit The Circuit Conductors Between the Final Overcurrent Device Protecting the Circuit and the Outlet s 70 100 Any Mixture of Motor Controller n Technologies i j Ya HP 2HP 5HP 5HP 1HP Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294 Overload Overload Ove
310. nstance Service Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single CLASS CODE 0x001E 314 No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group Object Instance 1 exists for all ArmorStart units Instance 2 exists for drive units only Instances 1 contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4 for DOL Soft Starter 10 for Inverters 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DOP Instances 6 Get Set Command BOOL 0 Idle 1 Run 0 No Override go to safe state 104 Get Set Network Status Overrride BOOL 1 Override run local logic 105 Get Set Comm Status Overrride BOOL 0 No Override go to safe state 1 Override run local logic Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Instance 2 contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4 4 Get Binding Array of UINT 5 6 7 8 7 Get Set Fault Action BOOL 0 Fault Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set Fault Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 O0n 9 Get Set Idle Action BOOL 0 Idle Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 10 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0n 113 Get Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 Pr Fault Value Attribute 1 Ignore 114 Get Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0n The following common services are
311. nswitched power Current Available 50 mA max per input 200 mA any single point Rated Operation Voltage 26 4V DC Rate Insulation Voltage 250V Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC UL 2000V AC IEC Type of Control Circuit Solid state sourcing output Type of Current 24V DC Conventional Thermal Current Ith 0 5 A each 1 A max combined Peak Output Current Current limited 2 8 amps 5 amps nominal 24V DC Output Ratings Sourced Type of Contacts Normally open N 0 from Control Circuit A1 Number of Contacts 2 A2 Load Types Resistive or light inductive Surge Suppression Integrated diode clamps 35V DC Thermo Protection Integrated short circuit and over current protection Maximum Cycle Rate 30 operations minute capacitive and inductive loads Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC Maximum On State Voltage 15V DC Maximum Output Maximum Off State Leakage Current 10 pA Beacon based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock Device Level Ring DLR Fault Recovery Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network 2 D coded 4 pin female M12 connectors Ports Embedded switch with 2 ports IP Address DHCP enabled by default Ethernet Port DHCP Timeout 30s Communication Rate 10 100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex Transported over both TCP and UDP Data Min of 500 1 0 packets second pps Support
312. nternal Comm X Hardware Fault X Control Module XIXIXIXIXIXIX X X X X Reserved Produced Assembly Config Group Int0ODeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 13 This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET SET a of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT Group Produced Assembly Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 263 Default Value 1 Int01DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 14 This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET SET oe of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT Group Produced Assembly Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 263 Default Value Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 4 159 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Int02DeviceOut Cfg This parameter is used to specify Int02DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 or 151 Int03DeviceOut Cfg This parameter is used to specify Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 or 151 Starter Protection Group Pr FitResetMode O This parameter is the Protection Fault reset mode 0 Manual 1 Automatic Faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition is corrected When Pr FitReset Mode is set to O manual mode and Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries Parameter Number 15 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group Produced Assembly Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 263 Default Value
313. ntrol 2 Deviceln Data 14 Int01DeviceOut Cfg 24 Pr Fault Enable 31 Anti bounce OFF Delay 9 Comm Override 49 Drvin Pr FitState 3 DeviceOut Data 15 Int02DeviceOut Cfg 25 Pr Fault Reset 32 In Sink Source 45 Keypad Mode 50 Drvin Pr FitValue 4 Trip Status 16 Int03DeviceOut Cfg 26 Str Net FitState 33 OutA Pr FitState 46 Keypad Disable 51 Drvin Net FitState 5 Starter Status 27 Str Net FitValue 34 OutA Pr FitValue 47 Set To Defaults 52 Drvin Net FitValue 6 InternalLinkStat 28 Str Net IdlState 35 OutA Net FitState 53 Drvin Net IdlState 7 Starter Command 29 Str Net IdlValue 36 OutA Net FitValue 54 Drvin Net IdlValue 22 Breaker Type 37 OutA Net IdlState 56 Base Enclosure 38 OutA Net IdlValue 57 Base Options 39 OutB Pr FitState 58 Wiring Options 40 OutB Pr FitValue 59 Starter Enclosure 41 OutB Net FitState 60 Starter Options 42 OutB Net FitValue 61 Last Pr Fault 43 OutB Net Idlstate 62 Warning Status 44 OutB Net IdlValue 63 Base Trip Bulletin280E 281E Units Only Bulletin 284E Units Only Starter Display Drive Display Drive Setup Drive Advanced Setup 101 Phase A Current 101 Output Freq 131 Motor NP Volts 151 Digital In 1 Sel 181 DC Brake Level 201 Program Lock 102 Phase B Current 102 Commanded Freq 132 Motor NP Hertz 152 Digital In 2 Sel 182 DB Resistor Sel 205 Comm Loss Action 103 Phase C Current 103 Output Current 133 Motor OL Current 153 Digital In 3 Sel 183 S Curve 206 Comm Loss Time 104 Average Current 104 Output Voltage 134 Minimum Freq 154 Digital In 4 Sel 18
314. ntrol power media Motor Cable With every ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller a 3 meter unshielded 4 conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard If the optional Electromagnetic Interference EMI Filter is selected for Bulletin 284E units a shielded 4 conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard DeviceLogix DeviceLogix is a stand alone Boolean program that resides within the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller DeviceLogix is programmed locally using the AOP and implements Boolean math operations such as AND OR NOT Timers Counters and Latches DeviceLogix can run as a stand alone application independent of the network However 24V DC via A3 unswitched control power must be maintained Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Factory Installed Options Product Overview Chapter 1 Optional HOA Keypad Configuration Bulletin 280E 281E only The ArmorStart controller offers two optional factory installed Hand Off Auto HOA configurations Standard and Forward Reverse HOA Figure 8 Optional HOA Configuration Bulletin 280E left 281E right HANDI AUTO OFF HA AUTO OFF BE Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function Bulletin 284E only The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function allows for local start stop control with capabilities to jog in forward reverse motor directions Figure 9 Optional HOA with Jog Function Configuration A B Allen
315. o 131 Get Set Trip Reset Level USINT 0 100 Default 75 1500 Get Set High Speed Ena BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enable Bit 0 IP67 151 Get Base Enclosure WORD Bit 2 PLe Cat 4 Bits 3 15 Reserved Bit 0 Output Fuse Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect Bits 3 7 Reserved 152 Get Base Options WORD Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Bit 10 15 Reserved Bit 0 Conduit 153 Get Wiring Options WORD Bits Round Media 316 Bit 2 28xG Gland Bits 3 15 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Attribute ID 154 Access Rule Get Name Data Type Value Bit 0 IP67 Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bit 2 28xG Ple Cat4 Bits 3 15 Reserved Starter Enclosure WORD 155 Get Bit 0 Full Keypad Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bit 2 Source Brake Bit 3 CP Brake Bit 4 Dynamic Brake Bit 5 Output Contactor Bit 6 EMI Filter Bit 7 0 10V Analog In Bit 8 Fused Dyn Brake Bits 9 15 Reserved Starter Options WORD 156 Get Last Pr Trip UINT 157 Get Bit 0 DB Faulted Bit 1 DB Overtemp Warning Bit 2 DB On Bit 3 DB Fit Reset Inhibit Bits 4 15 Reserved DB Status WORD 158 Get Bit 0 DB Overtemp Bit 1 DB OverCurrent Bit 2 DB UnderCurrent Bit 3 DB Shorted Switch Bit 4 DB Open Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 DB Bus Voltage Link Open Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 DB Comms Bits 9 15 Reserved
316. o Parameter 178 Jog Frequency according to Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel and ramps to stop when input becomes 11 Parameter 154 inactive A valid il ide thi d Default inactive A valid start will override this command Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 Jog Frequency according to Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel and ramps to stop when input becomes 12 Jog Reverse ae i inactive A valid start will override this command 16 MOP Up Increases the value of Parameter 169 Internal Freq at a rate 2 Hz per second Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz 17 MOP Down Decreases the value of Parameter 169 Internal Freq at a rate 2 Hz per second Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz 2770 Em Brk RIs If EM Brake function enabled this input releases the brake See parameter 155 and set to EM Brk Cntrol 22 Provides programmable control of Em Brk via digital input 1 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 179 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Relay Out Sel Parameter Number 155 Sets the condition that changes the state Related Parameters bare a an ae of the output relay contacts a lad Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 22 Default Value 22 Table 25 Options for the Output Relay Contacts Options Name Description Relay changes state when power is applied This indic
317. o by Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1 low byte ProducedWord1Param 11 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1 high byte ProducedWord1Param 12 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2 low byte ProducedWord2Param 13 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2 high byte ProducedWord2Param 14 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3 low byte ProducedWord3Param 15 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3 high byte ProducedWord3Param Identifies if a Communication Fault exists If a communication loss is present the PLC writes four bytes of 1 s to this tag The user should monitor this tag to ensure the data is valid IMPORTANT The user PLC control program should monitor the I Fault tag to ensure the data is accurate When a communications fault occurs the data in the consume and produce tags may not accurately reflect the status Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 117 Chapter 5 118 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Table 18 Bulletin 280E 281E Controller Input Status Tags Controller Name Logix Tag Name DEMO_REV Fault DEMO_REV Fault DEMO_REV TripPresent DEMO_REV I TripPresent DEMO_REV WarningPresent DEMO_REV WarningPresent
318. of Control Module that the EtherNet IP board is connected to Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 311 AppendixB CIP Information 312 The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Value Specified in Descriptor 2 Get Link Path Size USINT Array of 3 Get Link Path BYTE EPATH 4 Get Descriptor WORD 5 Get Data Type EPATH 6 Get Data Size USINT 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING 8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING 9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING 10 Get Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor 11 Get Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor 12 Get Default Value Specified in Descriptor 13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT 14 Get Scaling Devisor UINT 15 Get Scaling Base UINT 16 Get Scaling Offset INT 17 Get Multiplier Link UINT 18 Get Divisor Link UINT 19 Get Base Link UINT 20 Get Offset Link UINT 21 Get Decimal Precision USINT The following services are implemented for the Parameter Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x4b No Yes Get_Enum_String Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Inform
319. of the safety system it is important that the ArmorStart VFD is disabled before any line side contactor opening One way to accomplish this digitally is to configure one of digital inputs via parameter 151 154 to option 9 Then using the consumed instance 166 and the previously defined digit input to disable the VFD before the safety contactors opening This disables the ArmorStart allowing the contactors to open without damaging the VFD Alternatively if the safety circuit removes A1 A2 switched control power power before the safety contactors open this results in the same behavior and prevents damage to the VFD HOA operation can be prevented dynamically without parameter modification as follows The DeviceLogix program that is shown below turns off the keypad if both inputs are true and the keypad is in either OFF or AUTO mode BAND Bojolean And Renae SP thin lt EI Keypad Disable eIn2 Note If the user is already pressing the HAND button the program does not disable the keypad if the inputs are on after the HAND mode is actuated The motion disable program disables motion regardless of the HOA status PLC control or DeviceLogix Once motion disable is turned off the ArmorStart or PLC resumes control of the motor again The motion disable does not disable the HOA keypad The keypad operation appears normal but it does not control the run comm
320. ons of use such as an ambient temperature exceeding 30 C or more than three current carrying conductors in a cable or raceway In a particular application these conditions of use may require derating of the ampacity that is given in Table 12 5 1 This example assumes that under the conditions of use both conductors have sufficient ampacity for the application This means the 14 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than 9 5 A and the 10 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than 27 4 A Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Input and Output Conductors for Mechanical Controllers a Input and Output Conductors for Variable Frequency Drives b Combined Load Conductors c Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A AmorStart models that use an electromechanical contactor to control the motor the input current like the output current is just the current to the motor Therefore the minimum conductor ampacity for both input and output conductors is 125 percent of the motor full load current rating as specified in the text of 12 5 3 a Referring to Figure 110 the full load current rating of a three phase 460 V 5 Hp induction motor is 7 6 A Using this value both the input and output conductors must have an ampacity that is not less than 125 of 7 6 A or 9 5 A ArmorStart models that are a variable frequency AC drive
321. ontroller itself must be more robust For the circuit configuration shown in Figure 106 to be practical the ampere rating of the fuse must be large enough to operate all motors without opening under normal starting and running conditions This rating of fuse must be larger than the rating permitted to protect a circuit that supplies only a single motor and its controller In general as the rating of the fuse increases so does the magnitude of fault currents that flow until the fuse opens This higher magnitude of fault current results in more damage to the controller Therefore the additional controller robustness is necessary to withstand these higher fault currents without controller damage that could result in a shock or fire hazard Consequently to the controller being listed for group installation mostly means the UL testing is performed with fuses that have this practical and higher ampere rating This testing verifies that it is safe to apply this controller in a multiple motor branch circuit provided the fuse is of the same class and does not have a rating exceeding that marked on the controller The example in Figure 107 illustrates this increase in the maximum ampere rating of fuse that is permitted to protect a controller This example compares the rating of the fuse used in the UL testing of two variable frequency AC drive based motor controllers Both controllers have a rated power of 0 5 Hp anda rated output current of 1 5
322. operly Check that 1 0 Terminal 01 is active Check that Parameter 136 Start Source matches your configuration Check that Parameter 195 Reverse Disable is not prohibiting movement Run Autotune parameter 227 Drive is Faulted Cause s No value is coming form the source of the command Flashing red status light Clear fault Press Stop Cycle power Set Parameter 200 Fault Clear to Option 1 Clear Faults Cycle digital input is Parameters 151 154 Digital In x Sel is set to Option 7 Clear Faults Table 41 Drive Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command Indication The drive Run indicator is lit and output is 0 Hz Corrective Action Check Parameter 112 Control Source for correct source If the source is an analog input check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of signal Check Parameter 102 Commanded Freq to verify correct command Incorrect reference source is None e Check Parameter 112 Control Source for correct source being selected via remote device e Check Parameter 114 Dig In Status to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source Verify or digital inputs settings for Parameters 151 154 Digital In x Sel e Check Parameter 138 Speed Reference for the source of the speed reference Reprogram as necessary Some applications create an None Disable parameter 217 Bus Regulation The drive will react faster to changes in speed intermittent voltage re
323. or the SMTP Server s IP address user login and port number are configurable through the Administrative Settings page of the internal web server The user configures the device name device description and device trip type Figure 71 E mail Notification Configuration Rockwe Automatio E mail Recipient oopooopoopopooonp A Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 89 Chapter4 Product Commissioning E mail triggers when a e Trip occurs e Trip is cleared e Warning occurs e Warning is cleared Note Cleared Event e mails are only sent when all events have been cleared and if a trip event e mail has previously been sent For example if the device is configured to send e mails when a phase loss trip and an overload trip is detected no e mail is sent when both the overload and the phase loss is cleared The following is an example trip e mail Subject Body Trip Type Trip Info Device Name Device Description Device Location Contact Info ArmorStart 281E 0 5 2 5 A 24V DC has detected a trip Overload Load has drawn excessive current that is based on the trip class selected ArmorStart 281E 0 5 2 5 A 24V DC From Identity Object Lift conveyor On Machine motor starter From E mail Config web page Customer Plant From E mail Config web page Joe Schmo From E mail Config web page joe schmo microsoft com Devi
324. ort heat conduction in high ambient applications This fan operates when control power is applied and cannot be controlled by any other means Monitor the fan speed to receive early warning of fan failure If the fan rpm falls below 1740 a Hardware Fault F14 is generated Also in parameter 61 Last Pr Fault indicates a FAN RPM fault has occurred IMPORTANT The FAN RPM fault can be reset with firmware 66 022 or later The fault reset function is modified to allow normal operation for 24 hours before the fault reoccurs The replacement fan is PN 284 FAN Refer to Hardware Fault Fan RPM Warning on page 235 for information regarding the monitoring of the Fan RPM Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Terminology Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology See the table for the meaning of common terms This Term Means Consumer A destination device in the CIP networking model See CIP CSMA CD Carrier sense multiple access collision detection is the access method used in Ethernet When a device wants to gain access to the network it checks to see if the network is quiet senses the carrier If it is not it waits a random amount of time before retrying If the network is quiet and two devices access the line at exactly the same time their signals collide When the collision is detected they both back off and each waits a random amount of time before retrying
325. ot the EtherNet IP network a managed switch must be used Considerations These are important features in a managed switch e Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP snooping Support for Virtual Local Area Networks VLAN e Port mirroring IMPORTANT Usea switch equipped with wire speed switching fabric The switch fabric is a measure of the maximum traffic that a switch can handle without dropping a packet and without storing a packet in memory Wire speed switching fabric refers to a switch that can handle the maximum data rate of the network on each of its ports Switches are typically rated in Gbps For a 10 port switch connected to EtherNet IP products the maximum data rate that is needed is typically 100 200 MB s Therefore a 10 port switch rated at least 1 GB s should be adequate for an EtherNet IP application Internet Group Multicast Protocol EtherNet IP implicit I O messaging mostly uses IP multicasting to distribute I O control data that is consistent with the CIP produced consumer model Most switches retransmit multicast packets and broadcast packets to all ports IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports associated with a particular IP multicast group This also helps minimize the CPU utilization rate Switches that support IGMP snooping learn which ports have devices that are part of a particular mu
326. pe BOOL Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Parameter Number 57 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 155 Chapter 7 156 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Starter Enclosure Bit 0 IP67 Bits 1 15 Reserved Starter Options Bit 0 Full Keypad Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 Source Brake Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Dynamic Brake Bit 5 Output Contactor Bit 6 EMI Filter Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Fused DynBrake Bit 9 15 Reserved Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Parameter Number 60 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 66535 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Last PR Fault 1 Hdw Short Ckt 2 Reserved 3 Motor Overload PF Fault Code 7 4 Drive Overload PF Fault Code 64 5 Phas
327. perly 1 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive 2 Program the drive parameters as needed Restart procedure 3 Check for DB1 fault and see DB1 diagnostics When Drive Controlled see Internal Drive Faults see Table 39 for details regarding which drive faults can be auto reset Parameter 61 provides a more granular description of the faults that occur e An F11 protection fault indicates that the internal communication has stopped e There is a 10 second delay before an F11 Internal Comm fault is present 219 Chapter9 Diagnostics Parameter 61 Fault Code 13 Control Power Loss e Common causes of an Internal Comm fault turned OFF The local ArmorStart Disconnect switch is in the OFF position 3 Phase line power feeding the ArmorStart is not connected or is Switched Control Power is not connected or is turned OFE Poor power quality Brown Out e First things to check Verify that the local disconnect is in the ON position Verify that the unit has 3 Phase Line Voltage present and it is within specified tolerances Verify that the ArmorStart unit has Control Voltage present and it is within specified tolerances Attempt to clear the fault by pressing the local reset or sending the ArmorStart a network reset Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit and try to clear the fault again e Ifan Internal Comm fault persists see Parameter 61 LastPR Fault for addition
328. pplications e Supports the management of network traffic to ensure timely delivery of critical data that is QoS and IGMP protocols are supported Note DLR ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards NICs connected to two different subnets Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Switched vs Unswitched Control Power Input Output 1 0 Connections EtherNet IP Ports Embedded Web Server Product Overview Chapter 1 The voltage at terminals Al A2 supplies power to the ArmorStart outputs Removing this power or placing the ArmorStart disconnect in the OFF position disables the outputs The unswitched power A3 A2 supplies power to the input and communication module This power is not affected by the state of the disconnect switch This ensures that anytime the controller can communicate the state of the inputs is correct Figure 5 Input and Output Configuration A3 Ce A1 n A2 EtherNet WS Eon Outputs ArmorStart EtherNet IP controller includes a dual port Ethernet switch that supports 10 100 Mbps It utilizes a sealed D coded micro M12 style ethernet connector Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is enabled as the factory default Before using your adapter in an EtherNet IP network you may need to configure an IP address or set the address statically address If a DHCP server is used it must be configured to assign a fixed IP address for ATTENTION To avoid uninte
329. ptember 2015 Appendix D Bulletin 280E 281E Renewal Parts Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection Figure 111 Bulletin 280E 281E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 280 E F12Z N B R_ Option1 Bulletin Number E E 280 Full Voltage Starter 281 Reversing Starter Communications E EtherNet IP Enclosure Type F Type 4 12 IP67 set Option 1 3 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad 3FR Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Forward Reverse Motor Connection R Round Overload Selection Contactor Size Control Voltage Current Range aoc A 0 24 1 2 B 0 5 2 5A 122 Control Module c 1 1 5 5A 31 N Control Module Only D 3 2 16A Table 55 Full Voltage Starters IP67 NEMA Type 4 kw Hp Cat No Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC A 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24V DC 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 280E F12Z NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 280E F12Z NB R 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 280E F12Z NC R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 280E F23Z ND R Table 56 Reversing Starters 1P67 NEMA Type 4 kw Hp Cat No Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC A 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24V DC 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 281E F12Z NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 281E F12Z NB R 11 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 281E F12Z NC R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 281E F23Z ND R Rockwell Automation Publ
330. ptember 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 ArmorStart Controller with EtherNet I P Internal Wiring Figure 19 ArmorStart EtherNet IP Bulletin 280E Controller with HOA Diagram Contactor 140M 1 K 2 EB rr ae AS Logic h Control Power AS Logic Sense g ral Control Motor 140M offipped 7A on caste Note This power supply is not present in the Status Only versions Current supplied by control power due to the NSC Protected 254 power supply voltage p Cass C being greater than A3 Output A s T Port2 Port1 mmTip pi voltage H Input 10ma 24V 0 IM Status 1 Ampere I Jt Vv MEE input 10ma 24v 0 Total Ca p gt input mowic Reversed bias 24V DC Status Not sed 2ascProteced ef ji gt Input 10mA 24V DC 0 Ethernet under normal utput B P i Logic operation Current supplied from A3 when oe A1 control power is lost AS Logic Circuits 4 Inputs MA Max input depends on sensor attached to input w Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 41 Chapter 2 42 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Figure 20 ArmorStart EtherNet IP Bulletin 281E Controller with HOA Diagram Reverser 140M f L1 i i e ji i L2 i Hl B ti i l AS Logic Control Le
331. r 7o ooo Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 38 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 143 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters OutB Pr FitState Parameter Number 39 This parameter along with Parameter 40 Access Rule GET SET OutB Pr FitValue defines how Output B Data Type BOOL will respond when a protection trip occurs 0 Goto PrFlt Value Group User 1 0 Config 1 Ignore PrFit When set to 1 Output B continues to Units operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output B opens or closes Minimum Value 0 as determined by setting in Parameter 40 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutB Pr FitValue Parameter Number 40 This parameter determines the state the Access Rule GET SET Out B assumes when a protection trip Data T BOOL occurs and Parameter 39 OutB Pr FitState ata ype is set to 0 Group User 1 0 Config 0 Open 1 Close Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutB Net FitState Parameter Number 41 This parameter along with Parameter 42 Access Rule GET SET OutB Net FitValue defines how Output B will respond when a network fault occurs Data Type BOOL 0 Goto Idle Value 1 Hold Last State Group User 1 0 Config When set to 1 Output B will hold state Units Da before trip o
332. r NP Volts and redefines the Volts per Hz curve Active when Parameter 225 Torque 8 5 0 2 5 for 5 Hp 184 Boost Select Perf Mode 0 V Hz Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 drives Drive Advanced Setup is selected Sets the boost voltage of Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts 185 Start Boost and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 Boost Select 2 5 Drive Advanced Setup 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode 0 V Hz Sets the frequency where brake voltage is applied when Parameter 184 186 Brake Voltage Boost Select 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode 25 0 Drive Advanced Setup 0 V Hz2 Sets the frequency where brake frequency is applied when Parameter 187 Brake Frequency 184 Boost Select 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf 15 0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup Mode 0 V Hz 188 Maximum Voltage Sets the highest voltage that the drive will output Drive Rated Volts Drive Advanced Setup 189 Current Limit 1 Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs Drive be Ampsx Drive Advanced Setup Dri ides Class 10 mot load protection Setting 0 2 select 190 Motor OL Select Ds FMi pip He ARESO pe eps va 0 No Derate Drive Advanced Setup the derating factor for t overload function Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform 191 PWM Frequency Figure 80 provides derating guidelines that are based on the PWM 4 0 Hz Drive Advance
333. r to be selected and installed as follows if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated interface by the equipment operator 1 They are not less than 0 6 m 2 ft above the servicing level and are within easy reach of the normal working position of the operator 2 The operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when operating them 3 The possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 47 Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 48 If the operated interface is used in industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision verify that only qualified persons operate and service the ArmorStart controller s operator interface and the installation is located so that inadvertent operation is minimized then other installation locations with acceptable access can be provided Other System Design Considerations The user should keep 3 phase power cabling at least 150 mm 6 in away from the EtherNet IP network to avoid noise issues EtherNet IP is an unpowered network therefore if device status is important when the power distribution disconnect is in the OFF position the A3 terminal must have an unswitched power source The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance General Notes Bulletin 284E only e The motor Cable should be kept as short as possibl
334. r7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Output Power The output power present at T1 T2 and 73 Output Power Fctr The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and current Drive Temp Present operating temperature of the drive power section Counter Status The current value of the counter when counter is enabled Parameter Number 122 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Drive rated power X 2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 123 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 180 0 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 124 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 126 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 120 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 125 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Timer Status The current value of the timer when timer is enabled Torque Current The current value of the motor torque current Drive Setup Group Bulletin 284E only Motor NP Volts Stop drive before changing this pa
335. rameter Set to the motor nameplate rated volts Motor NP Hertz Stop drive before changing this parameter Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency Parameter Number 126 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 129 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 0 01 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Drive Rated Amps x 2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 131 Related Parameters 104 184 185 187 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units WAC Minimum Value 20 Maximum Value 480V Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 132 Related Parameters 184 185 187 and 190 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units 1Hz Minimum Value 15 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 60 Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 175 Chapter7 Bulletin 280 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Motor OL Current Parameter Number 133 Set to the maximum allowable current Related Parameter 155 as P i 218 The drive fault on an F7 Ti Motor Over load if the value of this Access Rul GET SET parameter is exceeded by 150 oe f for 60s Data Type UINT Group Drive Setup Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive r
336. rameter Number 220 Related Parameters 219 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 30 0 Hz Default Value 0 0 Hz Skip Frequency gt A 2x Skip Frequency Band Stall Fault Time Sets for the fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a fault is issued 0 60 sec Default 1 120 sec 2 240 sec 3 360 sec 4 480 sec 5 Flt Disabled Time Parameter Number 221 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 195 Chapter 7 196 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Var PWM Disable Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform that is defined by Parameter 191 PWM Frequency 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Disabling this feature when low frequency condition exists may result in IGBT stress and nuisance tripping Torque Perf Mode Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables sensorless vector control operation 0 V Hz 1 Sensrls Vect Parameter Number 224 Related Parameters 191 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value
337. rcuit 1 Overload 2 Phase Loss 3 Control Power 4 IO Fault 5 Over Temp 6 Phase Imbalance 7 DNet Power Loss 8 EEprom 9 HW Fit 10 PL Warning 11 CP Warning 12 IO Warning 13 Phase Imbal Warn 14 DN Warning 15 HW Warning Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 359 AppendixF Application Examples Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor o i 9 PNB INT of 2 BT TTI The Bulletin 280 and 281 have the following bit definitions 0 Run Forward 1 Run Reverse 2 User Output A 3 User Output B Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the ladder editor DOP INT _ EM O NT 1 j2 3 ja bep a 9 10 11 12 113 114 15 ehz The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart units Produce Network bit declaration 0 Net Output 0 1 Net Output 1 2 Net Output 2 3 Net Output 3 4 Net Output 4 5 Net Output 5 6 Net Output 6 7 Net Output 7 8 Net Output 8 9 Net Output 9 10 Net Output 10 11 Net Output 11 12 Net Output 12 13 Net Output 13 14 Net Output 14 15 Fault Reset 16 Motion Disable 17 Keypad Disable 360 Rockwell
338. re 284 D F N 10 C Options a Number Communications D DeviceNet l Enclosure Type F Type 4 12 IP67 a Option 2 amp 3 Brake Cable Options SM Safety monitor Line Media Cc Conduit R ArmorConnect Power Media 1 Short Circuit Protection Bulletin 140 Current Rating A Base N Base Only no starter 3E 3E A pae mits l Table 61 Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part IP67 Type 4 12 Up to 600V AC With Conduit Entrance Input Voltage kw Hp Output Current Cat No 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 2 3A 280D FN 10 C 30 60 Hz 15 2 0 76A 280D FN 25 C 3 Phase 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5 3 0 1 4 4 0A 280D FN 10 C 50 60 Hz 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6A 280D FN 25 C 3 Phase 460 600V 50 60Hz 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0 A 280D FN 10 C ae 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6A 280D FN 25 C Table 62 Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part IP67 Type 4 12 Up to 600V AC with ArmorConnect Connectivity Input Voltage kW Hp Output Current Cat No 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 2 3A 280D FN 10 R 50 60 Hz 15 20 76A 280D FN 25 R 3 Phase 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5 3 0 1 4 4 0A 280D FN 10 R 30 60 Hz 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6A 280D FN 25 R 3 Phase 460 600V 50 60Hz 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0 A 280D FN 10 R 3 Phase 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6A 280D FN 25 R 344 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Table 63
339. res longer life of the DC bus capacitors that extend the life of the VED In addition if line disturbance mitigation is necessary the ArmorStart can be equipped with an EMI filter and shielded motor cable reducing the impact of the power switching components However if users specify input line reactors or transformers the recommendation is to group the ArmorStarts at the distribution panel under one line reactor not individual reactors or transformers Lastly when full voltage ArmorStarts controllers are included with VFD ArmorStart controllers and line reactors are used the starting currents of the full voltage ArmorStart controllers can be significant The current must be accounted for in the selection of the line reactor or there is a risk of nuisance faults 348 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Appendix F Application Examples M anu al Bra ke Control If the user wants to activate the mechanical brake source brake option of the ArmorStart Bulletin 284E there are several parameters that need attention The following configuration allows the brake to operate normally during running and when the Bulletin 284 is not running allows the release of the brake for maintenance See the consume assembly 164 for DeviceNet or 166 for EtherNet IP 1 Select which Drive Input 1 2 3 4 you will use to trigger the release of the brake Configure the corresponding parameter that references the Drive
340. reset Freq 3 Provides a fixed frequency command value when Parameters 151 154 7 170 177 Preset Freq 4 Digital In x Sel is set to Option 4 Preset Frequencies See Table 26 Drive Advanced Setup Preset Freq 5 Preset Freq 6 Preset Freq 7 178 Jog Frequency Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued 10 0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup 204 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Table 29 Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions Parameter ie Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group 179 Jog Accel Decel onl acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is 10 0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup 180 DC Brake Time eee A D Any current is injected into the motor 0 0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup Defines the maximum DC brake current in amps applied to the motor Drive Rated Amps x 181 DC Brake Level when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to either Ramp or DC Brake 0 05 Drive Advanced Setup 182 DB Resistor Sel Used to set percent duty cycle for external dynamic braking 0 Disabled Drive Advanced Setup Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to 183 S Curve ramp as S Curve Time is added half at the beginning and half at the end 0 Disabled Drive Advanced Setup of the ramp Sets the boost voltage of Parameter 131 Moto
341. rive will output Current Limit 1 Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs Motor OL Select Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection Settings 0 2 select the derating factor for Pt overload function 0 No Derate 1 Min Derate 2 Max Derate Figure 79 Overload Trip Curves No Derate of P133 Motor OL Current co gt o O 6 N R of P133 Motor OL Current N Co oO 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz Min Derate gt 0 oOo o T O Ga N Parameter Number 188 Related Parameters 104 185 186 187 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units VAC Minimum Value 20V AC Maximum Value Drive Rated Volts Default Value Drive Rated Volts Parameter Number 189 Related Parameters 133 218 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 1A Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1 8 Default Value Drive rated amps X 1 5 0 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz Parameter Number 190 Related Parameters 132 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Max Derate N e o O of P133 Motor OL Current 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C E
342. rk Inputs Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 OutB OutA ResetFault RunReverse RunForward 1 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 2 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt09Deviceln Pt08Deviceln Instance 166 This is the standard output consumed assembly for Inverter Type Distributed Starters with network inputs Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Out B Out A JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForward 1 Drivelnput4 Drivelnput3 Drivelnput2 Drivelnput1 DecelCtrl_1 DecelCtrl_0 AccelCtrl_1 AccelCtrl_0 2 FreqCommand Low xxx x Hz 3 FreqCommand High xxx x Hz 4 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 5 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt9Deviceln Pt8Deviceln Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 305 AppendixB CIP Information Connection Manager Object CLASS CODE 0x0006 The following class attributes are supported for the Connection Manager Object Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revisio
343. rload Overload Overload Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 p Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Each Controller is Listed for Group Installation with Specified Maximum t i Protection Two or More Motors with any Mixture or Power Ratings This section contains a brief description of the attributes of the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are relevant to applying them in multiple motor branch circuits These same relative attributes are can be assumed for ArmorStart controllers The term motor controller refers to the device that stops and starts the motor The ArmorStart product family consists of two types of motor controllers The Bulletin 290 and 291 controllers are magnetic motor controllers that use an electromechanical contactor to stop and start the motor The Bulletin 294 motor controllers use a variable frequency AC drive to stop start and vary the speed of the motor This appendix refers to the Bulletin 290 291 and 294 products as either motor controllers or just controllers Each ArmorStart motor controller incorporates an integrated overload relay and motor disconnecting means The Underwriters Laboratories UL listing for each motor controller confirms that the motor controller including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means is suitable for motor group installation
344. rnet Statistics Interface Counters yE Advanced Diagnostics Deferred Transmissions Ethertiet IP In Ucast Packets 123441 Encapsulation Statisti tn Ni p q p In NUcast Packet 614 Excessive Collisions a Encapsulation Sessior In Discards o MAC Tran Error Statistics In Error Carrier Sense Error o Network arrier Sense Errors In Unknown Protos o y Too L s ICMP Statistics Frame Long IGMP Statistics 1P Statistics UDP Statistics MAC Receive Errors 0 TCP Statistics Out Discards Network Memory Stati Out Errors Mbuf Statistics Gl rex Object econds Between Refre 0 Disable Refresh with 2 Review the values in the Media Counters table Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 245 Chapter10 Troubleshooting If Any media counters are greater than zero Then You need to investigate further These errors are counted e Alignment FCS e Carrier Sense A duplex mismatch exists between your EtherNet IP communication module and the switch port To clear the duplex mismatch 1 Configure the EtherNet IP communication module and the corresponding Ethernet switch port for a forced operation not auto negotiation 2 Verify that the firmware revision of your Logix controller and switch or converter are identical 3 Ifthe revisions are not identical replace the controller switch or converter so that they match Single Collisions or Multiple Collisions are greater than
345. rrent Available 50 mA max per input 200 mA for any single point Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 257 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Output Ratings Sourced from Control Circuit A1 A2 Do not use as a power supply source to other devices UL NEMA IEC Rated Operation Voltage 26 4V DC Rate Insulation Voltage 250V Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC UL 2000V AC IEC Operating Frequency Solid state sourcing output Type of Current 24V DC Conventional Thermal Current Ith 0 5 A each 1 A max combined Peak Output Current Current limited 2 8 amps 5 amps nominal 24V DC Type of Contacts Normally open N 0 Number of Contacts 2 Load Types Resistive or light inductive Surge Suppression Integrated diode clamps 35V DC Thermo Protection Integrated short circuit and over current protection Maximum Cycle Rate 30 operations minute capacitive and inductive loads Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC Maximum On State Voltage Maximum Output 1 5V DC Maximum Off State Leakage Current 10 pA Beacon based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock Device Level Ring DLR Fault Recovery Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network Ethernet Receptacles 2 D coded 4 pin female M12 connectors Ports Embedded switch with 2 ports IP A
346. s Introduction A Device Level Ring DLR protocol defines a set of behaviors see Figure 52 A ring supervisor keeps packets of information from circulating infinitely around the ring by blocking one of the ports A beacon frame constantly is detected on both ring supervisor ports Ifa beacon frame is not detected the supervisor detects the physical layer issue and reconfigures the network to a linear topology without the loss of any node communication or data Once repaired the ring supervisor reconfigures back to ring mode Figure 52 DLR Protocol Beacon Frame M Normal Packet Blocked 7 aa Port As shown in Figure 53 when a physical layer failure is detected the adjacent nodes to the fault generate a link status message that the ring supervisor acknowledges The ring supervisor unblocks the port to allow communication The neighboring nodes to the fault identify the fault and reconfigure themselves to support a linear topology Now both the ring supervisor and nodes are configured to support a linear topology Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 71 Chapter3 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Figure 53 Physical Layer Failure is Detected W Beacon Frame Sx Normal Packet o Link Status Message _ DS When the physical layer fault is corrected the supervisor will hear the beacon frame again on both ports Once this is detected the ring s
347. s Be cautious about using DHCP software to configure your adapter A DHCP server typically assigns a finite lease time to the offered IP address When 50 of the leased time has expired the ArmorStart Ethernet adapter attempts to renew its IP address with the DHCP server The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address that would cause the adapter to cease communicating with the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Commissioning Chapter 4 Using the Rockwell Automation Embedded Web Server Internal Web Server ArmorStart Ethernet IP internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default Login is Administrator There is no password set by default IMPORTANT The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel If the login and password are lost you will need to reset the device to the factory defaults that results in losing its configuration To access the internal web browser open your computers internet browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart for example 192 168 1 1 Note 192 168 1 1 is NOT the factory default IP address as DHCP is enabled by default Figure 65 Internal Web Browser ArmorStart 284E
348. s 4 Drive Controlled Ground Fault A current path to earth ground has been detected atone Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output Drive Code 13 or more of the drive output terminals terminals for a grounded condition 5 Drive Controlled Stall Drive is unable to accelerate motor Increase Parameters 139 167 Accel Time x or reduce Drive Code 6 load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 Current Limit 1 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Table 37 Fault LED Indicators for 284E Bit Blink Auto Pattern ResettableO 284E Trip Status Description Action 6 Parameter 23 Control Pwr Loss The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power Check control voltage wiring and proper polarity A1 A2 PrFlt Reset Switched Power voltage terminal Also check and replace the control voltage Mode fuse if necessary This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 7 Parameter 23 Input Fault This error indicates a shorted sensor shorted input If this fault occurs the offending problem should be PrFit Reset device wiring input mistakes or a blown output fuse isolated or removed before restarting the system This Mode fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 8 Parameter 23 Over Temperature This fault is generated when the operating temperature Check for blocked or dirty heat
349. s Cables 10V rms PE 150 kHz 80 MHz Radiated Emissions Class A Group 1 equivalent to C2 emissions EMC Immunity Levels Other Rating Electrostatic Discharge AkV contact and 8 kV Air Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10V m 80 KHz 1 GHz 3V m 1 4 GHz 2 GHz 1V m 2 0 GHz 2 7 GHz Fast Transient 2 kV Power 2 kV PE 1 kV Communications and Control Surge Transient 1 kV 12 L L 2 kV 2 L N Earth Internal Fan for 284 264 Fan L10 Operation data 80K hr at 40 C 104 F Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Chapter 11 UL NEMA IEC UL 508C CSA 22 2 No 14 EN50178 z EN61800 3 Standards Compliance EN IEC 60947 4 2 CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006 95 EC EMC Directive 2004 108 EC ODVA for EtherNet IP aa cULus File No 207834 Certifications Guide NMMS NMMS7 EtherNet IP Version Control and 1 0 Power Requirements Units A1 A20 A3 A2 A1 A20 A3 A2 A3 A2 W 0 HOA W HOA Control Voltage Volts 24V DC Module Inrush Amps 0 92 0 30 1 09 0 125 0 295 Module Steady Amps 0 06 0 30 0 23 0 125 0 295 Total Control Power Pick Up Watts 22 08 7 20 26 16 3 00 7 08 Total Control Power Running Watts 1 44 7 20 5 52 3 00 7 08 Peere e with Dynamic Brake or Output Watts 2 3 8 4 Teee a with Dynamic
350. s a collection of devices that are daisy chained together Figure 50 Linear Network Collection of Devices _ Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 In this topology a communication issue in the media or device prevents nodes downstream from communicating Figure 51 Communication Issue in the Media or Device Line Ea Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Stops communicating la The EtherNet IP embedded switch technology allows this topology to be implemented at the device level No additional switches are required These are the primary advantages of a linear network e The network simplifies installation and reduces wiring and installation costs e The network requires no special software configuration e Embedded switch products offer improved CIP Sync application performance on linear networks The primary disadvantage of a linear network is that any break of the cable disconnects all devices downstream from the break from the rest of the network 70 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3 Device Level Ring IMPORTANT Products with EtherNet IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnet You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards NICs connected to two different subnet
351. s light emitting diode LED status indication and built in diagnostics capabilities allow ease of maintenance and troubleshooting The optional Hand Off Auto HOA keypad configuration allows local start stop control An Add On Profile AOP for ControlLogix is available AOPs streamline the programming and installation by eliminating the task of individually configuring the device tags The copy and paste function allows easy configuration of multiple ArmorStart controllers RSLogix 5000 revision 17 01 or later is required to implement AOP support Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Overview Chapter 1 The ArmorStart controller and associated motor cable have been evaluated as a system by UL and is suitable for group installation ArmorStart controllers contain a UL Listed disconnect that in many applications eliminates the need for additional components Catalog Number Expla nation Examples that are given in this section are for reference purposes This basic explanation should not be used for product selection because not all combinations produce a valid catalog number Figure 1 Catalog Number Explanation for 280E 281E 280 E F 12Z 10 C CR Option 1 a b c d e f g h h Bulletin Number Full Voltage Starter Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad Reversing Starter Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Forward Reverse f Overload Selection Current Range EtnerNetiP Gode Des
352. s the second most recent fault that has occurred Fault 3 Code A code that represents a drive fault The code appears in this parameter as the third most recent fault that has occurred Process Display The output frequency that is scaled by the process factor Parameter 199 Control Source Displays the source of the Start Command and Speed Reference 1 Internal Frequency 4 Preset Freq x 5 Network Control 9 Jog Freq Parameter Number 108 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units Minimum Value F2 Maximum Value F122 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 109 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units Minimum Value F2 Maximum Value F122 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 110 Related Parameter 101 199 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 112 Related Parameters 136 138 151 154 Digital In x Sel must be set to Option 4 169 170 177 Preset Freq x 240 247 StpLogic x Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value Read Only Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Contrl In Status Status of control inputs These can be used in DeviceLogix Bit 0
353. s up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets Embedded web server Security Login and password configurable Web Server E mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Configuration Status diagnostics and configuration tabs 268 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Chapter 11 UL NEMA IEC Supports scheduled Class 1 and unscheduled Class 3 amp UCMM connections 6 Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections Exclusive owner data or listen only One connection per PLC Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established Device Connections Class 1 Connection API 2 3200 ms Class 3 Connection API 100 10 000 ms 20 ms Request Packet Interval RPI default 3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections Altitude Derating Altitude Rating for Bulletin 280 281 e No altitude derating up to 2000 m 6562 ft Altitude Rating for Bulletin 284 0 5 Hp No Derating up to 3000 m 9843 ft e 1 Hp No Derating up to 3000 m 9843 ft e 2 Hp Derate 1 per 100 m 328 ft above 1000 m 3281 ft 3 Hp No Derating up to 3000 m 9843 ft e 5 Hp Derate 1 per 100 m 328 ft above 1000 m Example Application requires 2600 m for a SHp ArmorStart e 2600 m 1000 m 1600 m e 1600 100 16 e 16 1 16 Derate output amps by
354. safe voltage levels Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death gt Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage gt ATTENTION This drive contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures see Allen Bradley Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook gt wo Chapter10 Troubleshooting Bulletin 280E 281E Troubleshooting Bulletin 284E Troubleshooting 230 or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing of the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage The following flowchart for Bulletin 280E 281E units is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting Figure 9
355. se multiple motor branch circuits Both also have special rules for controllers that are not listed for group installation and general rules for those that are The special rules for controllers that are not listed for group installation restrict some variables These restricting rules are found in the NEC s 430 53 A 430 53 B and 430 53 C 2 b and NEPA 79 s 7 2 10 2 7 2 10 3 and the 7 2 10 4 1 condition does not exceed that permitted by 7 2 10 1 For example for 480V motors the NEC s 430 53 A limits each motor s rating to 1 Hp or less and the protective device rating to 15 amperes or less The following will not address these special cases The following addresses this general case ifa motor controller is listed for group installation the NEC and NFPA 79 permit 1 installing it in a branch circuit with other motors having any mix of horsepower ratings and 2 protecting all wiring and controllers with a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker large enough to operate this mix of motors The rules for this general case are found in the NEC s 430 53 C and 430 53 D and NEPA 79 s 7 2 10 4 and 7 2 10 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 281 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery For this general case the following conclusions apply Importance of a motor controller being listed for group installation e U
356. se of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence gt gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures ARC FLASH HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a motor control center to alert people to potential Arc Flash Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death Wear proper Personal
357. set Internal Drive Parameters Parameters gt 100 have been defaulted 38 SCV Autotune The drive automatic tuning function was either aborted or failed 39 Source Brake The source brake fuse has blown Remove power and replace fuse 40 Unknown Fault 4 DB1 Comm Communication with an internal DB1 board has been lost 42 DB1 Fault A fault has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake 43 DB Switch Short The Dynamic Brake switch is shorted 44 Fault 44 450 epai COMM The Software version of the Drive is not compatible with the ArmorStart The Fault text for this error is not return by the device and is only reported as Fault 45 324 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B DPI Alarm Object CLASS CODE 0x0098 The following class attributes are supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Class Revision UINT 1 2 Get Number of Instances UINT 4 3 Set Alarm Cmd Write USINT 0 NOP 1 Clear Fault 2 Clear Flt Queue 74 Get Alarm Instance Read UINT douienitareteoad n 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT The number of Faults that are recorded in the Fault Queue Four instances of the DPI Alarm Object are supported with the following instance attributes Instance 1 is the most recent fault while 4 is the oldest See Table 52 on page 322 and Table 53 on page
358. should be 16 cm 6 in e Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation e Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits e Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups should be 8 cm 3 in An effectively grounded product is one that is intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages that may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons as defined by the US National Electric Code NFPA70 Article 100B Grounding is done for two basic reasons safety defined above and noise containment or reduction While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit may sometimes share the same path and components they should be considered different circuits with different requirements Grounding Safety Grounds The object of safety grounding is to verify that all metalwork is at the same ground or Earth potential at power frequencies Impedance between the drive and the building scheme ground must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes These vary based on country type of distribution system and other factors Periodically check the integrity of all ground connections General safety dictates that all metal parts
359. shown below Z Module Properties ENBT 284E FVD1P4 1 1 oles General Connection Module Info Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Group Drive Setup v Correlating project data with ArmorStart 60 complete Set to the motor name Set to the motor name Set to the motor name Sets the lowest frequ Sets the highest frequ ets the control sche ArmorStart Correlation he stop mode for the he speed reference Correlating project data with ArmorStart 60 complete he rate of accelerati he rate of deceleratir esets all parameters nables disables the t 2 gt The values displayed here ate read directly from the project when offline and from the ArmorStart when online These values are not J sent to the ArmorStart when a connection is established Click Set to write updated values A You must go online with this Parameters tab to ensure the controller and ArmorStart configurations are consistent with each other Status Running Cancel Dew __ Heb This indicates that the AOP is comparing the parameter data entered offline vs the parameter data that is stored in the ArmorStart device If any discrepancies are found between the parameters in the AOP and the parameters in the ArmorStart device a window will pop up as shown below asking you to decide which parameters you want to keep Differences Found i Resolve differences by uploading to project or downloading
360. sing the Rockwell Automation Embedded Web Server Internal Web Server adit ainda dss oo onlena oan wha Saw ns Panne he Network Conhgurationinedahicsasancnantuenyoeuirees sew hien Parameter Configuration 2100s 2224 leks avout ee tags lewd E mail Notification Configuration 0 0c cece eens Device ConnectionSes rraga otenn ed se cheese se eh wees od as OwherShip eresi inaasa eise CO E E Rhehe Ethernet Statistics Web Pagescerscireii rri rii tnne e ee a antar r Connection Manager Cmd Object Info Web Page 4 Ring Statistics Web Page cicudn anderen sy turetupateesteeewenmanaty Chapter 5 Seip aea EE ARREA saa E PEE ENERE E OARA Connect and Configure ArmorStart with Add On Profile AOP Offline Connections vain teu ae E E E hee Glues General A E EEE E E E EEE E EEEE Connection Taban se Taha share ica ad aa a aa AE R ORAA Parameters Tab fie ce hiatal ccgresindc nd E EEE E Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Table of Contents Online Connection cas dts ncciyiee as daa ea ety ee NS 102 Parameters Tab sateatinerasentarolarnt athe aa nade era RER tat anl a 105 M dule Info Tabee tete eh shoe aa o 106 Internet Protocol Labs voces r et ar E E TE ORE 107 Port Configuration Labic is94 a aS enuneseane lt sdaes sas penne 108 Network Fabien varene eh ee es 109 Auto Generated Tags iss ieuisowtes et yd vache RU Ree esto uetaas 110 Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation In
361. single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes it is recommended that the DLR networks are segmented With smaller networks e There is better management of traffic on the network e The networks are easier to maintain e There is a lower likelihood of multiple faults Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher For DLR networks with 50 or less nodes ring recovery time can be as low as 3 ms If more than 50 nodes are required without segmentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor A detail review is recommended to ensure bandwidth and response time are within application requirements Ethernet managed switches are key components that provide determinism and the required throughput to achieve automation needs Switches are able to manage network traffic that reduces unnecessary delays or band width needs A properly designed EtherNet IP infrastructure that implement segregation via managed switch technology achieves a more reliable and secure network Today unshield twisted pair UTP wiring is the standard in most applications and allows for greatest flexibility and ease of installation and maintenance Category Se e enhanced cable is specifically designed to meet today s automation needs Standard RJ 45 connectors are not designed for industrial environments For outside the panel IP67 connectors are required for EtherNet IP Fi
362. sink fins Verify that PrFlt Reset has been exceeded This fault cannot be disabled ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 C 104 F Mode 1 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive 9 Drive Controlled Over Current The drive output current has exceeded the hardware Check programming Check for excess load improper Drive Codes 12 and 63 current limit Parameter 184 Boost Select setting DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current Parameter 198 SW Current Trip has been exceeded check load requirements and Parameter 198 setting 10 Parameter 23 Control Power 24V DC The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold Check the state of the network power supply A3 A1 PrFit Reset Lost Unswitched Power terminal and look for media problems This fault can be Mode disabled and is disabled by default 11 No Internal Comm Communication with either the control module VFD or See section Fault 11 Detail If the problem persists See Parameter 61 for Control module has stopped replace the unit details on this fault F81 is a VFD fault This could also happen if control power is lost 12 Drive Controlled DC Bus Fault Power Loss DC bus voltage remained below 85 of Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line Drive Codes Reference 3 nominal UnderVoltage DC but voltage fell below the power interruption Check the input fuses Monitor the 4and 5 minimum value OverVoltage DC bus voltage exce
363. sistor body temperature not on the present resistor body temperature This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 DB1 Resistor Sel is Disabled Troubleshooting DB1 Resistor body temperature is too hot Allow the resistor to cool Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 DB1 Overcurrent Fault Control Supervisor Object DB1 Fault Attribute Bit 1 The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Max Current Level If 5 consecutive samples are above the Max Current Level then a fault is recorded This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is lower than expected This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 DB1 Resistor Sel is Disabled Troubleshooting DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current higher than expected Turn off all power to unit Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to discharge AN BURN HAZARD DB1 resistor may still be hot Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module Measure DB1 resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter See the specification for minimum DBI resistor values If DB1 resistance value is within limits replace control module If not replace DB1 resistor DB1 Undercurrent Fault Control Supervisor Object DB1 Fault Attribute Bit 2 The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Min Current Level The Min Current Level Min DB1 Voltage Level Max DB1 Resistance If 5 consecu
364. strt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 Auto Rstrt Delay to 0 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines Auto Rstrt Delay Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value other than zero Start at PowerUp Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored Requires a digital input configured Run or Start and a valid start contact 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines Parameter Number 193 Related Parameters 192 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 300 0 sec Default Value 1 0 sec Parameter Number 194 Related Parameters 192 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0
365. t Address MAC IP Address Hostname Description _ _ 00 C 21 20 14 DHCP r Status Entries Sent 10 88 70 2 to Ethemet address 00 00 BC 21 20 14 1 of 256 The Save As Dialog is shown Figure 64 Save As Dialog Box Se eh x Save nfa Boolp Server ek Ee File name Joortral system configuration Save as type Bootp Config Files bpc x Cancel 4 2 Select the folder that you want to Save in 3 Enter a File name for the Relation List for example Control System Configuration and click Save You can leave the Save as type at the default setting Bootp You can then open the file containing the Relation List at a later session Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 83 Chapter4 Product Commissioning DHCP IP Support 84 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network When DHCP is enabled factory default Enabled the unit will request its network configuration from a DHCP BOOTP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server is stored in non volatile memory ArmorStart EtherNet IP remembers the last successful address if DHCP is enabled The unit tries to obtain the same IP address from the DHCP server If the server is not present e g server fails to power up the unit will use the IP address it previously received from the server The DHCP timeout 30
366. t Cfg low byte ProducedWord2Param 13 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int02DeviceOut Cfg high byte ProducedWord2Param 14 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg low byte ProducedWord3Param 15 Value of the parameter pointed to by Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg high byte ProducedWord3Param Note Byte 0 3 refers to PLC communication status All 1s bit high indicates a connection fault communication fault exists or all 0s bit low connection is normal Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 303 Appendix B CIP Information Instance 151 This is the default input produced assembly for Inverter Type Distributed Starters Produce Assembly Instance 151 Drive Status 284E Starters Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Reserved name Fault 1 Reserved name Fault 2 Reserved name Fault 3 Reserved name Fault 4 AtReference Network NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent ReferenceStatus 5 OutputContactor BrakeContactor DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In Ind Status Status 6 OutputFrequency Low xxx x Hz 7 OutputFrequency High xxx x Hz 8 PtO7DeviceOut PtO6DeviceQut PtO5DeviceOut PtO4DeviceOut PtO3DeviceOut PtO2DeviceOut PtO1Dev
367. t IP controllers accept 24V DC control voltage The control voltage provides power to inputs unswitched and outputs switched Unswitched control voltage is used to ensure no loss of sensor or other field input status under normal operation Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Mode of Operation Product Overview Chapter 1 Bulletin 280E 281E Full Voltage Start This method is used in applications requiring across the line starting where full inrush current and locked rotor torque are realized The ArmorStart Bulletin 280E offers full voltage starting and the Bulletin 281E offers full voltage starting for reversing applications Figure 3 Full Voltage Start 100 Percent Voltage Time seconds Bulletin 284E Sensorless Vector Control Sensorless vector control provides exceptional speed regulation and very high levels of torque across the entire speed range of the drive Features include e Autotune feature allows the motor controller to adapt to individual motor characteristics e Able to develop high torque over a wide speed range and adapts to individual motor characteristics Figure 4 Sensorless Vector Control 3 0 2 5 2 0 1 5 1 0 0 5 0 0 Torque Per Unit Frequency HZ Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 19 Chapter1 Product Overview Description of Features Embedded Switch Technology 20 Overload Protection
368. t Instance USINT Fault Data 1 Get Basic Info Struct of Fault Code UINT See table below Fault Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT 0 Device Object Instance USINT 0x2C Fault Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULINT Timer Description WORD 3 Get Help Text STRING See table below Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 321 AppendixB CIP Information The following services are supported Implemented for Service Code Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single The table below lists Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers Table 52 Bulletin 280E 281E Fault Code Fault Text Help Text 1 Hdw Short Ckt The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped 2 Sfw Short Ckt The wire protection algorithm detected an unsafe current surge 3 Motor Overload Load has drawn excessive current that is based on trip class selected 4 Fault 4 5 Phase Loss Indicates missing supply phase This fault can be disabled 6 Fault 6 7 Fault 7 8 Fault 8 9 Fault 9 10 Fault 10 11 Fault 11 12 Fault 12 13 Control Pwr Loss Indicates the loss of control power This fault can be disabled 14 Control Pwr Fuse The Control Power Fuse h
369. t T gt O shall be Assembly object Instance 52 150 or 151 150 for product codes lt 0x100 only 151 for product codes gt 0x100 only Class 3 CIP Connections Class 3 CIP connections are used to establish connections to the message router The connection is used for explicit messaging Class 3 CIP connections use TCP connections e Three concurrent encapsulation sessions are supported e Six concurrent Class 3 CIP connections are supported e More than one Class 3 CIP connection per encapsulation session are supported Supported Actual Packet Interval API 100 10000 ms e T gt O Connection type point to point e O gt T Connection type point to point e Supported trigger type application Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Discrete Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008 The following class attributes are currently supported for the Discrete Input Point Object Revision UINT Get Max Instance UINT 4 Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported All instances contain the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enable 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 O0N The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Point Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service
370. t Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 5 Get Set Fault Action BOOL 0 Fault Value attribute 1 Hold Last State 6 Get Set Fault Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 7 Get Set Idle Action BOOL 0 Fault Value attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 113 Get Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 Pr Fault Value attribute 1 Ignore 114 Get Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 O0FF 1 0N 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enable 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N Size of Appendix encoded path STRUCT f Ar Appendix encoded path i Get Set Input Binding fe USINT NULL path means Attribute 3 drives the output y Otherwise this is a path to a bit in the Bit Table For DOP Instances 1 2 9 and 10 Attributes 113 and 114 have Get only access and their values are always 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Parameter Object CLASS CODE 0x000F The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT 8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD The number of instances of the parameter object depend upon the type
371. tart Controllers with EtherNet IP Chapter 11 Motor Overload Trip Curves Motor OL Current parameter provides Class 10 overload protection Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload Figure 102 284E Overload Trip Curves No Derate Min Derate Max Derate 100 100 100 g g 80 5 80 5 80 3 Ss 60 60 5 60 40 40 40 20 amp 20 amp 20 oO e 0 0 x 0 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz of P132 Motor NP Hertz of P132 Motor NP Hertz Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 267 Chapter11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet IP Input Ratings Sourced from Control Circuit A3 A2 UL NEMA IEC Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC Input On State Voltage Range 10 26V DC 3 0 mA 10V DC Input On State Current 7 2 mA 24V DC Input Off State Voltage Range 0 5V DC Input Off State Current lt 1 5mA 200 Hz Maximum Input Frequency Response DeviceLogix response is greater than 200 Hz Network response depends on control system network performance Input Filter Software Selectable Off to On Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments On to Off Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments Input Compatibility N A IEC 1 Number of Inputs 4 Sensor Source Voltage Status Only 11 26 4V DC from u
372. tart controller allows run jog and user outputs to be driven by connected explicit messages when no I O connection exists or when an I O connection exists in the idle state a single EtherNet IP Class 3 explicit connection is allowed to send explicit control messages via an Active Explicit connection Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 297 AppendixB CIP Information An EtherNet IP Class 3 explicit connection becomes the explicit control connection when it becomes the first EtherNet IP Class 3 explicit connection to send a set service to one of the following The value attribute of any DOP instance class code 0x09 The data attribute of any output consumed Assembly instance class code 0x04 Attribute 3 or 4 of the Control Supervisor Object class code 0x29 EDS Files Most of the information that is contained in the EDS Electronic Data Sheet files for the ArmorStart EtherNet IP product line is able to be extracted via the network CIP Object Requirements The following CIP objects are covered in the following subsections Class Object 0x0001 Identity Object 0x0004 Assembly Object 0x0006 Connection Manager Object 0x0008 Discrete Input Point Object 0x0009 Discrete Output Point Object 0x000F Parameter Object 0x0010 Parameter Group Object 0x001D Discrete Input Group Object 0x001E Discrete Outp
373. tection The UL listing for each ArmorStart LT motor controller confirms that it including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means is suitable for motor group installation with specified fuses satisfying 7 2 10 4 1 The Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment The Bulletin 294E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment Referring to Figure 110 a indicates the markings on the nameplate that satisfy 7 2 10 4 1 The marking Suitable for Motor Group Installation satisfies the requirement to be listed for group installation The ratings that are located beneath the description Max Ratings are the specified maximum branch circuit protection The a beside the fuse s indicates that the maximum protection specified on the nameplate applies to these fuse s 2 Requirement Two Conductor Short circuit and Ground Fault Protection The fuse must protect the conductors for short circuit faults and ground faults Text 7 2 10 4 2 The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 51 for the smallest conductor in the circuit Analysis Referring to Figure 109 7 2 10 4 2 must be satisfied The fuse as indicated by the description in Figure 109 a is the branch short circuit and ground fault protection d
374. ter 7 Accel Time 2 When active sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog Maximum Freq _ Ac dl Rate Accel Time Parameter 135 Maximum Freq y Param la Time Param 0 139 or 140 or 167 168 Accel Decel Time x Time x Decel Time 2 When active sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog Maximum Freq _ Decel Rate Decel Time Parameter 135 Maximum Freq 0 Param Wa Time mm Param 0 139 or 140 or 167 168 Accel Decel Time x Time x Internal Freq Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 Speed Reference is set to 1 Internal Freq When enabled this parameter will change the frequency command in real time Parameter Number 167 Related Parameters 139 151 na ae Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 20 0 Parameter Number 168 Related Parameters 140 151 oo lH Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 20 0 Parameter Number 169 Related Parameters 138 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value 60 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015
375. ter Setup DOL 108 OL Reset Level te Thermal Capacity that an overload can be 5 Starter Setup DOL 101 Output Freq Output frequency present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Read Only Drive Display 284E 102 Commanded Freq Value of the active frequency command Read Only Drive Display 284E 103 Output Current Output current present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Read Only Drive Display 284E 104 Output Voltage Output voltage present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Read Only Drive Display 284E 105 DC Bus Voltage Present DC bus voltage level Read Only Drive Display 284E 106 Drive Status Present operating condition of the drive Read Only Drive Display 284E 107 109 Fault x Code A code that represents a drive fault Read Only Drive Display 284E 110 Process Display N aoe t that is scaled by Parameter 197 Read Only Drive Display 284E 112 Control Source Pe source of the Start Command and Speed P A a Drive Display 284E 113 Control In Status of control inputs These can be used in DeviceLogix Read Only Drive Display 284E 114 Dig In Status Status of the control terminal block digital inputs 0 Drive Display 284E 115 Comm Status Status of the communications ports 0 Drive Display 284E 116 Control SW Ver Main Control Board software version for AC Drive Read Only Drive Display 284E 118 Elapsed Run Time Accumulated time drive is outputting power Read Only Drive Display 284E 122 Output Power Output power present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Read Only Drive Display
376. that the available fault current at the controller is that of the source on the line side of the fuses Although it is true that the wiring impedance between the fuses and the first controller reduce the fault current available at the controllers this reduction is neglected by assuming the first controller the 0 5 Hp Bulletin 294 controller is very close to the fuses 4 Requirement Four Overload Protection The motors conductors and controllers must be protected against motor overload conditions Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 293 Appendix A 294 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Text 7 3 1 General Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor motor controller and branch circuit conductor against excessive heating due to motor overloads or failure to start 7 3 1 1 Motors Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with Article 430 Part III of NFPA 70 Analysis Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integral overload relay This overload function must be set in accordance with Article 430 Part III of NFPA 70 Selecting the ampacity of the circuit conductors appropriately see Requirement 5 ensures the overload relays when set according to 7 3 1 1 will protect the conductors against overheating due to motor overloads Supplementary Note Each individual control
377. the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection the user must implement logic to open the input contactor Troubleshooting Verify that 3 phase line power and control power is applied to unit Attempt to reset fault If fault persists replace control module Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Hardware Fault Fan RPM Warning Troubleshooting Chapter 10 DB1 Comm Fault Control Supervisor Object DB1 Fault Attribute Bit 8 The communications link is monitored continuously If the DB1 stops responding then the MCB issues this fault Since the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection the user must implement logic to open the input contactor Troubleshooting Replace control module DB1 Thermal Warning Control Supervisor Object DB1 Status Attribute Bit 1 A DBI Thermal Warning is issued if the predicted future resistor body temperature is greater than the Max DB1 resistor temperature x DB1 Thermal Warning Percent Troubleshooting None DB1 resistor thermal value has exceeded the preset threshold of 90 of thermal value Reading the Control Supervisor Object Ifa DB1 fault occurs the Control Supervisor Object provides the detailed information specific to the fault Create an Explicit Message Instruction such as Class 0029hex Instance 0001hex Attribute 158 A bit enumerated WORD of information is returned See the CIP section for details FAN Fault Handling wit
378. the SQE test is unnecessary Ignore this media counter Deferred Transmissions 244 However if the network is still busy a collision will be recorded Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 The number of outgoing packets whose transmission is deferred because the network is busy when the first attempt is made to send them Important The module only defers the first attempt to transmit a packet After the first attempt the module transmits the packet without checking Media Counter Late Collisions Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Definition The number of times two devices transmit data simultaneously Neither device detects a collision because the time it takes to send the signal from one end of the network to the other exceeds the time that is needed to put the entire packet on the network Consequently neither device senses the other s transmission until the entire packet is out on the network Late collisions often result from these conditions Excessive network segment length e Repeaters between devices Important Large and small packets can be affected by late collisions However the transmitter cannot detect late collisions between small packets Consequently a network that experiences measurable late collisions between large packets also loses small packets Excessive Collisions The number of frames that experience 16 consecutive collisions MAC Transmit Errors The number
379. the device If a difference exists either upload from the device or download from the project to the device In this example choose to download 355 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 AppendixF Application Examples Figure 119 is an example of the parameter correlation when a difference occurs between the project and the device Figure 119 Differences Found i Resolve differences by uploading to project or downloading to ArmorStart ArmorStart Value 171 Preset Freq1 10 0 _ Upload J Download e cance Hep Figure 120 is an example of the DeviceLogix correlation when a difference occurs between the project and the device Figure 120 DeviceLogix Correlation x Differences exist between the DeviceLogix configuration in this project and the DeviceLogix configuration in the connected A ArmorStart Resolve configuration differences by uploading to project or downloading to the ArmorStart Differences Project ArmorStart DeviceLogix Enable Enabled Disabled Upload Download Cancel 356 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Logic Author Description Revision Revision Note Application Examples Appendix F Note the caution statement before download Enabled bi preset freq example Launch Editor I i DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur Failure to load proper Devi
380. the remote start button based on the example I O table gt 3p Name Status Input Fault Input Network Boolean 5 Place the input to the left of the reset function To drop the input on the page left click the desired position 6 Place the mouse cursor over the tip of In 0 The tip turns green Click the tip when it turns green 7 Move the mouse cursor toward the Set input of the reset function A line follows the cursor When a connection can be made the tip of the RSL function also turns green Click the on Input and the line is drawn from In 0 to the Set Input of the reset function Note If this was not a valid connection one of the pin tips would have turned red rather than green Left double clicking the unused portion of the grid or pressing the Esc key at any time cancels the connection process Si Function Block Editor ArmorStart_EtherNetiIP_284E File Edit View Communications Tools Help 8 era ale p olal zan BOR xoR anor zwam sirar zsor jee Be 2 Timer Counter h MovejLogical fs A B c j Reset Dominant Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 335 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 8 From the toolbar Click the Bit Input button and select In 1 from the pull down menu This is the remote stop button based on the example I O table 9 Place the input to the left of the reset function 10 Connect the input to the reset inp
381. tings and the controllers may be any mixture of motor controller technologies magnetic motor controllers and variable frequency AC drive controllers This appendix addresses only NFPA 79 applications This is not because these products are only suitable for industrial machinery but because industrial machinery is their primary market In fact while all versions of the ArmorStart products may be applied on industrial machinery the versions that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option may also be used in applications governed by NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NEC see ArmorStart Product Family 282 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A Listing requirements for a factory assembly and separate assemblies e The first sentence of the NEC s 430 53 C relies on two terms that the NEC does not define factory assembly and separate assemblies But the text also requires both to be listed listed factory assembly or separate assemblies listed for such use 45A of UL 508C contains the 430 53 C listing requirements for drives 52A of UL 508 contains the 430 53 C listing requirements for contactor based motor controllers Neither contains the term factory assembly or the term separate assemblies and each requires this marking Suitable for
382. tion Device Port Refresh communication Cone Status Ring Fault Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Solution Determine where the fault condition exists and correct it It may be necessary to click the Refresh Communication link to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition exists Table 46 Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Issue Description Solution When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occur Multiple possible solutions exist The active supervisor blocks traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network segmentation that is For the disconnections and reconnections some nodes may become unreachable issue no solution is required e The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is off anes aut hal se have pe the evice to the network permanently e As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx communication f P y i software the Status field Rapid Fault Restore Cycles Forthe duplex mismatch ISSUE reconfigure the duplex parameters to verify that they match Figure 93 Rapid Fault Restore Cycles Status between the devices e Forthe electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use
383. tive samples are below the Min Current Level and the DB1 is ON then a fault is recorded This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is higher than expected This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 DB1 Resistor Sel is Disabled Troubleshooting DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current lower than expected Turn off all power to unit Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to discharge AN BURN HAZARD DB1 resistor may still be hot Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module Measure DB1 resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter See the specification for minimum DBI resistor values If DB1 resistance value is within limits replace control module If not replace DB1 resistor Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 233 Chapter 10 234 Troubleshooting DB1 Switch Fault Control Supervisor Object DB1 Fault Attribute Bit 3 A DBI Switch fault is issued when continuous DB resistor current is detected when the Drive Bus Voltage level is less than the DB1 Voltage Level If 5 consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage less than DB1 Level is detected along with continuous DBI resistor current flow then a shorted DB1 IGBT fault DB1 Switch is recorded It is the user s responsibility to provide an input power contactor to each ArmorStart with a drive The user must write logic to control open the input contactor to the ArmorStart in the event of a DB1 Sw
384. to RJ45 Bulkhead Adapter 1585A Description Cat No e Transition from IP20 environment to IP67 environment In cabinet connectivity with RJ45 connector providing On Machine solution with M12 D Code connector 1585A DD4JD Differential 100 ohm terminators that are used for unused pairs e Cat5e 272 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Accessories Chapter 12 Sensor Media Description Description 1 0 Connection Pin Count Connector Cat No i Straight Female h i Straight Male EED PRONO DC Micro amp Patchcord Input Output atchcor Straight Female a 889D F4ACDE EtherNet IP aie Right Angle Male Communications i H k Uh gt Straight Female 879D F4ACDM Se se Y Input e Right Angle Female 879D R4ACM Replace symbol with desired length in meters for example Cat No 889D F4ACDM 1 for a 1 m cable Standard cable lengths 1 m 2m 5m and 10m Sensor Wiring Sensor Wiring Pin 1 24V A3 or DNET Pin 2 Input 0 Brown i Pin 3 Common 2 White Pin 4 Input 1 E C4 l l Pin 5 NC No Connection 3 m Black CI 4 m Blue Quick Disconnect Sensor Male Female Input ArmorStart Connection A Connection Motor and Brake Cables il Bs j ql Motor Cable Cordsets 3 9 8 280 MTR22 M3 4 13 1 280 MTR22 M34 6 19 6 280 MTR22 M6 8 26 2 280
385. tor Installations for USA and Canada Markets 46 Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines 000 0 sees 46 Other System Design Considerations 000 cece eee 48 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 00 cece 48 General Notes Bulletin 284E only 0 cess eee eee ees 48 WHER 2 nde Moline shale Ao Nal eked hit Medes hte lel 48 Grounding sse ree o E E aAA E texas arate 49 Grounding Safety Grounds i5 35 ate sede er couaesusyeas Setar 49 Grounding PE or Grouid is cia chet id eevee g eee diab 50 Shield and Grounding of Motors and Motor Cables 50 Motor Cable Considerations ccccccececcsenceecees 50 Unshielded AS at 65 gic cisco wersnentarandh kensont a ndetowausaadendehabe 50 Shielded Caw letsy cu Uh Ub Miao ct abode a a a Abie Mia ot 51 Shield Terminating Conhectotssc ited ncn sycbe oes cee eaeinetiess 52 ArmorConhect Power M diaj iacs evitdeameeanasdts iewgueeatanesan 52 Description einernie cetacean EN NEE 52 ArmorConnect Connections 0 cece cece eect e eee eeennees 55 Control Power Overview Using 6 5 Pin Control 55 Control Power using 4 Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter 57 ArmorConnect Cable Ratints cscs 2 seuss over toes chee 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Product Commissioning Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Table
386. troduction san are das cn eg eras eamre ren Reet wh wets ee 121 Keypad Description ici oe eect eum A EEE A EEA 121 Keypad and HOA Disable o n 125 Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Basic Sctup Parameters aserite ra AA awadtaeaete 127 Programmable Parameters Parameter Groupe sr r usu E E S TASAA AESA 128 ArmorStart EtherNet IP Parameters 3 ccdeiie si tow atemteatvanuderncere 129 Introd ction cu ckci een uate te hal cau dh Medea Bal hig 129 Parameter Programming isc os c 8 asad bona ea cae 129 Bulletin 280E 2 SUE vcs semis eee e o E EEA See wines 129 Basic Sta SG OU Pica nahn tees ears Poet he eels cei had 129 Produced Assembly Config Group 00 cece eee eee 138 Starter Protection Group itis cnc haa se ae eae eee ases 139 User I O Configuration Gioup ccisischivghceeteunoeseenknss 141 Miscellaneous Configuration Group s sererererrsrere 145 Starter Display Group Bulletin 280E 281E only 146 Starter Setup Group Bulletin 280E 281E only 148 Bulletin 284E eet aa a AK EEE 149 Basic Status Groupeicvgs iaiia rout te ge EEA 149 Produced Assembly Config Group 00 cece eee 159 Starter Protection Group sssssrerresssrrersrerrrrrrs 160 User I O Configuration Groups 224 cn ch vevehy aden eee e hehe 163 Miscellaneous Configuration Group 0 cece eee eee 166 Drive I O Configuration Group Bulletin 284E only 168 Drive Display Group Bulletin 284E only
387. ts High Flex 3 9 8 285 BRCF25 M3 6 19 6 285 BRCF25 M6 90 M25 Source Brake Cable IP67 NEMA Type 4 10 32 8 285 BRCF25 M10 14 45 9 285 BRCF25 M14 20 65 6 285 BRCF25 M20 Dynamic Brake Cable Me a Cable IP67 NEMA Type 4 3 9 8 285 DBK22 M3 274 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Accessories Chapter 12 Description Cat No Motor Cable Patchcords 1 3 3 280 MTR22 M1D 90 Male Straight Female M22 IP67 NEMA Type 4 3 9 8 280 MTR22 M3D 1 3 3 280 MTR35 M1D 90 Male Straight Female M35 IP67 NEMA Type 4 3 9 8 280 MTR35 M3D Motor Cable Patchcords Shielded VFD 1 3 3 284 MTRS22 M1D 90 Male Straight Female M22 IP67 NEMA Type 4 3 9 8 284 MTRS22 M3D Extended Source Control Brake Cable Patchcords 1 3 3 285 BRC25 M1D 3 9 8 285 BRC25 M3D 4 13 1 285 BRC25 M4D 6 19 6 285 BRC25 M6D 90 Male Straight Female M25 IP67 NEMA Type 4 8 26 2 285 BRC25 M8D 10 32 8 285 BRC25 M10D 12 39 4 285 BRC25 M12D 14 45 9 285 BRC25 M14D 20 65 6 285 BRC25 M20D Receptacle Straight Male with wire IP67 NEMA Type 4 0 5 1 6 285 M25M M05 Three Phase Power Field Installed Receptacles Male Female Pin Count Assembly Rating Cable Diameter Cat No 16 AWG 600V 10 A i 14ANG 600V 15 A ee 0 28 0 47in 280 FAM22F 2
388. ts R S T L1 L2 L3 Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death Darkened display LEDs are not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels Risk of shock environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles gt ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury and or equipment damage gt 30 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change 280E 281E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin Figure 12 Dimensions for Bulletin 280E 281E CR Option 189 a 7 ae o gt t 268 110 55 287 5 111 32 N SN 5 3 02 6
389. tus and Reset 2 64 444 sche eon bass Electronic Data Sheet EDS Jeno ke dneteegeee ee sane rre Fault Diagnostics a edo ee dias shel chun ea ete Oooh ong Protection Faults say vient x cates a aoe hee EE aA Standard Features vasaa et erei a separa REE EER DU e A hh Nig A r od ENA E E N eR O tp tss reoi wt EEA E AE EEE A E E Aa Gland Plate Entrance onnnnnnnnenn nunne r renere renner Motor Cable anr a a EE EE AE IS D viceLog r ehhh Ci han acl Eloy Aa S A AS Factory Installed Options 142 0002 iid Gee eae Optional HOA Keypad Configuration Bulletin 280E 281E only sccsciiaseveesev ees eeseedtes Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function Bulletin 284E only i lt 0403 525 canes sank seoewens as pacar Source Brake Contactor and Connector Bulletin 284E only EMI Filter Bulletin 284E only o nonnene earren Dynamic Brake Connector Bulletin 284E only IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor Bulletin 284E only Output Contactor Bulletin 284E only 00 eee Shielded Motor Cable Bulletin 284E only 006 ArmorStart Ether N t IP Peattresy 2525 eyadn5tdacadsesval ele ne Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Table of Contents Installation Wiring and Maintenance Chapter 2 IRECOIVINE A ach cacirasaed eh ai POS eo aara testa dae a a a a 29 Unpacking prerano sooebaeueaveckea awe EOE EEA carne 29 Inspecting aer ni ous Reese eaGs tas 2595948 ne o AN ste
390. twork PLC or Connected Explicit Messaging NetworkReferenceStatus Speed reference comes from the network not DeviceLogix AtReference At commanded speed reference Ind Input 0 In Input 1 In2 Input 2 In3 Input 3 Hand HOA is in Auto mode DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed BrakeContactorStatus Source brake contactor status 1 close 0 open OutputContactorStatus Ouput contactor status 1 close O open OutputFrequency VFD frequency Pt0ODeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt01DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt02DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt03DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt04DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status PtO5DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt06DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt07DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt08DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt09DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt10DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt11DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt12DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt13DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status Pt14DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status LogicEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled Int0ODeviceOut Data reference by Parameter 13 IntO1DeviceOut Data reference by Parameter 14 IntO2DeviceOut Data reference by Parameter 15 Int03DeviceOut Data
391. ue 1 Hold Last State When set to 0 Output A opens or closes as determined by the setting in Parameter 38 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Parameter Number 34 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 35 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutANetFitValue ParameterNumber GCS Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 37 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA Net IdlValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37 OutA Net IdIState is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB Pr FitState This parameter along with Parameter 40 OutB Pr FitValue defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip occurs 0 Goto PrFlt Value 1 Ignore PrFit When set to 1 Output B continues to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output B opens or closes as determined by setting in Parameter 40 OutB Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Out
392. uirements and Parameter 198 SW Current Trip setting Trip has been exceeded 238 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Table 39 Bulletin 284E Faults Parameters 107 108 and 109 Fault 1 2 or 3 No Fault Type Description Action F64 Drive Overload 2 Drive rating of 150 for 1 min or 200 Reduce load or extend Accel Time for 3 s has been exceeded F70 Power Unit 2 Failure has been detected in the drive Cyde power power section 2 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F80 SVC Autotune The autotune function was either Restart procedure cancelled by the user or failed F81 Comm Loss 2 RS485 DSI port stopped Turn off using Parameter 205 Comm Loss Action communicating 2 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F100 Parameter 2 The checksum read from the board does Set Parameter 141 Reset To Defaults to Option 1 Reset Defaults Checksum not match the checksum calculated F122 1 0 Board Fail 2 Failure has been detected in the drive Cycle power control and 1 0 section 2 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared See Table 38 for Type description Table 40 Motor Does Not Start Cause s Indication Corrective Action No output voltage to the motor None Check the power circuit Check the supply voltage Check all fuses and disconnects Check the motor Check that the motor is connected pr
393. ule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 30 0 Parameter Number 200 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 201 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Comm Loss Action Selects the drive s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication errors 0 Fault Default Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and coast to stop 1 Coast Stop Stops drive via coast to stop 2 Stop Stops via Parameter 137 Stop Mode setting 3 Continue Last Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed that is saved in RAM Comm Loss Time Sets the time that the drive remains in communication loss before implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 Comm Loss Action Slip Hertz FLA Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Parameter Number 205 Related Parameters 115 137 206 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 0 Para
394. ull load current ratings of the 5 Hp motors I1 I2 and I5 are the rated input currents of the Bulletin 294E controllers Referring to the explanatory text c in Figure 110 the method for calculating the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors follows first multiply the largest input current to any controller Bulletin 290E 291E or 294E by 125 In this case the input currents to the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers I3 and I4 are the largest 7 6 A Because they are the same either can be used Choose I3 to calculate 125 of the maximum 125 of 7 6 A is 9 5 A Second sum the remaining input currents I1 I2 I4 IS for a total of 17 9 A Third add the result from the first step to the result from the second for a total of 27 4 A Finally the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is 27 4 A Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 295 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Supplementary Note 1 The input currents to the Bulletin 294E motor controllers are larger than the output currents to the motor because the input currents contain harmonics resulting from the power conversion process This harmonic content and the magnitude of the resulting non sinusoidal input currents depend on the impedance of the electrical supply The value that is specified for the rated input current is the maximum value over the range of
395. ult The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1 254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 192 168 1 switch setting The IP address can also be set using DHCP e IfDHCP is preferred use Rockwell Automation BootP DHCP utility version 2 3 or later that ships with RSLogix 5000 or RSLinx software e Or use a third party DHCP server This document assumes that the user has set the IP address to 192 168 1 1 The user can change this IP address to any address either statically or dynamically ATTENTION To avoid unintended operation the adapter must be assigned a A fixed IP address If a DHCP server is used it must be configured to assign a fixed IP address for your adapter Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Product Commissioning Chapter 4 Manually Configure the Network Address Switches Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches Set the network address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the I O module Figure 56 Switches on the 1 0 Module Writable surface for IP address Protective IP67 Caps Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 79 Chapter 4 80 Product Commissioning Figure 57 Network Address Example X100 This example shows th
396. ult If the device has detected a non recoverable major fault see Table 33 Flashing Green Red Self test While the device is performing its power up testing the module status indicator shall be flashing green red Fault Type 0 EEPROM Fault See Parameter 63 Base Trip for the Base Module Trip Status Table 33 Steady Red MOD LED Status See Table 32 Description Non volatile memory value out of range for a local parameter or a write failure is detected This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED 1 Internal Comm2 The Internal communication connection has timed out This fault is also reflected by a flashing red MOD status LED 2 Hardware Fault Internal diagnostics checks failed This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED 3 Control Module An illegal or unsupported Control Module product code or revision has been detected Also reported if no Control Module is detected on power up This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED 4 15 Reserved Reserved Table 34 Network Status Indicator Indicator State Summary Requirement Steady OFF Not powered no IP address If the device does not have an IP address or is powered OFF the network status indicator shall be steady OFF Flashing Green No connections If the device has no established connections but has obtained an IP address the network status indicator shall be flas
397. ult This error indicates a shorted sensor shorted input Correct isolate or remove wiring error before restarting device wiring input mistakes or a blown output fuse the system This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 8 Yes Over Temperature This fault is generated when the operating temperature Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins Verify that has been exceeded This fault cannot be disabled ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 C 104 F 1 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive 9 Yes Phase Imbalance The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance Check the power system and correct if necessary This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 10 Yes Control Power 24V DC Lost The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold Check the state of the network power supply A3 A1 Unswitched Power terminal and look for media problems This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 11 Reserved Not Used 12 Reserved Not Used 13 No EEprom This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart If the fault was initiated by a transient power cycling inoperable Possible causes of this fault are transients should clear the problem otherwise replacement of the that are induced during EEprom storage routines ArmorStart may be required This fault cannot be disabled 14 No Hdw Fit This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem Check for a base starter module mismatch If no
398. um Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 169 Chapter7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Drvin Net IdIValue Parameter Number 54 This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET SET te panne ie S tl i Drvin Net IdIState is set to 0 Group Drive 1 0 Config 0 O0FF 1 0N Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Drive Display Group Bulletin 284E only Output Freq Parameter Number 101 Output frequency present at T1 T2 T3 Related Parameters 102 110 134 135 138 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value Read Only Commanded Freq Parameter Number 102 Value of the active frequency command Related Parameters 101 113 134 135 138 Displays the commanded frequency even Access Rule GET if the drive is not running Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value Read Only Output Current Parameter Number 103 Output Current present at T1 T2 T3 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Drive Display Units 0 01 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value Read Only 170 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Output Voltage Output Voltage present
399. upervisor re establishes and configures the ring topology All neighboring nodes detect this and reconfigure themselves back to ring A DLR network is a single fault tolerant network that is intended for the interconnection of automation devices At least one ring supervisor must be configured before a ring is formed IMPORTANT Any nodes that do not support DLR should not be directly connected to the ring The node should be connected to the ring through a switch that supports DLR The advantages of the DLR network include e Simple installation e Resilience to a single point of failure on the network e Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort that is required to set up and use the network as compared to a linear or star network IMPORTANT Products with EtherNet IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnet You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards NICs connected to two different subnets IMPORTANT ArmorStart EtherNet IP cannot be configured as a ring supervisor 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Introduction to EtherNet IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3 Number of Nodes ona DLR Network Ethernet Switches Ethernet Media Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a
400. us Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 43 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 157 Chapter 7 158 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 Warning Reserved Reserved Phase Loss Reserved Reserved Control Power 1 0 Warning Reserved Phase Imbalance A3 Power Loss Reserved Reserved Reserved Hardware Reserved Miscellaneous The warning is triggered simultaneously the fault is generated If the fault is disabled a warning will still occur Includes DB1 Thermal Warning Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Base Trip Parameter Number 63 The parameter provides the Base Module Access Rule GET Trip Status Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Warning 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X EEPROM Fault X I
401. use in an industrial environment Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P June 2015 3 Notes 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P June 2015 Product Overview Table of Contents European Communities EC Directive Compliance Low Voltage and EMC Directives 0c ccc e eee ences Chapter 1 Introductio Nair cased Bours thelr A T ends BLA Goh evant eds Descriptions eiae arnon de sdeos eure nedas abies don porns Catalog Number Explanation acco sade triacs op sireke ewan eenens Operation se Raye bi hua tis tte e hel ol hea dite A ei alles Mode of Operation 224 iki is Sages eee ee Bulletin 280E 281E asic stout ded hawk acaeanaenth wars grsteomtans waded canarias Full Voltage Starts viciy iene diuniier issue eee icaaudkehars Buller Oa cnias bone vue E RAR a oan eee aA RAS aS Sensorless Vector Control vues ac aS een ee edad eh aes Description of Features e ononturdrceeotessoeton Gh nesoreadeueseneets Overload Protections oe jctac een E E AE AAS Embedded Switch Technology vcccesacuii vis Vasu koe cone gues Switched vs Unswitched Control Power Input Output I O Connection saiek R tee Yelk eae eae he elias Becher Net IP Ports 35 0 Woe is ahi date E pea eae eee Embedded Web Server 5 a 45 cag bo etcne een cedacend baer eens E mail Notification Configuration 0 000 cece eens EtherNet IP LED Status Indication lt 3 ncvrewscea a etieleiis ceeuncdated Control Module LED Sta
402. ut Group Object 0x0029 Control Supervisor Object 0x002C Overload Object 0x0047 Device Level Ring Object 0x0048 QoS Object 0x0097 DPI Fault Object 0x0098 DPI Alarm Object 0x00B4 Interface Object Ox00F5 TCP IP Interface Object Ox00F6 Ethernet Link Object For convenience all objects that are accessible via the EtherNet IP port are included 298 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 CIP Information Appendix B Identity Object CLASS CODE 0x0001 The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object Revision UINT Max Instance UINT 9 Up to nine instances Instance 1 9 of the Identity Object are supported The following table shows what each instance represents and what the revision attribute reports Instance Name Revision Attribute 2 EtherNet IP Boot The firmware rev of the EtherNet IP board boot firmware 3 FPGA The rev of the FPGA program A coded revision reflecting the revision attribute of the other various identity object instances excluding boot code Major revisions are coded as OSSSMMMM O reserved by DeviceNet 4 Control Module SSS Revision of Soft start or inverter Initial release 0 We will be limited to support for 8 major revisions e MMMM Revision of Main ArmorStart board Initial release 1 We will be limited to support for 15 major revisions 5 panier m The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board O
403. ut of the reset function El Function Block Editor ArmorStart_EtherNetIP_284E File Edit View Communications Tools Help Bs B 2 QQia O G Bn sor exor swor seven BNoR emor sero sm gt Aki S Timer Counter h MovesLogic RESD amp Reset Dominant 336 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 11 From the toolbar Click the Bit Output button and select Run Forward from the hardware boolean tree Run Forward is the relay controlling the coil of the contactor ef RunForward Name Datatype gt AN E Hardware Boole 12 Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the reset function block 13 Connect the output of the reset function block to Run Forward El Function Block Editor ArmorStart_EtherNetIP_284E Fie Edit View Communications Tools Help S gt era ale nest _ Timer Counter_ Move Logical CC lt BAND BOR BXOR BNOT mwm BNOR BENOR SETD RSTD p j ResetOominat et Frona 14 Click the Verify button that is located in the toolbar or select Logic Verify from the Tools pull down menu Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 337 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 15 Click file close The program is not saved automatically Fill in the information on following window and accept changes This saves t
404. utonegotiation Are not using a fiber converter No action is required Important Speed and or Duplex is the default setting Autonegotation enables devices to select the best way to communicate without you having to do any configuring All devices with an Ethernet speed rating of 100 Mbps are required to support autonegotiation None Are not using a fiber converter Change your module s Autonegotiate status to Speed and or Duplex When you use an EtherNet IP communication module with multiple ports make sure that you use the same Autonegotiate Status configuration for both ports Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 247 Chapter10 Troubleshooting 2 Review the values in the Media Counters Port 1 table Media Counters Port 1 Alignment Errors o FCS Errors o o Single Collisions Multiple Collisions o SQE Test Errors o Deferred Transmissions o Late Collisions o Excessive Collisions o MAC Transmit Errors o Carrier Sense Errors o Frame Too Long o MAC Receive Errors 0 If Then Any media counters are greater than zero You need to investigate further These errors are counted A duplex mismatch exists between your EtherNet IP communication module and the switch port Alignment To clear the duplex mismatch FCS 1 Configure the EtherNet IP communication module and the corresponding Ethernet switch port for a forced operation not Carrier Sense autonegotiation 2 Verify that th
405. vanced Setup Determines the brand width around Parameter 219 Skip Frequency 220 Skip Freq Band Parameter 220 Skip Freq Band is split applying 1 2 above and 1 2 0 0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup below the actual skip frequency 221 Stall Fault Time Sets forthe fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a 0 60 Seconds Drive Advanced Setup fault is issued Enables disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM A 224 Var PWM Disable output waveform that is defined by Parameter 191 PWM Frequency 0 Enabled Drive Advanced Setup 225 Torque Perf Mode Enables disables sensorless vector control operation 1 Sensrls Vect Drive Advanced Setup 226 Motor NP FLA Set to the motor nameplate full load amps Drive Rated Amps Drive Advanced Setup Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 IR Voltage 227 Autotune Drop and Parameter 229 Flux Current Ref that affect sensorless vector 0 Ready Idle Drive Advanced Setup performance 228 IR Voltage Drop Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator gl Drive Advanced Setup 229 Flux Current Ref Value of amps for full motor flux pee Drive Advanced Setup Sets the time that the drive will remain at minimum frequency before 260 EM Brk OFF Delay ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil 0 0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup relay when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to Option 8 or 9 Sets the time that the drive will remain at minimum frequency
406. vides the status of drive parameters 0 Drive 1 0 Configuration 284E This parameter along with Parameter 50 Drvin Pr FitValue 0 49 Drvin Pr FitState defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 will respond when i Drive 1 0 Configuration 284E ane Go to PrFlt Value a protection trip occurs 50 Drvin Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs O Open Drive 1 0 Configuration 284E 1 4 assumes when a trip occurs This parameter along with Parameter 52 Drvin Net a 51 Drvin Net FitState FitValue defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 will Goto Fault Value Drive 1 0 Configuration 284E respond when a network fault occurs This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 52 Drvin Net FitValue 1 4 when a network fault occurs and Parameter 51 Drvin 0 OFF Drive 1 0 Configuration 284E Net FitState is set to 0 This parameter along with Parameter 54 Drvin Net 0 53 Drvin Net FitState FitValue defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 will T Drive 1 0 Configuration 284E i i am Go to Fault Value respond when a DeviceNet network is idle 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7 Table 28 ArmorStart Parameters Parameter Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Controller This parameter determines the stat
407. wn in Figure 109 and Figure 110 The circuit topology consists of a set of 10 AWG conductors that supply multiple sets of 14 AWG conductors Each set of 14 AWG conductors supply a controller and motor These conductor sizes are chosen to be the smallest conductors that have sufficient ampacity without derating for the loads each must carry All wiring is customer supplied rather than the ArmorConnect Power Media because all controllers have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option Fuses protect the branch circuit The example addresses five basic requirements that the motor controllers fuses and conductors must satisfy The letters in the circles on Figure 109 and Figure 110 are referenced in the explanations as letters in parentheses Ellipses points are used to replace NFPA 79 text that is not applicable to the multiple motor branch circuit that is shown in Figure 109 and Figure 110 Unless indicated all text is from NFPA 79 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 289 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Figure 109 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit Conductor and Controller Protection Electrical Supply 480Y 277V Available Fault Current re eweennen Sym Amps RMS 9 KA Disconnecting H Means H
408. x Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 104 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Display Units xx x Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 105 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group Starter Display Units FLA Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E UM001C EN P September 2015 147 Chapter7 Bulletin 280E 281E 284E Programmable Parameters Starter Setup Group Bulletin 280E 281E only FLA Setting The motor s full load current rating is programmed in this parameter Parameter Number 106 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Setup Units xx x Amps Minimum Value See Table 23 Maximum Value See Table 23 Default Value See Table 23 Table 23 FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values with indicated setting precision FLA Current Range A Default Value Minimum Value Maximum Value 0 24 1 2 0 24 0 5 2 5 0 5 1 1 5 5 1 1 3 2 16 0 3 2 Overload Class Parameter Number 107 This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET SET eee Daa is ce Sane Units Xx x Amps Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 1 OL Reset Level Parameter Number 108 This parameter allows the installer select Access Rule GET SET a ae Capacity that an overload Data Type USINT Group Starter Setup Units F

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents